View
218
Download
1
Category
Preview:
Citation preview
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
Copyright © Nikon Metrology
All Rights Reserved
This publication or parts thereof may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any
purpose.
Company names, logos and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their
respective owners. Nikon Metrology N.V. or any of its group companies make no claim to third
party trademarks.
The use of Nikon Metrology products, services and materials is subject to the Nikon Metrology
General Sales Terms and Conditions.
iii
Table Of Contents
Introduction ...............................................................................................1
What’s New ................................................................................................3
What's New in Focus 10.1 ........................................................................... 3
Focus Handheld ........................................................................................... 3
Authorising Focus Software ....................................................................5
Obtaining a license ....................................................................................... 6
License Admin Control Center .................................................................... 8
Using the software .................................................................................. 10
The User Interface...................................................................................... 10
Frequently Asked Questions about the new GUI ...................................... 12
Using the three mouse buttons ................................................................... 14
Getting started using the software .............................................................. 14
Configuring ribbon groups ......................................................................... 16
Property sheets ........................................................................................... 18
Selection ..................................................................................................... 19
Manipulating the model ............................................................................. 19
Keyboard short cuts ................................................................................... 20
Conventions used in the documentation .................................................... 21
Multiple processors .................................................................................... 21
Starting Focus from the command line ...................................................... 21
Starting Focus from a command line ............................................. 21
Starting Focus from Camio ............................................................ 22
The Focus Menus ................................................................................... 24
The File menu ............................................................................................ 24
The View menu .......................................................................................... 33
Workflows menu ........................................................................................ 40
The Focus Tool bars ............................................................................... 48
The Quick Access toolbar .......................................................................... 49
The Additional toolbar ............................................................................... 50
Inspection toolbar....................................................................................... 51
Named Views toolbar ................................................................................ 54
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
iv
Info/Visibility toolbar ................................................................................ 63
Feature Flyouts toolbar .............................................................................. 66
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow ........................ 68
Nominal task .............................................................................................. 68
Import Nominal .............................................................................. 69
Feature Fitting ................................................................................ 75
GDT Dimensions ......................................................................... 114
Modify Nominal........................................................................... 132
Handheld Measurement task .................................................................... 140
Previews ....................................................................................... 140
Measure ........................................................................................ 142
Settings ......................................................................................... 202
Measured task .......................................................................................... 204
Import Measured .......................................................................... 205
Cut/Merge .................................................................................... 209
Filter/Mesh ................................................................................... 219
Feature Fitting .............................................................................. 224
Modified Measured ...................................................................... 285
Advanced ..................................................................................... 294
Align task ................................................................................................. 299
Align ............................................................................................ 300
Orient ........................................................................................... 331
Compare task ........................................................................................... 336
Compare ....................................................................................... 336
Sections ........................................................................................ 352
Report task ............................................................................................... 366
Flyouts.......................................................................................... 366
Reporting...................................................................................... 387
Dimensions .................................................................................. 400
Export ........................................................................................... 413
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (STL Based) workflow ............ 418
Nominal task ............................................................................................ 418
Import Nominal ............................................................................ 418
Feature Fitting .............................................................................. 418
Table Of Contents
v
GD&T Dimensions ...................................................................... 418
Cut / Merge .................................................................................. 418
Filter / Mesh ................................................................................. 418
Modify Nominal........................................................................... 418
Handheld Measurements task .................................................................. 419
Measured task .......................................................................................... 419
Align task ................................................................................................. 419
Compare task ........................................................................................... 419
Report task ............................................................................................... 419
Import Nominal Ribbon Group ................................................................ 419
Import ........................................................................................... 420
Import Features ............................................................................ 423
Handheld Measurements - Inspection Turbine Blades workflow ..... 424
Nominal task ............................................................................................ 424
Handheld Measurements task .................................................................. 424
Measured task .......................................................................................... 424
Align task ................................................................................................. 424
Turbine Blade task ................................................................................... 424
Compare ....................................................................................... 424
Sections ........................................................................................ 424
Construct ...................................................................................... 424
TBI ............................................................................................... 424
Report task ............................................................................................... 425
TBI Ribbon Group ................................................................................... 425
Turbine Inspect ............................................................................ 425
Turbine Blade Flyout ................................................................... 430
The Information dialog ......................................................................... 432
The Numbers tab ...................................................................................... 432
The Curvature Radius Information dialog - Numbers tab ........... 433
The Wall Thickness Information dialog – Numbers tab .............. 433
The Colors tab .......................................................................................... 434
The Interrogate tab ................................................................................... 435
The Drawstyle tab .................................................................................... 436
The Section Information dialog – Drawstyle tab ......................... 437
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
vi
The Edge Information dialog – Drawstyle tab ............................. 438
The Attributes dialog – Drawstyle tab ......................................... 439
The Attributes tab .................................................................................... 439
Automation ............................................................................................ 441
Glossary ................................................................................................ 447
Index ...................................................................................................... 451
1
Introduction
Focus 10.1 Inspection is the successor to Focus 10.0 Inspection, the next-generation software for
point cloud to CAD inspection built on the new Metris software platform, Together with greatly
improved functionality, Focus 10.1 Inspection is ready for all your Inspection needs.
Details on the configuration of the scanning hardware is contained in the Handheld API manual.
The software offers a complete tool set for measuring and processing pointclouds.
Points can be imported from any source; both standard and machine dependent formats
are supported.
A closed triangulated mesh can be generated through the points. The accuracy of this
mesh is guaranteed by the integrated 3D filter.
The triangulated mesh can be exported to standard formats such as STL, ready for copy
milling.
The user interface, composed of different worksheets guides the user through each task in the
workflow.
The following workflows are available:
The Solid based workflow deals with Solids as primary Nominal model.
The STL based workflow deals with meshes as primary Nominal models.
The Turbine Blade Inspection workflow deals with turbine blade data and provides
specific computations and reports.
Each task contains its own dedicated set of tools with user intuitive icons. Data and results are
organized in a clear directory tree containing nominal, measured and inspection data, thus
providing a comprehensible overview when applying multiple inspection strategies on this data.
Reporting is smoothly integrated with Microsoft Excel in which users can create their own report
templates. The conventional 3D deviation and section reports can be annotated with user defined
fly-outs, text, and comments. The use of Microsoft Excel for reporting enables easy sharing of
results with colleagues or customers.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
2
This Reference Manual describes each of the tools provided in the user interface. For more
extensive or customized training, contact your Nikon Metrology Dealer.
For technical support you can consult the Support Page on the Nikon Metrology Web site
http://www.nikonmetrology.com.
3
What’s New
What's New in Focus 10.1
Full LC15Dx support.
Many changes in the data processing and scanner calibration have been done during the
development of the LC15Dx scanner, based on the feedback we’ve had from internal as
well as external customers. The most important changes are:
New calibration method.
The calibration speed and the calibration path have been reviewed to get the
highest possible accuracy with an LC15Dx scanner.
Online subtract.
The online subtract algorithm that was originally developed for XC scanners has
been adjusted so that it can also be used for line scanners. The algorithm results in
removing the ripples that are sometimes visible in the overlap zones of a scan
patch. It also performs an automatic blend operation to remove possible jumps
between subsequent scan lines in the same patch.
Added support for Wenzel 2040 controllers using PHS heads in discrete mode.
The ACIS importer library has been updated to version R22 SP2.
Edge point comparison.
The directional comparison function can now automatically create surface points on
edges based on specified anchor points, to automate inspection of edge normals.
Improvements to turbine blade inspection.
Focus 10.1 features a more accurate calculation of the chord length of a blade section at a
given angle, and now also outputs the maximum chord length.
New licensing scheme.
Focus 10.1 uses a new licensing that allows more flexibility. Besides the familiar
hardware keys, it now supports soft-locks and trial licenses. It is also no longer necessary
to import a license file when moving a hardware key from between computers, since all
license information is stored in the hardware key itself.
New application icon.
The new style application icon features the Nikon color scheme and will be used for the
different Nikon Metrology software packages to provide a more unified look.
Focus Handheld
Full 64-bit handheld support.
Handheld users can now also benefit from a virtually unlimited amount of RAM that can
be used by Focus when acquiring and processing pointclouds. Where the size of the
pointclouds in the 32 bit version is limited to a maximum of 3 GB of memory, the size of
the point clouds captured in the new, native 64 bit handheld module of Focus is only
limited by the amount of memory available in the PC. This means handheld users can
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
4
now take full advantage of the 80.000 points per second (or 150 stripes per second) that
the Modelmaker MMDx scanners are capable of capturing.
5
Authorising Focus Software
Focus software is protected with a licensing mechanism that requires either a hardware key
(dongle) or a software key.
If Focus is started without a valid license, the following message will be seen.
This means that you either need a new or an updated key to unlock the software. See
Obtaining a license.
If a license disappears while Focus is running, you will see the following dialog:
This dialog will also show information messages to notify you if a license is going to
expire in less than 14 days.
See Obtaining a license for instructions on updating existing licenses
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
6
At any time you can consult the License Admin Control Center to obtain information about
current licenses.
Obtaining a license
Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to obtain a license to unlock Focus. Focus can be unlocked
with either a hardware lock (dongle) or a software lock.
Hardware key (Dongle)
A hardware key (Dongle) can be used :
To unlock a new software license
To unlock the software when an existing license is no longer valid
Both procedures are explained below.
To unlock a new software license
1. Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to obtain a new hardware dongle. Once you have
received your dongle, follow the steps below.
2. Close all instances of Focus.
3. Connect the hardware dongle to a USB port on the machine.
4. Start Focus, which will now be licensed.
To unlock the software when an existing license is no longer valid
If you already have a compatible hardware dongle, it can be upgraded with a new license as
follows.
The first stage is to create a C2V (Customer to Vendor) file:
1. Open the Start menu in Windows, go to Nikon Metrology > Tools and launch “License
Remote Update System”.
Authorising Focus Software
7
The following window will appear.
2. Click on the “Collect Key Status Information” tab
3. Connect the hardware dongle to be upgraded to the machine.
Disconnect all other dongles.
4. Click on the [Collect Information] button.
5. Select the folder where you want to save the C2V file and click on “Save”.
6. Send the C2V file to your Nikon Metrology dealer.
The second phase is to install a new V2C (Vendor to Customer) file which will be sent to you by
your Nikon Metrology dealer.
1. Open the Start menu in Windows, go to Nikon Metrology > Tools and launch “License
Remote Update System”.
2. Click on the “Apply License Update" tab.
3. Click on the “…” button next to “Update File” and select the V2C file you have received.
4. Click on [Apply Update].
After the V2C file has been applied, you can start Focus with the upgraded license on the
corresponding dongle.
Software Key
Software locks are licenses locked to a specific machine, and must be installed using a process
called activation. Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to start this process.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
8
The first stage is to generate a C2V (Customer to Vendor) file which contains a fingerprint of
your machine.
1. Open the Start menu in Windows, go to Nikon Metrology > Tools and launch “License
Remote Update System”.
2. Make sure all hardware based dongles are disconnected from the machine.
3. Click on the “Collect Key Status Information” tab.
4. Click on the [Collect Information] button.
5. If you are asked to select a specific key, select a ‘provisional’ key. These are keys that
have 19 digits.
6. Select the folder where you want to save the C2V file and click on “Save”.
7. Send the C2V file to your Nikon Metrology dealer.
The second stage is to install the license key. This will be contained in a V2C (Vendor to
Customer) file that you will receive from your dealer.
1. Open the Start menu in Windows, go to Nikon Metrology > Tools and launch “License
Remote Update System”.
2. Click on the “Apply License Update" tab.
3. Click on the “…” button next to “Update File” and select the V2C file you have received.
4. Click on [Apply Update].
After the V2C file has been applied, you can start Focus with the available licenses
Network License
It is possible to install a network license on your company’s network. To setup a network license:
1. Choose the server on your company’s network where network license is to be installed.
2. Contact your Nikon Metrology dealer to order a network license, which can be either a
hardware lock (dongle) or a software lock.
3. Install the license following the same procedure as described for non-network licenses.
License Admin Control Center
At any time, you can launch the License Admin Control Center from Nikon Metrology > Tools
in the Windows Start menu. This gives an overview of all licenses found on your machine or on
your company’s network. Software keys are shown with a icon, while hardware keys are
shown with a small picture of the hardware lock. The following shows an example of a machine
on which one Hasp HL Pro hardware dongle is found.
Authorising Focus Software
9
When you click on the “Features” button for a key, you get see information on the specific
licensed features on that key.
The feature called “Focus Maintenance Contract End Date” specifies when your maintenance
contract expires in the “Restrictions” column. In the above example, the maintenance contract
expires on 201304. This is always in the format YYYYMM (Year Month), thus 201304 means
that the contract expires in April 2013, and more specifically, on the first day of that month.
10
Using the software
This section describes the arrangement and the terminology associated with the interface as well
as some general procedures for using the Focus software.
The User Interface
The various elements of the interface are shown in the Figure below.
For more information on using the new interface refer to Frequently Asked Questions.
The File menu
provides access to a number of basic functions for managing the complete document and
for setting preferences. For more details
The Quick access menu
provides direct access to a number of functions. The contents of this menu can be
configured by the user. For more details
The Task tabs
allow you to step through each task in the workflow.
The Additional toolbar
provides access to functions relating to the presentation of the interface as well as
information and help. For more details
Using the software
11
The Ribbon bar
groups all the tools associated with a task. The contents of the ribbon groups can be
configured by the user. For more details
The Toolbar
contains tools that are accessible in all the tasks. For more details
The Graphical scene
is where the models and associated features are displayed. The arrangement of the
windows in the graphical scene can be modifed using the Layout options from the View
menu. See also Getting started.
The Inspection tree
consists of a set of panels listing the contents of the different elements of the document.
The Message line
displays useful information concerning the progress of requested functions.
The Cursor position
displays the current coordinates of the cursor.
The Units panel
displays the currently used units and allows you to change them. See below.
The Workflow menu
allows you to switch between different workflows and to configure the workflow. For
more details see the Workflow menu.
Model Units
This option is used to set the model units, i.e. the units the object was scanned in. Setting
the units tags your Inspection file with a unit's reference when you export or save the file.
The units do not affect your object while in a session. The information is provided for
downstream applications that may read the units reference information.
The Model Units dialog
Select one
Select the model units to use in your document.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
12
Decimals
Sets the number of decimals for display.
Frequently Asked Questions about the new GUI
Focus 10.1 Scanhas a newly defined user interface. This page answers some frequently asked
questions about finding your way around the newly designed interface.
Question : How do I change or configure the workflow?
Click on the current workflow in the bottom right hand corner of the Focus 10
application window.
From here you can select a new workflow or configure the current workflow.
Question : How do I change the units?
The current units are displayed in the bottom right hand corner of the Focus 10
application window.
Click on the current units to open up the Model Units dialog.
How do I open an existing workspace / document?
Using the software
13
All the File manipulations are made by clicking on the Focus
icon in the top left hand corner of the Focus 10
application window.
How can I change my Preferences?
Your Preferences can be set by first clicking on the Focus icon in the top left hand
corner of the Focus 10 application window (see above).
You can then click on the button which appears in the bottom right hand
corner of the menu that appears.
How do I access the automation function?
The Automation function is accessed from the View menu that appears in the top right
hand corner of the Focus 10 application window.
Why do the same tools different colors?
The different colors indicate the type of object that this tool will operate on.
Gold - the tool relates to a Nominal object.
Blue - the tool relates to a Measured object.
Green - the tool relates to a Constructed object.
Why can't I see the Inspection Tree panels?
The different panels in the Inspection Tree can be switched on or off using the options
in the View menu.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
14
Even when they are switched ON, they may be "hidden" ( which means that they will
only be visible when the mouse is moved over them). You can "pin" them into position
by setting the pin icon to be vertical.
Using the three mouse buttons
The use of a three buttoned mouse is assumed when working with Focus software. The three
mouse buttons are used for specific purposes. The three buttons are described as:
LMB – the Left Mouse Button, used for selecting objects in the tree or the graphical
scene.
MMB – the Middle Mouse Button or scroll bar used for initiating the operation of
commands from tools.
RMB – the Right Mouse Button, used for displaying a contextual menu on items in the
inspection tree as well as in the graphical scene.
Getting started using the software
The software will start with a specific workflow in operation.
The title of the workflow is shown above the graphical scene.
To select a different workflow: select the required option from the Workflow menu in the
bottom right hand corner of the screen.
Using the software
15
Each workflow has a number of tasks that are displayed below the workflow title.
These tasks should be executed in sequence in order to accomplish most workflows.
Click on a tab to execute a task.
The tools used in a specific task are presented in Ribbon Groups.
Items can be selected for operation either by clicking on them in the graphical scene or in the
inspection tree.
The layout of the graphical scene can be adjusted using the Layout options from the View menu
that is available in the top right hand corner of the screen. This would enable you to divide the
scene into separate areas to provide different aspects of the same model. In the Align task one
area can be used to show the nominal model and the other the measured one for example.
By default the inspection tree appears on the right hand side of the screen. It consists of three
panels relating to the nominal model, the measured model and results of the inspection. You can
choose which panels you wish to display by selecting the required option from the View menu.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
16
Individual panels can be closed by clicking on the cross. By default the panels are "pinned" into
position on the right hand side of the screen. This is indicated by the vertical pin icon as shown
below.
The panels can be set "auto-hide" by clicking on the pin icon so that it turns horizontal. The panel
will then be hidden and replaced by a tab on the right hand edge. This is the case for the "Inspect"
part of the tree as shown above. The panel will appear when the mouse is moved over the tab.
Items are selected in the tree using the LMB.
Multiple items can be selected using the <Shift> or the <Ctrl) key.
To hide items: check the box in front of an item OFF, as is the case of the "Slots" as shown
above.
To perform an operation on the model with the default parameters, use the LMB to select an
item and then the MMB to execute the function.
To set the parameters for an operation: open the property sheet for a a tool by clicking on the
small arrow next to the tool.
To deactivate a tool: click on the Mixed Object Select tool.
The status of any operation or messages regarding functionality can be seen in the Status bar that
is to be seen at the bottom of the application interface. If the status bar is red, then it indicates an
error message.
Configuring ribbon groups
The most commonly used functions provided in Focus software are accessible from groups of
tools in the ribbon. The contents of these groups depends on the current task and workflow.
Using the software
17
There are a set of general tool bars below the ribbon which provide a range of general operations
that apply to all workflows and tasks.
The tools presented in ribbon groups are color-coded:
Gold - the tool relates to a Nominal object.
Blue - the tool relates to a Measured object.
Green - the tool relates to a Constructed object. (A constructed object is an object created
from a nominal and measured object.)
A ribbon group can be manipulated from a popup menu obtained by right clicking on the group.
It contains the following operations that relate to ribbon groups.
Add to Quick Access Toolbar: If the menu has been obtained by right-clicking on the name of
the group (as shown above) this will add the complete group to the Quick Access toolbar. If the
menu has been obtained by right-clicking on a single tool, this will add the tool to the Quick
Access toolbar.
Minimize the Ribbon: this option will hide the complete ribbon. It can be shown again by right-
clicking on the down-arrow to the right of the Quick Access toolbar. All operations provided
within a task can also be accessed by using the RMB in the graphical scene to open a popup
menu.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
18
Customize Quick Access Toolbar...: this option schedules the Customize dialog in which the
presence and the contents of the ribbon group can be customized.
Property sheets
Functions are executed through the tools in the Ribbon Group. These functions can operate in
two ways:
By scheduling a dialog box in which you can enter the parameters required and then using
the action buttons to perform the operations.
Some dialogs are "dockable" as described below.
By using parameters defined in Property sheets.
In this case you can either execute the function directly using the default parameters or
you can open the property sheet to set the parameters and exercise more control over the
operation.
Opening Property sheets
A property sheet is opened by clicking on the small arrow next to the tool, as illustrated in the
picture below.
In the property sheet you can set the required parameters, then click on the tool again to execute
the function.
Not opening the Property sheets
If the property sheet is not opened, the function is executed using the default parameters.
The usual procedure to execute a function without opening the property sheet is:
1. Click on the tool.
2. Click on the object with the LMB that is to be selected for the operation.
3. Click with MMB to execute the function with the default parameters.
Using the software
19
This represents an efficient means of executing functions for which the parameters do not require
modification.
Dockable dialogs
Focus uses dockable dialogs that appear within the main application interface.
They can be 'undocked' by clicking on the title bar and then dragging it to the required position.
Selection
In executing functions there are often two ways of working:
Pre-selecting an item in the Inspection tree or the scene before activating the tool.
Not making a selection before activating the tool.
Pre-selection
If an item is selected before a tool is activated, then it will be the target of the operation.
Depending on the function this may be the reference item.
If the tool schedules a dialog or has a property sheet, then there will be the possibility to select a
different item as either the reference or the moveable item.
No pre-selection
In this case the Focus Inspection will make an automatic selection of items for the operation.
This will depend on the tool but generally all possible items are selected and operated on.
When making selections in the scene, the cursor changes to an appropriate shape to indicate the
type of selection.
Manipulating the model
The models can be moved within the graphical scene using several methods. There are a number
of general tools that are provided in the Inspection toolbar.
In addition there are alternative ways to interactively manipulate the model using the keyboard
and the mouse.
The manipulation methods given below are those associated with the default View Manipulation
setting made in the Preferences dialog available from the File menu.
To rotate – Drag with the Left Mouse Button (LMB)
To pan - Press and Drag with the Middle Mouse Button (MMB)
To zoom - Scroll with the Middle Mouse Button (MMB)
Space Mouse
The Space Mouse from 3Dconnexion is supported to provide a means of manipulating the model
(zooming, rotating and panning) without having to use the keyboard or specific tools.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
20
Keyboard short cuts
This table lists the define keyboard shortcuts.
You can define your own keyboard shortcuts for specific tool using the Keyboard tab in the
Configure dialog. This is accessed from the Workflow menu.
S return to Selection mode
Esc return to Selection mode
V Zoom selected
F5 Zoom selected
W Zoom all
F4 Zoom all
Z Zoom window
Drag+LMB Rotate camera
Drag+MMB Pan
Scroll+MMB Zoom dynamically
ALT+CTRL Zoom window, in and out, depends
of movement of mouse: left to right
= in and right to left = out.
ALT+SHIFT+LMB Constrained rotate camera screen X
or Y, depends of first movement of
mouse.
ALT+SHIFT+MMB Constrained pan camera, depends of
first movement of mouse.
ALT+SHIFT+RMB Constrained rotate camera screen Z
CTRL+A Task dependent: select all solids in
Nominal, all point clouds/meshes in
Measured
CRTL+I Invert current selection
CTRL+Z Undo
F1 Help
Using the software
21
Conventions used in the documentation
[Buttons]
Action buttons that will initiate a function are enclosed in square brackets, e.g. click [Create] to
create a section.
<Keys>
Keys to be pressed on the keyboard are indicated in angled brackets, e.g. use the <Alt> key.
Multiple processors
If the computer used to run Focus Inspection software has multiple processors then advantage
will be made of all these processors during the execution of a number of functions. These
functions are:
all filters operations
meshing
subtract operation without "Blend" options
global compare
Starting Focus from the command line
Starting Focus normally involves using the shortcut created on the desktop or the options
available from the Start menu. These operations open Focus with an empty document for
interactive use.
There are means to start Focus and open an existing document or automation script or to start
Focus remotely from another application (e.g. Camio).
Starting Focus from a command line
The following command is an example of starting start Focus from the command line:
run "C:\Program Files\Metris\Focus 10.1 Scan
Inspection\Focus.exe" -script c:\temp\test.mfa
The various parts of the command are described below:
run
this indicates which executable (.exe) to run
"C:\Program Files\Metris\Focus 10.1 Scan Inspection\Focus.exe"
This is the path to the executable to be run. If the path is longer than 8 characters, or contains a
space, then it must be enclosed by quotes “”.
-script
this indicates the next entry will be an automation script
c:\temp\test.mfa
Tthe path to the script
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
22
Additional Parameters
In addition to the script, some additional parameters can be added to the command line. These are
parameters that also can be defined in Focus Automation.
-script "FilePath/Name"
Allows you to open Focus and start a script designated by the 'Filepath" and the "Name"
-import “FilePath/Name”:
Allows you to open Focus and immediately import a file designated by the 'Filepath" and the
"Name".
/ContinueOnFail
When this parameter is included, the designated script will continue even if an error is generated
by the script. If this parameter is not set, the script will stop at the line that fails.
Example: run "C:\Program Files\Metris\Focus 10.1 Scan
Inspection\Focus.exe" -script c:\temp\test.mfa /ContinueOnFail
/CloseReport
When this parameter is set, the Excel report created by the automation script will automatically
be closed when Focus is closed. it this parameter is not set, the report will remain open when
Focus is closed.
Example: run "C:\Program Files\Metris\Focus 10.1 Scan
Inspection\Focus.exe" -script c:\temp\test.mfa /CloseReport
/Quit:
Setting this parameter will close Focus at the end of the script playback
These additional parameters can be entered in one command line.
Starting Focus from Camio
This is initiated from the Call Routine dialog.
The Routine is just the path of the executable (.exe) to start.
The Arguments contain the script and additional parameters, as described above.
Example: CALL/EXTERN,SYS,'C:\Program Files\Metris\Focus 10.1
Using the software
23
Inspection\Focus.exe','-script C:\Customers\New-Data-12-3-
07\Blade.mfa’
24
The Focus Menus
A number of menus are provided containing functions that are common to all workflows and
tasks.
This section describes:
The File menu accessed by clicking on
the Focus icon in the top left corner
The View menu available in the top
right corner
See also the additional tools in this
group.
The Workflows menu available in the
bottom right corner
Note that an Action menu is available from a pop-up menu in the scene
The File menu
The File menu groups all commands to manage the complete analysis document. The File menu
is access by clicking on the Focus icon in the top left corner.
The Focus Menus
25
Note that functions in this menu can be added to and removed from the Quick Access toolbar.
Note also that keyboard shortcuts can be modified using the Keyboard tab in the Configure
dialog. This is accessed from the Workflow menu.
New Creates a new document
This closes the active document to create a new one. If the current document has been
modified, you will be prompted to save changes.
Open Opens an existing document
This closes the active document to open an existing document. If the current document has
been modified, you will be prompted to save changes.
Save Saves the current document
This tool saves the current document. If this document has not yet been saved, the Save As
dialog box prompts you for the file name and location as described below.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
26
Save As… Saves the current document with a new name and format
This tool saves the current document with a new name and format. The Save As dialog box
prompts you for the file name and location.
It allows you to save the document in two different formats.
MFI Metris Focus Inspection file
this is the standard format for saving a current work session and includes the solid model.
MFR Metris Focus Report file
saves the document in format suitable for use with the Focus Inspection Viewer. A
document saved in this format will strip out the solid and point cloud information, but
retains all reporting and compare information.
Edit -> Undo Undoes the last action
This removes the effect of the last operation you have performed.
Note: not all actions can be undone. In this case the function is labeled ‘Can’t undo’.
Note: that the undo functionality can be disabled using the Preferences function (see below) to
improve performance when working with large models.
Edit - > Redo Restores an undone operation
This command is used to redo the last undone action .
Edit -> Erase Erases selected objects
This operation removes objects that have been selected either in the graphical display or
the Inspection tree.
Import -> Solids… Imports solid models of different formats
This menu entry enables you to imports solid models of IGES, SAT-ACIS, STP/STEP, VDA-
VDAFS, CATIAV4, CATIAV5 or ProE formats. Solids can also be imported from native mfi
files. If the mfi file does not contain a solid, this is reported in the status bar.
This operation can also be performed using the Import Nominal Solid tool where all the
details are described.
The Focus Menus
27
Import - > Metris Focus Files… Imports objects from Inspection native files
This option enables you to imports objects from Inspection’s native files (mfi, mfr, pff). It
schedules the Import Metris Focus files dialog.
Solid Display Accuracy
This defines settings for the visualization of the solid. The further the slider is to the right,
the more accurately the solid is displayed but the higher the memory usage.
Export -> Point Clouds… Exports point clouds in various formats
This option allows you to export point clouds as OBJ, MFI, MFR, PFF or ASCII point files.
The Export Point Clouds dialog box
This dialog allows you to define the location and the file type for the export of the cloud.
Export - > Meshes… Exports meshes in various formats
This option exports polygonal meshes as MFI, MFR, PFF, ASCII STL or binary STL files.
The Export Meshes dialog box
This dialog allows you to define the location and the file type for the export of the mesh.
Selected Only
When this option is checked ON, only selected meshes are exported. Otherwise all
meshes in the current document are exported.
Export -> Solids… Exports solids in various formats
This option exports solids as MFI, PFF or SAT-ACIS files. Export as IGES file is supported
through the optional module Focus Interop IGES.
The Export Solids dialog box
This dialog allows you to define the location and the file type for the export of the solid.
Selected Only
When this option is checked ON, only selected solids are exported. Otherwise all solids in
the current document are exported.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
28
Export -> Sections/Mesh borders… Exports sections and / or mesh borders
This option exports solids or mesh borders as IGS, IGES or ASCII files. Export as IGES
file is supported through the optional module Focus Interop IGES.
The Export Section(s) /Mesh border(s) as dialog box
This dialog allows you to define the location and the file type for the export of the section /
mesh border.
Print… Prints the current view
The option prints a copy of the current contents of the scene (active view). It schedules the
Print dialog in which the print is created according to the current print setup.
Print Setup Defines the layout to be used for printing
This option defines the settings to be used for the Print function described above.
Preferences Sets user preferences for the application
This option allows you to set some user preferences for the operation of the application.
The Preferences dialog
The Preferences dialog contains three tabs.
The Focus Menus
29
The General Tab
STL Import Tolerance
This parameter defines the tolerance for merging vertices on imported STL models. STL
files store meshes as individual triangles. Inspection merges all coincident vertices into a
single polygon vertex during import. Occasionally, vertices are not precisely coincident
due to small calculation errors, resulting in holes in the imported mesh. Increasing the
tolerance will merge together any vertices that are slightly apart. By default, the STL
import tolerance is set to 1e-008.
Undo Enabled
When this option is enabled, recent operations can be undone. In order to achieve this, a
record of the operations must be kept to restore the previous situation. When working
with large models, creating the undo file is time consuming. To improve the speed
performance, you can disable the Undo functionality.
Registry [Reset]
This saves the settings in the operating system’s registry.
Show Origin
Shows or removes the origin and orientation of the XYZ axes in the scene.
[Set Password]
This allows you to set a password that will be used to protect the operation of the Registry
Reset. A dialog appears in which you can enter the password to be used.
Click [OK] to confirm the password.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
30
Language
Sets the language in which the interface is displayed. The new language setting will take
effect the next time the application is started.
Stop playback in case of error
When this option is enabled, if an automation script encounters a command that it can not
execute, then it will halt at this point in the script until some manual operation is
performed.
If not enabled, then the script will continue to the next command.
The Appearance tab
The Appearance tab of the Preferences dialog box sets the appearance of the Focus
Inspection interface.
Scheme
A list of previously defined schemes (see the instructions below for creating a scheme).
[Load]
Loads a color scheme from a Color Map file.
[Save As…]
Save the current scheme as a Color Map file.
The Focus Menus
31
[Delete]
Deletes the current scheme from the scheme list.
Note: The Default scheme can not be deleted.
Item
This panel in the dialog enables you to select an interface item from the drop down list
and then define how it is to be displayed. The fields controlling the display will depend
on the type of item selected.
View Manipulation
These options allow you to choose the manner in which the model will be manipulated in
the scene.
The default selection is "Unified" which represents a unified means of manipulating the
model with other Nikon Metrology products. This means that :
- The RMB is used to Rotate 3D/2D
- Dragging the MMB is used to Pan
- Scrolling the MMB is used to Zoom.
To define a display scheme
1. Select an item from the drop down list.
2. Specify how each of the parameters associated with that item are to be displayed; colors
and line widths.
3. Select another item, and repeat the process for all display items
4. Click [Save As…]
5. In the dialog that appears click on […] and browse to the location where the file is to be
saved.
6. Enter a file name.
7. Click [Save].
8. Click [OK] in the Save Scheme dialog.
9. Click [OK] in the Preferences dialog when all preferences have been set.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
32
The Auto Save tab
This tab allows you to define auto-save options for the document. It takes a lot of memory
Enabled
Check this button ON to enable automatic saving of the document. Click the [Apply]
button to activate the setting so that you can define the other Auto save parameters.
Save Interval
This defines the period between two automatic save operations. It can be set when the
Enabled option is ON.
Count Down
This parameter represents the amount of time remaining for the next Save.
[Save Now]
The Save Now button saves the document. If the active document is a new document, the
Save As dialog box prompts for the file name and location.
[Restart]
The Restart button resets the count down time to Save interval time. The save process is
started afresh from the current state. By clicking the Restart button, the current status is
not saved, but the timer process to save is started.
Save Location
The Save Location represents the location to save temporary (automatically) saved files.
The file is typically named as #AUTOSAVE#.mfi. In case of application crash, restarting
the application resumes the status from the last saved session.
The Focus Menus
33
You can enter the location in the field or browse to select one.
Exit Closes the application
This closes the Focus Inspection application. If unsaved modifications have been made to
the document, you will be prompted to save them.
The View menu
The View menu groups functions that determine the panels that are visible and their visual
appearance.
Auto Hide All
When this option is selected all the visible Inspection Trees are removed from their positions in
the scene and appear as tabs on the right hand edge of the application interface. The number of
tabs corresponds to the number of tree panels defined as visible using the Inspection Tree entry
described below.
In Auto-hide mode the panel will appear when the mouse is placed over the tab and remain on
view for as long as the mouse remains over the tree.
When this option is unchecked all the visible trees will appear as fixed panels in the interface.
To permanently fix a tree as a panel, click on the pin icon in the top left corner.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
34
Inspection Tree Toggles the presence of the Inspection Trees
The Inspection Trees are where Nominal and Measured data as well as Comparison data
are listed and can be manipulated. They allow you to select, de-select, show or hide
objects.
This option allows you to choose which Inspection Trees you wish to have visible in the
interface. When a tree is checked on it will appear as a fixed panel in the interface. You can
Auto Hide a fixed panel by clicking on the pin icon as shown in the screen shot above. It will
then appear as a tab as is shown for the Inspect tree in the screenshot below.
The use and the positioning of an Inspection Tree is described in the General procedure to use the
software.
Properties Sheet Shows the properties of select objects or the camera
This option displays the properties sheet panel. The properties sheet displays global
properties relating to the document as well as the properties of the selected objects. If no
objects are selected in the scene, the camera object properties are displayed.
The Properties Sheet (panel)
The Global tab
The Global properties sheet displays information relating to Point clouds, Meshes and
Solids.
Point cloud :
Quick Shading
Toggle to switch the Quick Shading option on or off.
The Focus Menus
35
Quick Shading Size
The Quick Shading Size represents the default value for the Smallest Detail Parameter in
the Compute Quick Shading property sheet.
Sparse Motion
Toggle to switch the Sparse Motion option on or off. Checking this option ON substitutes
a low density version of the point cloud for display, while the scene is in motion. This
option is useful for high density point clouds during smooth motion when tumbling or
zooming the camera.
Point Size
The Point Size controls the size of each point in the point cloud. Increasing the value here
increases the size of the rendered points in the point cloud.
Mesh :
Static Rendering
Clicking on this field, displays a drop down list to select the rendering method for objects
displayed in a stationary view. Setting the Static Rendering style sets the display style for
all scene elements.
Motion Rendering
Clicking on this field, displays a drop down list to select the rendering method for objects
when the camera or objects are in motion. Setting the Motion Rendering style sets the
display style for all scene elements.
Backface Rendering
The backfaces of an object are those faces whose normals point away from the camera.
Check this option ON to display all faces; check it OFF to display only those faces facing
the camera.
Two-sided Lighting
If this option is checked ON, the model has both sides of its faces lit. When checked OFF,
the model has its faces lit on the positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual
inspection of Face Normals. This parameter is also available in the Align Normals and
Flip Normal property sheets.
Solids :
Boundaries
Toggle to switch the display of the boundaries of a solid.
Faces
When this option is checked ON the surfaces of a solid are displayed. When checked
OFF, the model appears as a wire frame.
The Object tab
The Object tab of the Properties sheet is used to view or modify the properties of the
selected object. The properties listed depend on the selected object. If the selection contains
multiple objects, the Properties sheet displays the properties of the last selected object. If
no objects are selected, it displays the camera properties of the active view. The Camera
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
36
Properties are listed below. Camera properties can also be set in the Camera Properties…
entry from the View menu.
Type
Specifies the camera view of the active view pane. To change the camera view, click in
the field and select the desired view from the pull down list. The choices are: Perspective,
Orthographic, Top, Bottom, Right, Left, Front, and Back.
Pan Scale
Specifies the mouse sensitivity for panning the camera. The greater the value, the greater
the sensitivity. The value is a relative number, so if you want greater sensitivity, set this
value higher than its current value. The default value is 1.
Tumble Style
Selects the behavior for tumbling the camera. To change the tumble style, click in the
field and select the desired style from the pull down list. Your selection persists until you
change it. Each camera has its own value, even though you can only tumble in
Perspective view. The tumble style options are: Local, Global and Trackball.
Tumble Scale
Specifies the mouse sensitivity for tumbling the camera. The greater the value, the greater
the sensitivity. The value is a relative number, so if you want greater sensitivity, set this
value higher than its current value. The default value is 1.
Zoom Scale
Specifies the mouse sensitivity for zooming the camera. The greater the value, the greater
the degree of zoom you will get for a given mouse drag distance. The value is a relative
number, so if you want greater sensitivity, set this value higher than its current value. The
default value is 1.
Dolly Style
Specifies the behavior when you dolly the camera. To change the style, click in the field
and select the desired style from the pull down list. By default, the Dolly Style is set to
Local. The styles available are: Local, Global.
The Local dolly style moves the camera forward and backward along the direction of the
lens without altering the center of interest.
The Global dolly style moves both the camera and the center of interest forward and
backward. A global dolly may be used to navigate your camera view through objects
along the direction of the lens.
Dolly Scale
Specifies the mouse sensitivity for dollying the camera. The greater the value, the more
the camera will move for a given mouse drag. The value is a relative number, so if you
want greater sensitivity, set this value higher than its current value. The default value is 1.
Headlight
Turns on and off the camera headlights. By default, each camera view has an associated
headlight. When the camera moves, so does the headlight. This provides constant
illumination for the camera view.
The Focus Menus
37
Checking this option OFF, turns the headlight off. You may want to do this to illuminate
the object using only the session lights.
Headlight Diffuse Color
Sets the light color that is emitted by the headlight and reflected by the diffuse area of the
illuminated object. Select the color by clicking the color bar or arrow and selecting a
color from the Color Browser. By default, the color is set to light grey. Setting the light
color to black means no light is emitted; setting the light color to white means all colors
of light are emitted.
Headlight Specular Color
Sets the light color that is emitted by the headlight and reflected by the specular area of
the illuminated object. Select the color by clicking the color bar or arrow and selecting a
color from the Color Browser. By default, the color is set to medium grey. Setting the
light color to black means no light is emitted; setting the light color to white means all
colors of light are emitted.
Toolbars Sets the visibility of general toolbars
A list of the general toolbars is presented from which you can select those to be displayed.
See also The Focus Toolbars.
Views Layout Sets the current screen layout
A list of available screen layouts is displayed from which you can select the one required.
See also The general procedure for using the software.
Camera Properties… Sets default camera properties
This option allows you to define default camera properties that control the view of objects
in the scene. Camera properties can also be viewed and adapted in the Properties Sheet
entry from the View menu.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
38
The Camera Properties dialog box
View
The options in this area set the default position of the camera. The corresponding setting
is shown at the bottom of the display area. The camera position can also be adapted using
the corresponding options in the toolbar.
Pan Scale
Set the scale factor for panning.
Zoom Scale
Set the scale for zooming.
Tumble Style
Selects the behavior for tumbling the camera. To change the tumble style, click in the
field and select the desired style from the pull down list. Your selection persists until you
change it. Each camera has its own value, even though you can only tumble in
Perspective view. The tumble style options are: Screen Model and Trackball.
Scale
The Tumble Style Scale specifies the mouse sensitivity for tumbling the camera. The
greater the value, the greater the sensitivity. The value is a relative number, so if you want
greater sensitivity, set this value higher than its current value. The default value is 1.
Dolly Style
Local Use local dolly style.
Global Use global dolly style.
Scale Set the scale for dollying.
Headlight Lighting
Enable or disable the headlight.
Headlight Properties
Set the headlight properties. This option is disabled in the current release.
The Focus Menus
39
Object templates Defines templates used for Reports
This option schedules the Object Information template dialog that enables you to create
templates that will be used for Reports.
Object information templates are used in the Report task. When selecting the "Object
Information" tool in the Reporting toolbar, you will be able to choose one of the templates
that are defined here.
Note: that definition of templates is an operation that can be password protected.
[Save]
Saves the current template definition in a file. It schedules the ‘Save as’ dialog in which
the name and the location of the file can be specified. The file is saved with the extension
.otp (object template file).
[Load]
This loads a previously saved object template file. You can select a template from the
recently opened list, or you can selection the option "From file". In this case the ‘Open’
dialog appears in which you can search for the required file. Once a template is loaded all
the fields in it will be displayed in the dialog.
Description
The description that will be appear when the data is added in the Reporting tool and will
appear in the output file.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
40
Line
This list contains line numbers for the output file.
Excel field
The name of the Excel field where the information needs to be written.
[Add]
This adds the entered description and line number to the end of the list in the Object
information templates preview.
[Update]
This updates the currently selected line in the Object information templates preview with
the entered Description and Line.
[Delete]
Deletes the currently selected line in the Object information templates preview.
Up and Down Arrows
Moves up or down the selected line (description + line number + Excel Field) in the
preview of the Object information templates on the left. This is the sequence as they will
appear in the Object information templates.
[Close]
Closes the dialog, saving the settings.
To define or edit an object template
Note that this operation can be password protected.
1. Load an existing template if necessary by selecting the required one from the list and then
clicking [Load]. To create a new template enter the name in the field.
2. Enter a description for the line in the description field.
3. Enter a value for the line number in the file. This does not refer to its position in this list.
4. Enter a value for the Excel field.
5. Push [Add].
6. Add further lines as required.
7. To adapt the line if necessary enter the new data and push [Update].
8. To remove a line select it and click [Delete].
9. Click [Save].
10. Click [Close] when the definition is complete.
This template can be accessed using the Object Information tool in the Report task.
Workflows menu
The Workflows menu allows you to switch or configure a workflow. The Workflow menu is
accessed by clicking on the current workflow which is displayed in the bottom right corner of the
interface.
The Focus Menus
41
Configure Workflow… Customizes the appearance and behavior of the Focus software
The Customize dialog
This dialog allows you to create and configure workflows. Workflows consist of Tasks and
Tasks have a number of ERROR: Variable (Ribbon-Group) is undefined.s associated with
them. Tools are organized in Ribbon Groups. This dialog allows you to manage the tasks
and the tools associated with a workflow.
In addition it allows you to configure the Quick Access toolbar, to define keyboard
shortcuts and set a number of Options.
The Workflow tab
The Workflow tab enables you to create or configure a workflow composed of a set of tasks. For
each of the tasks defined you can set which objects will be visible and operated on and which
tools will be present in the Ribbon Groups.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
42
Workflow Name
This field represents the name of the currently selected workflow and can be used to
define the name of a new one.
Workflow File Name
The name of the file containing the current configuration. The name of a new
configuration can be entered here.
Save To Disk
Salves the current workflow to disk with the defined file name. ##Error##. The newly
defined workflow will appear in the Workflow menu list.
The Focus Menus
43
Tasks Manipulation
This area allows you to manipulate the tasks in your workflow. The tasks currently
associated with the workflow are represented by the tabs shown below. Five buttons are
provided to manipulate the tasks.
Creates a new task. A dialog appears in which you enter the name. The new task will
appear as the last tab. Its position can be moved to the left if required.
Deletes the currently selected task (tab).
Renames the currently selected task.
Moves the currently selected task one position to the left.
Moves the currently selected task one position to the right.
Operable Objects
Operable Objects are objects that have operations performed on them.
Click on the [+] button to see the operable objects. For each task, the operable objects can
be set.
Visible Objects
Visible Objects are objects that are visible in the document.
Click on the [+] button to see the visible objects. For every task, the visible objects can be
set. The operable objects are selected by default.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
44
Ribbon groups
This panel allows you to create new Ribbon Groups and modify the tools contained
within them.
A list of groups defined in the current task is presented.
A set of tools allows you to create a new group , delete a group , move a group up
or down .
When a new groups is defined it will appear in the Ribbon band in the interface. Tools
can be added to the group by dragging them from the right hand list directly into the
ribbon group. Tools can be removed by dragging them from the group back into the
Module UI Buttons list.
To configure a workflow
1. Enter a new name if required for the workflow.
The Focus Menus
45
2. Define the tasks to be associated with the workflow.
Use the Task Manipulation buttons to create, delete and organize tasks.
The defined tasks will appear as a series of tabs.
3. Click on the [+] button next to Operable objects.
4. Step through each of the task tabs and define the operable objects for each task.
5. Click on the [+] button next to Visible objects.
6. Step through each of the task tabs and define the visible objects for each task.
7. Click on the [+] button next to Ribbon Groups.
8. Select a task tab.
9. Select a task tool bar from the left hand list, or click on the create new icon to create a
new toolbar.
The new Ribbon Group will appear in the Ribbon band in the interface.
10. Drag the tools from the right hand list of Module UI buttons into the new group.
11. Repeat the process for the other Ribbon Groups and the other tasks.
12. When the workflow is configured click on [Save to Disk].
13. Enter a file name for the workflow and save it with the extension .wff
14. Click [OK].
The workflow will become the current workflow.
The Quick Access tab
This tab enables you to manage the contents of the Quick Access toolbar.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
46
Choose commands from:
Select the required command set from the drop down list presented. The list of tools
shown below will adapt.
[Add]
Adds the item selected from the left hand list to the item in the Quick Access toolbar that
are shown in the right hand list.
[Remove]
Removes the item selected from the right hand list from the Quick Access toolbar.
[Reset]
Resets the content of the Quick Access toolbar to the default setting (containing items
from the File menu).
Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon
When this item is checked, the Quick Access toolbar will be placed below the ribbon.
When this option is unchecked, the Quick Access toolbar will be placed above the ribbon.
For other methods of modifying this toolbar see the Quick Access toolbar.
The Keyboard tab
This enables you to view, edit and create keyboard shortcuts.
Category:
Select the required command set from the drop down list presented.
The Focus Menus
47
Commands:
The list of functions that correspond with the selected category.
Description:
A short description of the selected command.
Key assignments:
The current keyboard shortcuts associated with the currently selected command.
Press new shortcut key:
The new key that will be associated with currently selected command.
[Assign]
Assigns the defined new shortcut key to the currently selected command.
[Remove]
Removes the currently selected key assignment from the command.
[Reset All]
Resets the keyboard shortcuts to the default values.
To create a new keyboard shortcut
1. Select the Category to which the command belongs.
2. Select the command from the list.
3. Check the current key assignment if one exists.
4. Press the key(s) that you wish to use as a shortcut.
The key combination will appear in the "Press new shortcut key" field.
5. Click [Assign].
48
The Focus Tool bars
Focus 10.1 Scan Inspection provides a number of toolbars which contain tools that are common
to all workflows and tasks.
These include:
the Quick Access Toolbar.
the Additional toolbar
a set of General Toolbars located below the ribbon which includes :
the Inspection toolbar
the Named Views toolbar
the Info/Visibility toolbar
the Feature Flyouts toolbar
Manipulating the General Toolbars
The general toolbars can be moved by grabbing them on the on the left hand edge and dragging
them into the scene as shown in the screenshot above.
The presence of these toolbars can be adjusted by right-clicking on the ribbon to open the popup
menu shown below. The toolbars can be hidden or shown by checking the corresponding button.
This same operation can also be performed from the View menu in the Additional toolbar.
The Focus Tool bars
49
Tools that are contained in these toolbars can be added to the Quick Access Toolbar by selecting
the option Customize Quick Access Toolbar from this menu.
The Quick Access toolbar
The Quick Access toolbar provides you with direct access with just a single click to selected
functions.
By default the Quick Access toolbar :
is positioned next to the Focus icon that provides access to the File menu.
contains items that are available from the File menu.
Both the position and the contents of this toolbar can be configured by the user.
To add a command to the Quick Access toolbar
1. Click on the down arrow at the end of the toolbar.
2. From the drop-down menu select More Commands ...
3. In the Customize dialog select the required command from the left hand list.
4. Click on [Add].
5. Click on the <Up arrow> key on the keyboard to move it up the list.
Commands can also be added to toolbar directly from the Ribbon Group and the Customize
dialog accessed from the Workflow menu.
To remove commands from the Quick Access toolbar
Either
1. Right click on the icon in the Quick Access toolbar.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
50
2. Select Remove from Quick Access Toolbar.
Or
1. Click on the down arrow at the end of the toolbar.
2. From the drop-down menu select More Commands ...
3. In the Customize dialog select the required command from the right hand list.
4. Click on [Remove].
Commands can also be removed from the toolbar directly from the Ribbon Group and the
Customize dialog accessed from the Workflow menu.
To move the Quick Access toolbar
Either
1. Click on the down arrow at the end of the toolbar.
2. Select Show Below the Ribbon (or Show Above the Ribbon).
Or
1. Click on the down arrow at the end of the toolbar.
2. From the drop-down menu select More Commands ...
3. Check (or uncheck) the option Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon.
The Additional toolbar
The Additional toolbar provides tools to determine the content and style of the interface as well
as providing help and information.
The View menu The View menu groups functions that determine the panels that are visible and their visual appearance.
The View menu is described in the Focus Menus section
About Displays information about the installed Focus Inspection framework and modules
This schedules the About dialog box.
[Close]
Closes the About… dialog box
[System Info…]
This schedules the System Info dialog box that shows information on the installed 3D
rendering hardware and on the operating system.
[View End User License Agreement…]
This schedules the End User License Agreement.
The Focus Tool bars
51
Enable / Disable Tutorial Help Schedules the online help for the current task
This schedules the online help for the current task. Even if you close the Help window, it
will be re-scheduled when you move to another task. To stop the Help appearing click
again on the Help icon.
The Help will only be available if it was selected for installation. The help is also
available in a printable form in pdf format. This is accessible from Start -> Metris ->
Program Files -> Documentation.
The Styles menu Sets the color scheme for the user interface
A list of styles is presented from which you can choose the color scheme for the user
interface.
Inspection toolbar
The Inspection toolbar contains tools for manipulating, selecting and presenting the
Inspection models.
Mixed Object Select Allows selection of different objects
The Mixed Object Select tool enables the selection of all types of objects in the document.
It ends the current operation – active tool. You can use the Keyboard short cuts to perform
these operations.
Component Selection Creates a lasso for selection
This tool allows you to select all the objects that are contained within the boundaries
defined by a lasso.
To create a lasso for selection
1. Click on the Lasso tool The cursor will change to the lasso form This mode will be
2. scheduled automatically by some operations.
3. Click in the document using the LMB.
4. Check the Visible on button to restrict the selection to items that are visible.
5. Click on points to define a lasso to contain all the objects that you want to select.
6. Click with MMB to close the lasso and define the selection.
View All Zooms to make all objects visible
This tool sets the zoom on your view so that all objects are visible.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
52
View All - Property sheet
All Views
If the All Views check box is ON, the View All command is applied to all views. If it is
checked OFF, the command is applied to the current view only. The number of views is
set using the Views – Show layouts menu entry.
Update Rotation Center
If the Update Rotation Center check box is checked ON, the rotation center is
recalculated after the View All command. The new rotation center is located in the
average position of the center point of all visible objects. If the Update Rotation Center
check box is checked OFF, the current rotation center is maintained.
View Selected Zooms to make all selected objects visible
The View Selected tool sets the zoom on your view so that all selected objects are visible.
View Selected - Property sheet
All Views
If the All Views check box is checked ON, the View Selected command is applied to all
views. If the All Views check box is checked OFF, the View Selected command gets
applied to the current view only. The number of views is set using the Views – Show
layouts menu entry.
Update Rotation Center
If the Update Rotation Center check box is checked ON, the rotation center is
recalculated after the View Selected command. The new rotation center is located in the
average position of the center point of all visible objects. If the Update Rotation Center
check box is checked OFF, the current rotation center is maintained.
Zoom Zooms the view
The Zoom tool enables zooming in and out of the active view. Drag the mouse to the right
to zoom in or to the left to zoom out.
Rotation Center Sets the center of rotation
The Rotation Center command sets the rotation center. The rotation center can be put at
any selected location.
The Focus Tool bars
53
Tumble Tumbles the view
The Tumble tool enables tumbling the active view around the current rotation center. Drag
the mouse on the view to tumble the camera. Press the SHIFT key to constrain tumbling.
Note: The Tumble tool can also be invoked by keeping the ALT key pressed while dragging the
LMB
Dolly Dollies the view
The Dolly tool enables dolling of the active view. Drag the mouse horizontally on the view to
dolly the camera. Press the SHIFT key to zoom.
Note: The Dolly tool can also be invoked by keeping the ALT key pressed while dragging the LMB
and MMB
Pan Pans the view
The Pan tool enables panning the active view. Drag the mouse on the view to pan the camera.
Press the SHIFT key to constrain panning.
Note: The Pan tool can also be invoked by keeping the ALT key pressed while dragging the MMB.
Roll View Rolls the view
The Roll tool enables rolling the active view around the rotation center. Drag the mouse
horizontally on the view to roll the camera.
Note: The Roll tool can also be invoked by keeping the ALT key pressed while dragging the RMB.
Evaluation Light Toggles the presence of the evaluation light
The Evaluation Light tool toggles the evaluation light. Press the LMB to position and move the
evaluation light.
Evaluation Light - Property sheet
[Reset]
The Reset button resets the evaluation light to its original location.
Two sided lighting Sets the evaluation light to the single or two-sided
The Two sided lighting tool toggles if the evaluation light is to be switched on in one direction or
both. If this tool is selected, the lighting is turned on from both the directions; if not then only in
a single direction. If they are flipped,the flip normal tool can be used to make them consistent
with the rest of the faces.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
54
Named Views toolbar
The Named Views toolbar contains tools to set the camera position to provide specific
views. With the named views that correspond to one of the six directions of the axes, an
Automotive grid can be displayed.
Top Sets the view to the top of the object
The Top command sets the active view to the top view.
Bottom Sets the view to the bottom of the object
The Bottom command sets the active view to the bottom view.
Front Sets the view to the front of the object
The Front command sets the active view to the front view.
Back Sets the view to the back of the object
The Back command sets the active view to the back view.
Left Sets the view to the left of the object
The Left command sets the active view to the left view.
Right Sets the view to the right of the object
The Right command sets the active view to the right view.
Top South West Sets the view to the top south west of the object
The Top South West command sets the active view to the top south west view.
Top South East Sets the view to the top south east of the object
The Top South East command sets the active view to the top south east view.
Top North East Sets the view to the top north east of the object
The Top North East command sets the active view to the top north east view.
The Focus Tool bars
55
Top North West Sets the view to the top north west of the object
The Top North West command sets the active view to the top north west view.
Bottom South West Sets the view to the bottom south west of the object
The Bottom South West command sets the active view to the bottom south west view.
Bottom South East Sets the view to the bottom south east of the object
The Bottom South East command sets the active view to the bottom south east view.
Bottom North East Sets the view to the bottom north east of the object
The Bottom North East command sets the active view to the bottom north east view.
Bottom North West Sets the view to the bottom north west of the object
The Bottom North West command sets the active view to the bottom north west view.
Align View to Entity
The Align View to Entity command works specifically on features and sections. It aligns the
view to a specified feature or a section. This command works on a pre-selection or the user
can select the entities once the dialog is shown.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
56
The Align View to Entity dialog box
Align View
The Align View section aligns the view in two ways:
Perpendicular
when the normal of the entity is perpendicular to the view-plane or
Paralle
when the normal of the entity is parallel to the view plane and pointing to the top.
Rotate View
The rotate view section has options to rotate the view.
Scale
The value in this field sets the scale of the view. A default scale is selected when the
dialog is opened. This field allows you to define a specific magnification. By setting a
value higher than the default value, the view is magnified (zoom in). When a lower value
is set, the view is diminished (zoom out).
[Default scale]
This returns the magnification factor to the default for the view.
Rotate by
The Rotate by button allows the view to be rotated by the value specified in the edit box
in the anti-clockwise direction. To rotate in the clockwise direction, simply give a
negative value in the edit box.
The Focus Tool bars
57
Rotate 90˚ anti-clockwise
The Rotate 90 ˚ anti-clockwise button allows the view to be rotated in the anti-clockwise
direction by 90˚. The entity continues to remain aligned to the view.
Rotate 90˚ clockwise
The Rotate 90 ˚ clockwise button allows the view to be rotated in the clockwise direction
by 90 ˚. The entity continues to remain aligned to the view.
Flip Horizontal
The Flip Horizontal button will flip the model horizontally keeping the entity aligned to
the view.
Flip Vertical
The Flip Vertical button will flip the model vertically keeping the entity aligned to the
view.
Hide all except selected
When this option is selected everything except the selected item is hidden from the
screen.
[Pick] / [Restore]
The Pick button allows to pick the entity – feature/section from the scene or the
Inspection tree. If the entity is pre-selected, then the caption of the button changes to
Restore. Restore button de-selects the entity and allows re-selection.
To align a view to a feature
1. Select the feature or section in the Inspection tree.
2. Click the [Pick] button to select it for alignment.
3. Set the alignment to the perpendicular or parallel as required.
4. To rotate the view enter a value in the input field then click the Rotate button.
5. Click [Restore] to restore the view to its original orientation.
Named Views Manages specific views
The Named Views tool manages customized named views. It allows you to save a specific
view of an object that can be retrieved when required.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
58
The Named Views dialog box
Available Views
The Available Views list box lists all views that have been defined in the document.
[Restore]
This button sets the view to the view selected from the list.
[Rename]
This button renames the view selected from the list.
[Delete]
This button removes the view selected from the list.
View Name
This field allows you to enter a name for the current view.
[Save current view with this name]
This button saves the current view with the name specified in the View Name edit box.
[Close]
This button saves the modifications and closes the Named Views dialog box.
[Cancel]
This button cancels the modifications and closes the Named Views dialog box.
To create a named view
1. Position the object as required in the document.
2. Click on the Named Views tool.
The Focus Tool bars
59
3. Enter a name for the view.
4. Click [Save current view with this name].
5. Click [Close].
Clipping planes Defines a pair of parallel clipping planes
This tool allows you to define a pair of parallel planes which can be used to clip away the
parts of the object outside of the clipping planes. The planes used to define the clipping
planes can be based on system axes, planar parts of the model or features.
The clipping planes can also be used to define sections on solids, meshes and point clouds.
They can also be used to cut a mesh or a point cloud along the planes and so create new
objects in the inspection tree.
The Clipping Planes dialog
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
60
Selection
The Selection panel allows you to switch between the selection of objects or the
manipulation of clipping planes.
The field shows the number of items that have been selected in the Inspection tree and
upon which the clipping planes actions will be performed.
[Reselect]
The [Reselect] button allows you to update the selection field when the selection in the tree or the
scene has been changed.
Objects
When this option is checked, you can modify the objects that are selected in the tree or the scene.
The selection will be updated in the dialog when the [Reselect] button is used.
Clipping Plane Location
When this option is checked, you can click in the scene to define the position of the clipping
planes. The position information will be updated in the Method panel.
Add / Remove clipping planes
This panel lists the currently defined clipping planes. A number of clipping planes can be
defined allowing you to clip an object from different directions, for example in the X and
the Y directions. When the button next to a clipping plane is checked ON, the clipping
planes will be visible in the scene.
[Add]
This adds the current clipping plane definition to the list. A maximum of three clipping
planes can be defined. After that the [Add] button becomes insensitive.
[Remove]
This removes the currently selected (highlighted) clipping planes from the list.
Method
The Method panel contains a number of options for creating the clipping planes.
X , Y , Z
These options enable you to define planes that are perpendicular to the selected axis.
1. Click in the scene to define the position of one of the planes. This will be either the front
or the rear plane according to the option set in the Handling panel.
2. The parallel clipping plane is specified using either the To field (in which the position is
specified) or the Step field (in which the distance between the planes is specified).
Plane passing through three points
This option enables you to define a plane that passes through three point.
1. Click in the scene on each of the point that you want to use to define the planes. This will
be define either the front or the rear plane according to the option set in the Handling
panel.
The Focus Tool bars
61
2. The parallel clipping plane is specified using the Step field (in which the distance
between the planes is specified).
Defined planar area
This option enables you to define a plane that corresponds with a planar area on the
model.
1. Click in the scene on the planar area you want to use to define the planes. This will be
define either the front or the rear plane according to the option set in the Handling panel.
2. The parallel clipping plane is specified using the Step field (in which the distance
between the planes is specified).
Measured feature
This option enables you to define a plane that corresponds with a plane passing through a
selected measured feature
1. The feature whose plane will be used to define the clipping plane can be selected from the
drop down list.
2. You can choose whether the clipping plane will be Parallel to, or Perpendicular to the
selected feature plane.
3. The parallel clipping plane is specified using the Step field (in which the distance
between the planes is specified).
Handling
These buttons allow you to manipulate the defined planes.
Three buttons are provided to allow you to move the position of the clipping planes. You
can choose whether to move the front (yellow) plane, the rear (blue) plane or both of the
planes.
These buttons allows you to choose which of the parallel clipping planes will be most
visible in the scene. These buttons also define which of the planes will be used for the Cut
and Create Section operations. The yellow plane represents the front plane and the blue
plane represents the rear one.
Actions
[Cut]
This operations cuts away the part of the object that lies outside of the currently selected
clipping planes. This operation can be undone using the Edit-Undo function from the
menu bar if necessary.
Extra Points
When checked ON extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the
defined plane. In the case of a mesh additional triangles will be generated in order to
create a straight cut edge. This is illustrated in the figure below.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
62
Cut effect with and without extra points
[Create section]
This operation allows you to create sections that correspond to the clipping planes. You
can create sections on either one or both of the clipping planes according to options
described above.
[Apply]
Applies the current settings in the dialog, i.e. clips the object according to the settings.
[Close]
This closes the dialog
To define a set of clipping planes
1. Click on the Clipping planes tools.
2. If no object has been selected then you will need to do so, by checking the Objects button
and then selecting the object in the scene or in the inspection tree. Click the [Reselect]
button.
3. Click the Clipping Plane Location button.
4. Choose the method you want to use to define the clipping planes and follow the
instructions given above.
5. Choose whether you wish to clip on both planes or one plane by selecting the appropriate
option from the Handling panel ( ).
6. When the clipping plane is as required click [Add] to add the defined clipping planes to
the list.
7. Choose another method and create another set of planes to add to the list if required.
8. Select the clipping planes to be used by checking the buttons ON in the list.
9. Click [Apply] to clip the object.
The Focus Tool bars
63
10. Clip operations can be undone using the Undo function from the tool bar or the Edit
menu.
To create sections on clipping planes.
1. Follow the instructions given above to create a pair of clipping planes.
2. If you wish to clip the object first, select the required pair of clipping planes and click
[Apply].
3. Otherwise select whether you wish to create the section along the front, the rear or both
clipping planes by pressing the required buttons in the Handling plane ( ).
4. Click [Create Section].
5. The sections will appear in the nominal or the measured section of the inspection tree.
To cut an object along clipping planes
Cup operations can only be performed on point clouds and meshes.
1. Follow the instructions given above to create a pair of clipping planes.
2. Click [Cut].
The point cloud mesh will be cut along the clipping planes. Three new point clouds/meshes will
appear in the inspection tree.
- The part that was on the side of the front plane will be termed _Inner
- The part that was on the side of the rear plane will be termed _Outer_Inner
- The part that was on between the rear and the front plane will be termed _Outer_Outer
Cut operations can be undone using the Undo function from the tool bar or the Edit menu.
Info/Visibility toolbar
The Info/Visibility toolbar provides a set of tools that enable you to view different aspects
of information about objects.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
64
The illustration above shows that 'Alignments' can not be viewed because they do not have
a check box next to them. The visibility of any single object can be switched on and off
using the check boxes as well as the entries in this toolbar.
Info Provides information on selected objects
This tool displays the Object Info dialog box with information on the selected objects.
Colors Allows you to define object attributes
This schedules the Attributes dialog on the Drawstyle tab
Automotive grid Displays a grid on the scene with user-defined characteristics
This tool generates a grid on the scene, the characteristics of which are defined in the
Automotive Grid Properties dialog. The grid can not be used with a ortho view, it can only
be displayed on a Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left or Right view. The grid is defined in the
planes of the axes.
The Automotive Grid Properties
Text starts at X, Y, Z
The values along the three axes at which grid and values grid will be displayed.
Text interval
The distance between major grid lines with text on them.
Ticker interval
The distance between minor tick lines between the major grid lines.
Decimals
The number of decimal places used to display the grid values.
The Focus Tool bars
65
Line type
A continuous line is shown across the entire scene. Marks represent short lines along the
axes.
Text
The font size (in points) used for the text.
Labels color
The color used for the text.
Lines color
The color used for the grid lines.
Lines color
The color used for the grid lines.
Show grid
When this button is checked ON, the grid will be displayed. The grid as defined in this
dialog will appear whenever a suitable view is selected.
[OK]
This button applies the defined grid.
Attributes info Allows you to define object attributes
This tool schedules the Attributes dialog in which you can define the way in which the
current objects are displayed. The options that are available in this dialog depend on the
object selected.
Toggle Visibility Toggles the visibility status of objects
This tool switches the visibility of objects in the scene. Objects that have been hidden using
the 'Hide Selected' or 'Hide All Except Selected' tools will be restored to visibility, and
objects currently on view will be hidden.
Show All Displays all currently available objects
This tool restores the visibility of all the objects that are currently available in the
Inspection data tree.
Hide Selected Hides selected objects
This tool will remove selected objects from the scene. Their visibility can be restored using
the Toggle Visibility or the Show All tool.
Hide All Except Selected Removes all objects except those that are selected from view
This tool will remove all objects that have not been selected from the scene. Their visibility
can be restored using the Toggle Visibility or the Show All tool.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
66
Feature Flyouts toolbar
The Feature Flyouts toolbar contains commands to label existing features and sections.
Show Feature Name Shows the name of a feature
This tool displays the labels of selected feature(s). If no features are specifically selected, it
displays the name of all features in the nominal and/or measured data. The picture below
shows an example.
To show the names of feature(s)
1. Select Mixed Object Selection Tool.
2. Select the nominal and/or measure feature(s) for which you want to show the label(s) in
the data tree.
If no features are selected, the names of all will be displayed.
3. Click on the Show Feature Name tool.
Hide Feature Name Hides the name of a Feature
This tool hides the labels of selected or all feature(s) in nominal and/or measured data.
To hide the name of feature(s)
1. Select Mixed Object Selection Tool.
2. Select the nominal and/or measured feature(s) for which you want to hide the label(s).
If no features are selected, all labels will be hidden.
3. Click the Hide Feature Name tool.
Show Section Name Shows the name of a section
This tool reveals the name of sections.
The Focus Tool bars
67
To show the names of section(s)
1. Select Mixed Object Selection Tool.
2. Select the nominal and/or measure section(s) for which you want to show the label(s) in
the Inspection Tree.
If no sections are selected, the names of al lsections will be displayed.
3. Click on the Show Section Name tool.
Hide Section Name Hides displayed section names
This tool hides the name of all the sections revealed in the scene using the Show Section
Name tool.
This tool will remove the names of sections that are selected in the Inspection Tree. If no sections
are selected, all labels will be removed.
Flyout Properties Changes the flyout display style
This tool enables you to edit the display characteristics of an existing flyout. A flyout can
be created using the Create Flyouts tool.
This option schedules the Flyout Properties dialog. This dialog contains the Flyout
properties tab, the Flyout Colors tab and the Sign indication tab as described for the
Create Flyouts tool.
68
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
The Solid Based workflow uses solids as primary nominal models.
It provides sets of tools grouped intuitively within a series of tasks that enable you to accomplish
a full analysis of nominal and measured models.
Nominal task
The Nominal task is primarily used for importing and preparing the Reference or Nominal
model(s) ready for comparison. The Solid based workflow deals with Solids as primary Nominal
models.
The preparation of the nominal model for comparison includes:
Importing the Nominal datasets and managing the membership of Nominal models in the
scene.
Fitting features such as lines, circles, rectangular slots, round slots, key slots, planes,
point cloud/mesh-areas, spheres and cylinders. These are used for feature-based
alignment with measured models in the Align task.
Modifying the model in various ways including, merging and mirroring solids, aligning
and flipping face normals, deleting, duplicating, hiding and manipulating layered faces
Creating GD&T annotation based on features and dimensions as well as determining
other dimensions.
Creating sections and adding them to a rail.
The Nominal task includes the following Ribbon Groups:
o Import Nominal
o Feature fitting
o GD&T Dimensions
o Modify Nominal
o Sections :
All of these tools are described in the Solid Workflow - Compare task.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
69
Import Nominal
The Import Nominal Ribbon Group contains commands to import the nominal Solid
models.
Import Nominal Solid
Imports a Solid model from various file formats
The Import Solid command imports solid models of types:
SAT-ACIS
IGS/IGES,
CATIAV4(EXP, MODEL, SESSION),
CATIAV5(CATPART),
Pro/Engineer(PRT, ASM),
STP/STEP,
VDA-VDAFS or
Unigraphics (UGS)
Solids can also be imported from Focus Inspection native mfi or pff files. If the mfi or pff
file does not contain a solid, its absence is reported in the status bar. This option also
imports GD&T information.
The Import Solids dialog box
The Import Solids dialog provides the means to browse to where the file to be imported is
located. It also includes some importation options.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
70
Solid Display Accuracy
This defines settings for the visualization of the solid. The further the slider is to the right,
the more accurately the solid is displayed but the higher the memory usage. This value
can also be set afterwards inside the application using Solid Display Accuracy tool.
Simplify
If this option is checked ON, a simplification process is applied during the import to
reduce an excessive number of edges.
Note: It is possible that the solid geometry may be damaged because of this option. Hence, it is
recommended that this option is used only for solids with excessive number of edges which cause a
problem during importation.
Acis Healing
Check this option ON to initiate a healing process that sequentially analyzes, calculates
and fixes stages of geometry simplification. This option is recommended if the file being
imported has been corrupted.
Import Features
This option is only available for CATIAv5 models. When checked features that have been
defined on the model will imported and appear in the Nominal section of the Inspection
tree.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
71
Import Attributes (PMI)
This option is for CATIAv5 and ProEngineer models. When checked attributes associated
with the model will be imported. Attributes include the colour, the material thickness and
the compare tolerance values. These values can be seen in the Attributes tab of the Global
information dialog.
Roughness - this imports the roughness attributes associated with the CAD model.
Import Hidden Objects
This option can be used when importing CATIAv5 models. When this option is checked
ON, then all hidden objects associated with the CATIA model will be imported. When
checked OFF, only visible objects will be imported.
As Separate Solids
This option imports the CAD model as separate solids.
To import a solid
1. Click on the Import Solid tool.
2. In the Import Solids dialog select the required file type in the 'Files of type' drop down
list.
3. Select the required files.
4. Set the required Solid Display Accuracy.
If the complexity of the model is unknown set a low value (slider to the left). The
accuracy can be adjusted using the Solid Display Accuracy tool.
Only move the slider one or two clicks at a time. Dragging may cause memory problems.
5. Check the 'Import Features' button if you wish to import these with the solid model (this
applies to CATIAv5 models only).
6. Check the 'Import Attributes' button if you wish to import these with the solid model (this
applies to CATIAv5 and ProEngineer models only).
7. Check the 'Import Hidden Objects' button if you wish to import these with the solid model
(this applies to CATIAv5 models only).
8. Click the [Import] button.
9. If the status bar indicates problems set the Simplify or Acis healing options described
above.
Note: Apart from importing IGES Solids, you can also import IGES surfaces as Solids. While
importing the IGES surfaces, watch the status bar for the IGES surfaces to Solid processing
information.
The solid is imported and automatically added to the Nominal window in the Inspection tree.
Solid to Mesh
Converts a solid to a mesh
This option enables you to convert a solid to a mesh from the tree or from a file. It
schedules the Solid to Mesh dialog.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
72
The Solid to Mesh dialog
From tree
Use this option to select an already imported solid that is in the Nominal tree, or re-select
it.
From File
Click this option to enables you to select a solid that is not yet imported. It will be
imported into the current document when it is converted.
Solid sampling
These options control how the solid will be converted to a mesh.
Chordal Deviation
Enter the value in this field that determines when a new point will be created on a curve.
This is illustrated in the figure below. When the value of the Chordal Deviation is
achieved, a point is created on the arc of the curve.
Maximum Point Distance
Enter the value in this field that determines the where a point will be created on a plane
surface. When the value specified of the specified Maximum Point Distance occurs a
point is created on a plane. This is illustrated in the figure above.
Keep solid
This option is only available when the solid is already in the Nominal tree. When checked
the original solid will be retained.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
73
[OK]
This button converts (and imports if necessary) the selected solid.
The mesh(es) appear in the Nominal tree. They can only be seen in the display if you are working
in the STL workflow .
To import a solid and convert it to a mesh
1. Click on the 'Solid to Mesh' tool.
2. In the "Solid to Mesh" dialog select the solid to be converted from the Inspection tree and
click [Reselect] if necessary
or
Click 'From File' and browse for the file to be imported and converted.
3. Enter the required solid sampling parameters.
4. If the solid has already been imported and is in the tree you can choose to keep the
original solid.
5. Click [OK] to import and convert the solid to a mesh.
Solid Display Accuracy
Sets the accuracy with which a solid is displayed
The Solid Display Accuracy tool is used to set the accuracy of the display of the Solids in
the scene. This tool is also useful to set the accuracy if it was not set earlier while
importing using the Import Solid command, see Import Solids.
Note: This tool is active only when there is a solid model(s) under the Models node of the Nominal
tree.
The Solid Display Accuracy dialog box
In the Solid Display Accuracy dialog box, the accuracy of the display of the Solids in the
scene can be set. The more the slider is to the right, the more accurate the solid will be
displayed but the higher the memory usage will be.
The image below shows a solid model. The first image shows a simplified (inaccurate)
representation that can be used on complex and large models, whereas the right image
shows an accurate representation that can be used on easy and small models.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
74
To set the Solid Display Accuracy
1. Select a solid from the Models node of the Nominal tree if necessary.
If no solids are selected, the accuracy of all solids will be adapted.
2. Click the ‘Solid Display Accuracy’ tool. The Solid Display Accuracy dialog box appears.
3. Drag the slider 1 or 2 clicks at a time (moving the slider all the way to the right will
allocate a lot of (possibly too much) memory) .
4. Click [Apply].
5. Stop dragging the slider to the right when a satisfying result is achieved.
Do not set to a value higher than necessary to avoid using excessive memory.
6. Click [Close ].
Add to Nominal
Adds the Selection to the Nominal models
This tool adds an object (Solid / Point cloud /mesh / Feature ) to the Nominal model.
Note: This tool is only active when there is a model (Solid/Point cloud/mesh/Feature) ready to be
added to the membership. Since the application automatically adds the model to the Models node
when you import a Solid model, this tool is typically grayed out after import.
All nominal models are displayed in the Nominal window of the Inspection tree. During import,
nominal models (Solid/Point cloud/mesh) are automatically placed under this node.
Note: Object types that are not accepted can be modified in the “Config Workflow Tasks…” editor
in the Workflows menu.
To add a model to the membership of the Model node
1. Click the Mixed Object Select tool.
2. Click on the object to be selected and added to the Model node.
This can be a solid, a point cloud, a mesh or a feature
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
75
If the tool is not activated then the object is already a member of the Nominal Model
node.
3. If the tool icon is active, click on the tool to add the solid model’s membership under
Models node.
Feature Fitting
Features are geometrical entities, definable in both the Nominal and Measured models. The
purpose of feature detection is to extract the geometrical entities and obtain specific parameters
such as a center point, axis direction, radius etc for use in alignment, comparison and/or
dimensional verification.
Features in the Nominal CAD are well-defined geometries. Detection of these features is easy
because of the clean input. Solid: features are fit to selected face edges.
All the feature-fitting tools support the rapid MMB option to fit the selected feature without
opening the feature’s property sheet.
Fit Feature
Opens up the Feature Detection panel to select the feature(s) to be fitted.
This tool opens the feature detection panel in which you can select the type of feature to be
generated and set the parameters to define it. Some of the options in this panel will always
be insensitive since it depends on the context in which you are working.
Click on the required feature tool. The fields in the panel will be adjusted as required.
When the All button is checked on, then you can detect a number of different features
simultaneously.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
76
Create Nominal Feature Point
Creates a point feature at a specified location
The Create Nominal Feature Point tool creates a feature point in the model at the specified
location.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature point that is to be created. The default name
contains the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones
in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
77
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the feature point to be created. These fields will either show the
coordinates of the point selected in the scene or can be used to define the required
coordinates of the feature point manually.
[Create]
This button will create the feature point at the defined position.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To create a nominal feature point
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click the Create Nominal Feature Point tool.
3. In the Selection dialog choose the Pick Select option.
4. Enter a name if required, otherwise the default name will be used followed by an integer
in brackets.
5. There are two means to define the position of a nominal feature point:
EITHER
Click with the LMB on the solid where you want to create a nominal feature point. The
co-ordinates in the panel will be updated to show co-ordinates of the clicked point.
OR
Enter the required XYZ coordinates in the corresponding fields in the panel.
6. To create the point
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Create] in the definition panel.
7. Click [Close] when all the required features have been defined.
The feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the Inspection tree.
Fit Nominal Line
Detects or creates a line feature.
This tool fits a straight line to the selected points/edge in the model, or creates a line with
specified characteristics.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
78
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones
in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.
Fixed Length
When this option is checked, the line feature will have a defined length. The value for the
length can be specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center point of the line will be set at a defined point.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the line.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the axis of the line will be set by a defined vector.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
79
I, J, K
The components of the vector defining the axis of the line.
[Detect]
This button will detect the feature once the required input has been selected on the model
and the specific characteristics have been defined.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the line have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the length, the center point and the direction. It will create a line feature with
these characteristics.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a line feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Line tool.
3. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using
the single Pick option or using the Lasso option.
4. Enter a name for the new feature. If no name is specified a default name is generated.
5. Enter a value for some of the line characteristics if required.
6. Select one or more edges in the solid using the chosen tool. The selected edges are
highlighted.
7. To detect the line feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The figure below shows a line detected from a single edge selected in the scene.
The pictures below show the line of a fixed length fitted to a selected edge.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
80
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
To create a line feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Line tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature.
4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the line, i.e. its length, center point and direction.
5. Click [Create]
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
Fit All Check box
Fits all the features in the enclosing box
When this check box is switched on, all of the features in the enclosing box, i.e. circles,
round slots, rectangular slots, key slots and hexagonal slots will be detected
simultaneously.
Feature Name
The detected features are automatically named according to the convention Nom_{type of
feature} (number). For example Nom_Circle and Nom_Circle (2).
The application of the prefix Nom_ allows you to use the functionality to detect measured
feature dimensions from nominal ones in the Measured task.
[Detect]
This button will fit the features on the selected solid faces.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing all of the feature detected with this
functionality. This can be repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when
the button becomes insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect multiple feature types
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the All check button .
3. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose the solid face(s) on which the
features will be detected.
4. Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
All features of the types listed above will be detected and appear in the respective Features
sections of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
81
Fit Nominal Circle
Detects or creates a circle feature
This tool fits a circle to the selected points/edge in the model, or creates a circle with
specified characteristics.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones
in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
82
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked ON, the circle feature will have a defined radius. The
required value can be entered in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked ON, the circle will have its center at a defined point.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the circle.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked ON, the axis of the circle will be defined by a specific
vector.
I, J, K
The vector components defining the axis of the circle.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model,
and/or specific characteristics have been defined.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the circle have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the radius, the center point and the direction. It will create a circle feature with
these characteristics.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a circle feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Circle tool.
3. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using the
single Pick option or using the Lasso option.
4. Enter a name for the feature to be created. If no name is specified, the default name will
be used.
5. Enter a value for some of the circle characteristics if required.
6. Select one or more edges in the scene using the chosen tool. The selected edges are
highlighted.
7. To detect the circle feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
83
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
To create a circle feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Circle tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature.
4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the circle, i.e. its radius, center point and
direction.
5. Click [Create]
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
Fit Nominal Round Slot
Detects a round slot feature
The Fit Nominal Round Slot tool is used to fit a round slot to the selected points/edge in the
model.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
84
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones
in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.
Slot Type
The Slot Type parameter specifies at what ends the slot will be truly round. The choices
are between :
Both Ends: Fits a complete round slot to the selected points.
First End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the first end.
Second End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the second end.
[Detect]
This button is used to fit the feature once the required inputs (points/edges) are selected
on the model.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
85
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a round slot feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Round Slot tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature to be created. If no name is specified, the default name will
be used.
4. In the Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using
the single Pick option or using the Lasso option.
5. Select one or more edges in the scene using the chosen tool.
6. To detect the round slot feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
Fit Nominal Rectangular Slot
Detects a rectangular slot feature
The Fit Nominal Rectangular Slot tool is used to fit a Rectangular Slot to the selected
points/edge in the model.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
86
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones
in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.
[Detect]
This button is used to fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the
model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
87
To detect a rectangular slot feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Rectangular Slot tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature to be created. If no name is specified, the default name will
be used.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option
5. Select one the area on the model in which the slot will be detected.
6. To detect the rectangular slot feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
Fit Nominal Key Slot
Detects a key slot feature
This tool is used to fit a key slot to the selected points/edge in the model. A key slot has two
component holes, a small one and a big one, that are used as the base for key slot
construction.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
88
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones
in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.
Slot
The Slot parameter defines the key slot shape. Two options are available:
Straight: The resulting key slot has a smaller circular hole component that is extended to
the bigger circular hole component as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
89
Tangent: The resulting key slot has a smaller circular hole component that is
progressively enlarged to the bigger circular hole component as shown below.
[Detect]
This button is used to fit the feature once the required input have been selected on the
model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a key slot feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Key Slot tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature to be created. If no name is specified, the default name will
be used.
4. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using
the single Pick option or using the Lasso option.
5. Select the area over which the key slot will be detected.
6. To detect the key slot feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
90
Fit Nominal Hexagonal Slot
Detects and creates a hexagonal slot feature
The Fit Nominal Hexagonal Slot tool is used to fit a hexagonal slot to the selected
points/edge in the model.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones
in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
91
[Detect]
This button is used to fit the feature once the required inputs have been selected on the
model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a hexagonal slot feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Hexagonal Slot tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature to be created. If no name is specified, the default name will
be used.
4. Enter any required value of tolerance and depth.
5. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using
the single Pick option or using the Lasso option.
6. Select the area over which the hexagonal slot will be detected.
7. To detect the hexagonal slot feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
Fit Nominal Plane
Detects or creates a plane feature.
This tool fits a plane to the selected points/face(s) in the model or creates a plane
according to specified features.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
92
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones
in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.
Fixed Size
When this option is checked, the side of the plane will be of a specified length. The value
of the length is specified in the input field. .
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the plane will be set in a specified position.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the plane.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
93
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the direction of the normal to the plane will be defined by a
specified vector.
I, J, K
The components of the vector defining the direction of the normal to the plane.
[Detect]
This button will detect the feature once the required input has been selected on the model
and the specific characteristics have been defined.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the plane have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the length, the center point and the direction. It will create a plane feature with
these characteristics.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a plane feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Plane tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature to be created. If no name is specified, the default name will
be used.
4. Enter a value for some of the plane characteristics if required.
5. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
6. Select one or more faces in the scene using the chosen tool.
7. To detect the plane feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
To create a plane feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Plane tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature.
4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the plane, i.e. its size, center point and direction.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
94
5. Click [Create]
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
Fit Nominal Cylinder
Detects and creates a cylinder feature.
The Fit Nominal Cylinder tool is used to fit a cylinder to the selected points/face(s) in the
model or to create a cylinder based on specified values.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones
in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
95
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked ON, the cylinder feature will have a specified radius. The
radius is specified in the input field.
Fixed Height
When this option is checked ON, the cylinder feature will have a specified height. The
height is specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked ON, the center of the cylinder will be in a specified position.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the cylinder.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the axis of the cylinder will be defined by a specified vector.
I, J, K
The components of the vector defining the axis of the cylinder.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model,
and/or specific characteristics have been defined.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the cylinder have been defined in
the panel, i.e. the radius, the height, the center point and the direction. It will create a
cylinder feature with these characteristics.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a cylinder feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Cylinder tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature to be created. If no name is specified, the default name will
be used.
4. Enter a value for some of the cylinder characteristics if required.
5. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
6. Select a plane in the scene using the chosen tool.
7. To detect the cylinder feature:
EITHER
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
96
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
To create a cylinder feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Cylinder tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature.
4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the cylinder, i.e. its radius, height, center point
and direction.
5. Click [Create]
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
Fit Nominal Sphere
Detects and creates a sphere feature.
This tool fits a sphere to the selected points/faces in the model, or creates a sphere with
specified characteristics.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
97
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones
in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the sphere feature will have a specified radius. The radius is
specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the sphere will be set in a specified position.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the sphere.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
98
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model,
and/or specific characteristics have been defined.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the sphere have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the radius, and the center point. It will create a sphere feature with these
characteristics.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a sphere feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Sphere tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature to be created. If no name is specified, the default name will
be used.
4. Enter a value for some of the sphere characteristics if required.
5. In the Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using
the single Pick option or using the Lasso option.
6. Select one or more points in the scene using the chosen tool. The selected edges are
highlighted.
7. To detect the sphere feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
To create a sphere feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Sphere tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature.
4. Specify all the characteristics relating to the circle, i.e. its radius and center point.
5. Click [Create]
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
99
Fit Nominal Cone
Detects a cone feature.
The Detect Nominal Cone tool is used to fit a cone frustum to the selected points/face(s) in
the model.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_ an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: if you wish to use the functionality to detect measured feature dimensions from nominal ones
in the Measured task, then you must retain the prefix Nom_ in the feature name.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
100
[Detect]
This button is used to fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the
model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a cone feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Cone tool.
3. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using
the single Pick option or using the Lasso option.
4. Enter a name for the feature to be created. If no name is specified, the default name will
be used.
5. Enter the required tolerance value.
6. Select one or more points on the solid using the chosen tool.
7. To detect the cone feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the inspection tree.
Detect Nominal Line Profile
Detects a line profile feature
This tool creates a feature that characterises the profile of a section. It is used in GD&T
feature analysis which allows you to place a tolerance on the line profile.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
101
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_LineProfile an the identification of the associated section.
[Detect]
This button will detect the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
This must be a line section or a part of a line section.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
102
To detect a line profile feature
1. Click on the Create section tool to create the sections required.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
3. Click on the Detect Nominal Line Profile tool.
4. Enter a name for the new feature. If no name is specified a default name is generated.
5. Select a single section, either in the Inspection Tree or the Scene.
The Lasso option in the Selection dialog allows you to select just a part of a section if
required.
6. EITHER click the MMB in the scene,
OR click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The Line Profile feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the
Inspection tree. A tolerance can be defined for the line profiles using the Create GD&T
Annotation tool .
Detect Nominal Surface Profile
Detects a surface profile feature
This tool creates a features that characterizes the profile of a surface. It is used in GD&T
feature analysis which allows you to place a tolerance on the surface profile. This feature
can only be detected on a solid or meshed surface.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
103
Feature Name
This field can be used to name the feature that is to be created. The default name contains
the prefix Nom_SurfaceProfile and a number.
[Detect]
This button will detect the feature once a solid surface has been selected in the scene.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a surface profile feature
1. Click on the Fit Nominal Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Fit Nominal Surface Profile tool.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
104
3. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to make selections using
the single Pick option or using the Lasso option.
4. Enter a name for the new feature. If no name is specified a default name is generated.
5. Select surface areas on the solid or the mesh using the chosen tool.
6. EITHER click the MMB in the scene,
OR click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The Surface Profile feature will appear in the Features section of the Nominal panel in the
Inspection tree. A tolerance can be defined for the surface profiles using the Create GD&T
Annotation tool .
Import Features
Imports features that have been exported using the Export features tool.
This tool enables you to import features that have been exported using the Export Features
tool. It schedules the Import Metris Focus Files dialog in which you can browse for the file
that contains the exported features.
The file types supported are:
- .TXT (client feature files)
- .MFF (Metris feature files)
- CSV (CSV feature files - Audiplan)
- INS (INS feature files - Audiplan)
The imported features appear in the nominal tree list and can be seen on the structure.
To import nominal features
1. Click on the Import Nominal Features tool.
2. In the "Import Metris Focus files" dialog browse for the file in which features have been
exported using the Export Features tool.
3. Click [Import].
Surface Point from Point
Creates Surface points from Feature points and Nominal Model.
The Create Surface Points from Feature Points tool creates the surface point(s) from the
selected feature point(s) and the nominal model. At least one nominal model and one
feature point must be visible to create surface points.
This tool can be opened with a nominal model and pre-selecting a point cloud.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
105
The Create Surface Points from Feature Points dialog box
[ Reselect Points ]
The Reselect Points button selects the feature points that are selected in nominal features
tree to create surface point(s). If no feature point is selected, then all the feature points
will be selected.
[ Reselect Nominal ]
The Reselect Nominal button selects the nominal models that are selected in nominal
models tree to create surface points. If no nominal model is selected, then all the nominal
models will be selected.
Warning tolerance
Warning tolerance specifies the normal distance from the feature point to the nominal
model. If the feature point is located beyond the Warning tolerance, then warning
message will be appeared in the Warning message box and however, surface point(s) will
be created.
To tree
When checked, the surface point(s) are added under nominal features tree.
To file
When checked, the surface point(s) are saved into the file specified. These saved surface
point(s) can be used for Directional Compare.
[ Create ]
Click on the Create button to create the surface point(s). The surface point(s) get added
under the nominal features tree as shown below.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
106
[ Delete ]
This button deletes all the surface points that appear in the nominal features tree
irrespective of their visibility. This button is active only after creating the surface point(s)
(i.e. after clicking on the Create button).
[ Close ]
This closes the Create Surface Points dialog box.
To create surface points
1. Import any nominal model and create feature point(s) on the model.
2. Click the Create Surface Points tool.
3. Select the feature point(s) and the nominal model to create surface point(s).
4. Click on the buttons Reselect Points and Reselect Nominal.
5. Set the warning tolerance as required.
6. Check the to tree and to file check boxes if want to add the surface point(s) in the nominal
features tree and save the surface point(s) to the file specified respectively.
7. Click [Create ] to create surface point(s). If to tree check box is checked then surface
point(s) will be added under the nominal features tree.
Intersection
Creates a intersection feature between two existing features
The Intersection tool creates intersection object (point/line) that can be used afterwards for
dimensioning.
Intersections can be made with following objects:
Apparent Intersection Closest intersection
Object Result Object Result
2 planes line 2 planes line
1 plane and 1
line
point 1 plane and 1
line
point
2 lines and the
current view
direction
point 1 plane and 1
cylinder
point
2 cylinders
(cylinders
should behave a
lines) and the
current view
direction
point 1 Line and 1
Cylinder
point (closest to
both axes)
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
107
1 line and 1
cylinder
point 1 point and 1
line
1 point (middle
between point
and line)
1 point and 1
line
point (closest
distance)
2 Cylinders point (closest to
both axes)
1 plane and 1
cylinder axis
point 2 lines point (closest to
both axes)
These objects must be selected before the tool becomes available.
The Intersection property sheet
[Compute Apparent/Closest Intersection]
This button will generate the feature according to the parameters set.
Apparent
When this option is checked, a feature will be generated if the objects appear to intersect.
Closest
When this option is checked, if the objects do not intersect, then the mid point of the
closest distance between them is defined as the intersection point.
To create an Intersection
1. Click on the Mixed Object Selection tool.
2. Select two valid objects as given in the table. Use the <Ctrl> key to select the second
item.
3. Click on the arrow to open the property sheet.
If you click directly on the tool the intersection will be created using the last used
settings.
4. Choose whether to generate an Apparent or a Closest intersection.
5. Click the [Compute Apparent/Closest Intersection] button to generate the required
intersection.
Note: Intersection objects are added to the Inspection tree; in the Nominal panel when both
source objects are nominal, in the Measured panel when any of the objects is measured.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
108
Project Object
Projects features and sections to the XY, YZ or XZ plane at a given location, or a feature plane or a solid/mesh.
This tool can be used as preparation for dimensioning. It allows you to project point
features, line features or sections onto planes or the model.
Project dialog box
[Select to project]
This button updates the field alongside to indicate the number of features or sections that
have been selected to project.
Target
The Target onto which the feature/section will be projected. This can be:
The XY/ YZ/ XZ planes
The plane associated with a feature.
The CAD model, a Point Cloud or a Mesh
Unbounded
When checked ON, the projection will be made to the infinite 3D plane.
Location
The location represents the (3rd) coordinate position for the XY, YZ and XZ plane.
Direction
This option only applies when the target is a CAD model, a Point Cloud or a Mesh. It
allows you to select the direction in which the projection towards the target will be made.
When only 1 direction is checked, the projection is in the selected direction.
When 2 directions are checked, the direction of the projection is to a point found at the
intersection of the specified plane going through the original point, and the target object.
When 3 directions are checked, the direction of the projection is that of the closed
distance between the point and the target object.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
109
Keep original
When this option is checked, a copy of the original object is created before the projection
takes place .
[Project]
The Project button projects the selected objects to the target.
To project a point, line or section
1. Select the object to be projected.
2. Click on the Project Object tool.
3. Select the Target from the drop down list.
4. Enter any other parameters associated with the target.
5. Choose whether to keep the original or not. (It can be deleted afterwards.)
6. Click [Project].
A new object will appear in the Inspection tree labelled {object}_Projected.
Detect Edge
Detects edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles on sections
This tool is used to detect Edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles using calipers.
It allows you to define, load and save caliper definitions and to choose the type of output
feature required. The features types are selected on sections that have been created on the
object.
An Edge (Corner) is defined as:
The projection of point ‘c’ onto a line ‘ab’ in the direction of caliper angle ‘1’
Directions: normal of line ‘ab’ and normal of caliper angle ‘1’
Edge detection
A Combi-Hem is defined as:
First point: connection point ‘b’
Second point: projection of ‘c’ onto line ‘ab’ in direction of caliper angle ‘1’
Directions:
First point: normal of line ‘ab’
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
110
Second point: normal of line ‘ab’ AND normal of caliper angle ‘1’
Combi-Hem detection
An Combi-Profile is defined as:
First and second points: connection point ‘b’
Third point: connection point ‘c’
Directions:
First and second point: normal of line ‘ab’.
Third point: normal of caliper angle ‘1’
Combi-Profile detection
The Detect Edge - Combi Hem - Combi Profile dialog
This dialog has two tabs; the Caliper tab enables you to define and select calipers, and the Detect
tab enables you to select the caliper to be used and detect the required feature.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
111
The Detect tab
Nominal
The number of nominal sections selected.
Measured
The number of measured sections selected.
Caliper
This allows you to select a caliper from the list of available calipers. Calipers are defined
in the Caliper tab.
Use on Rail
When checked, the caliper will be used on all sections in a rail.
Output
Select the required feature output - Edge, Combi-hem or Combi-Profile.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
112
Section healing tolerance
This tolerance value allows you to ignore small gaps in the sections.
The Caliper tab
Caliper
[Save]
This opens a Save As dialog and saved the current caliper to disc and renames the
‘current’ caliper with the file name (without extension).
[Load]
This opens a File Import dialog and allows you to select an existing caliper file. The
selected caliper file and the caliper is added to the drop down list.
Dimension
Each distance represents a dimension of the caliper as shown in the picture.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
113
Angles
Each angle represents an angle of the caliper as shown in the picture.
[Detect]
Click this button to detect the required feature type on the selected sections.
To detect an Edge, Combi hem or Combi Profile
This tool detects feature types on sections that have already been created.
1. Select the sections on which the features are to be detected.
2. Click on the Detect Edge-Combi Hem - Combi Profile feature(s) tool.
3. Choose a caliper from those that have already been defined, or click on the Caliper tab
and define one.
4. If the sections are on a rail check the 'Use on Rail' button and then select the rail.
5. Choose the type of feature required.
6. Click [Detect].
Export Features
Exports features to a file
This tool enables you to export features to MFF (Metris Feature Files) or TXT (Delimited
ASCII Files) or IGS, IGES (Interop) files. Features that have been exported to an MFF file
can then be imported using the Import Features tool.
It schedules the "Export features as" dialog in which you can specify the file in which the
features will be exported.
If you select to export the features to a Delimited ASCII file, you will be presented with
the Export Features dialog in which you can select the specific feature data to be exported
and the Delimiter (Tab or Comma) to be used.
Note that Failed features can be exported using the specific Failed Features tool in the Export
ribbon group in the Report tab.
To export features
1. Select the Features to be exported (in the tree).
2. Click on the tool.
3. In the "Export features as" dialog enter a name for the file in which the features are to
stored.
4. If the output format you have chosen is ASCII delimited, select the feature information to
be exported and the delimiter to be used.
5. Click [Save].
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
114
Flip Feature
Switches the direction of the normal of selected features
The Flip Feature tool flips the directions of the normals of selected features.
Flip Feature property sheet
[Flip Normals]
Switches the normal direction of the selected features.
Two-sided lighting
The Two-sided lighting checkbox controls the lighting of the model faces. If checked ON,
the model has both sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has the faces lit on the
positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the Face Normals. This
parameter is also available in the property tree.
To flip a feature Direction
1. Click the Flip Feature icon. It enables the tool and shows the normals of all features
present.
2. Select the feature using LMB for which you want to flip the normal.
3. Click [Flip Normals] on the property sheet or click on the arrow tip to flip the normal
direction for the selected feature.
GDT Dimensions
The GD&T Dimensions Ribbon Group enables you to create dimensions that can be used
for GD&T evaluations.
The dimensions that are detected using these tools can only be based on features
Create GD&T
Creates a GD&T tolerance
This tool enables you to define GD&T tolerances that are based on the ASME 914.5M
Standard on defined features and dimensions. These tolerances are displayed as flyouts on
the features or updates on the dimensions and can be used as a basis for evaluation.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
115
Note that this manual does not describe in detail all the GD&T parameters, it is assumed that the
user is familiar with these.
The Create GD&T Annotation dialog
Selection
This field shows the currently selected feature for which a GD&T tolerance will be
defined. If no feature is pre-selected you will be prompted to select one. This can be done
either in the scene or in the Inspection tree, or from the Selection drop down list.
The Datum tab
Datum
Enter the letter used to define the datum in this field.
You can define either:
A single datum
This is the only option available if there is only one instance of the selected feature type.
No "Additional features" will be presented in the Datum tab.
A composite datum.
This option is available if you have more than one instance of a particular feature type
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
116
created and visible in the Inspection tree. A composite datum allows you to define a
datum relative to the a collection of features of the same type.
Normal vector
This field is used only in the case of a nominal line feature being selected as a datum. It
displays the values of the normal to this line (relative to the scene) which will be used to
create the datum plane.
The [Update ] button will update these values by taking over the current IJK value of the
scene camera.
Additional Features
Additional features appear if more than one instance of the selected feature type exists.
This field lists all the visible features that are of the same type as that selected in the
Selection field. Check the box next to those that you wish to include in the composite
datum
Use middle plane / separate planes
This choice is only available when two features are included in the composite datum. It
allows you define the datum as the plane located in the middle of two features or on
separate planes related to the separate features.
Tolerance tabs
A series of tabs are presented in which you can define the type of tolerance to be applied
to the feature. The contents of the field in the tab will depend on the selected feature. For
some of the characteristics (Orientation and Location) you can define either a local or
composite tolerance.
A composite tolerance will assess the location or the orientation of the feature based not
only on the characteristics of the individual feature, but on its relationship to other
features. Thus you can define a tolerance that dictates the position of a row of three holes
for example.
The Location and Orientation tabs allow you to define primary, secondary and tertiary
datums.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
117
Tolerance
When using a Composite tolerance, you can set an overall tolerance on the
location/orientation of the group as well as the same tolerance on each of the members of
the group.
The group tolerance is defined in the upper row. The individual tolerance is defined in the
lower row.
The first field contains a drop down list that only applies to certain feature types and does
not need to be set otherwise.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
118
The second field contains the tolerance value.
The third field contains a drop down list that defines a material condition and which does
not need to be set.
Projected Tolerance Zone
You can use this field to extend the tolerance zone around a feature by the specified
amount.
Planar Tolerance Direction
The three fields contain the components of the normal vector to the tolerance plane. The
[Update] button will update these values by taking over the current IJK value of the scene
camera.
Datum Compartment
The Datum compartment allows you to specify a combination of datums that will be used
in the evaluation of the tolerance, a set of orthogonal planes for example. The required
datums must have been defined in the Datum tab and can be selected from the drop down
list.
If the Repeat button is checked the single feature tolerance will also take into account the
selected datums .
Drawing Display
This provides an indiction of the information that will be presented in the flyout. The
upper row represents the composite tolerance value and the lower value the individual
tolerance value.
Additional Features
This is list of the additional features that match the selected feature type. The items
selected will be included in the composite tolerance
[Apply]
When all the required tolerances have been defined for a feature, this button applies the
tolerances. The tolerance will appear in a flyout in the scene and be listed in the Inspect
section of the Inspection Tree. Once this button has been used, the [Close] button is
changed to [OK].
[Close]
This closes the Create GD&T dialog. If unsaved tolerances have been defined you will
first be prompted to Apply them.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
119
Using the Create GD&T annotation functions
The following procedures are described
General procedure to define and evaluate GD&T tolerances
To define and evaluate line and surface profiles
To define and evaluate GD&T tolerances on dimensions
To define a composite datum
To define a composite tolerance
General procedure to define and evaluate GD&T tolerances
The steps below give a general outline on how to use the GD&T functionality in Focus
Inspection.
1. In the Nominal task create the required nominal features by clicking on the Feature fitting
tool.
2. Click on the Create GD&T Annotation tool.
3. Define a Datum if required in the Datum tab.
4. Select the features to which the required tolerance will be assigned.
The same tolerance can be assigned to multiple features of the same type. These features
can be selected in tree or in the scene.
If you wish to assign the tolerance to just a single feature you can select the required
feature from the Selection drop down list (if not already pre-selected).
5. Click on the tabs to define all the various tolerances that are required for this feature.
6. Click [Apply] to define the tolerances.
7. Select another feature (or feature types) and repeat the procedure.
8. When all the feature tolerances are defined click [OK].
9. The flyouts indicating the tolerances will appear in the screen. Their position can be
changed by dragging it to an appropriate place.
10. Go to the Measured task and create the measured features to which the tolerances will
apply by clicking on the Measured feature fitting tool .
11. Make sure the statistics option is ON. These are required in the GD&T evaluation
process.
12. When the corresponding measured features have been created go the Compare task and
click on the Evaluate GD&T tool
To define and evaluate line and surface profiles
1. Create the required Line profile and Surface profiles using the Feature fitting tools in the
Nominal task.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
120
- Line profiles must be created on Sections
- Surface profiles must be created on soid or meshed surface.
2. Click on the Create GD&T Annotation tool.
3. Define a Datum if required in the Datum tab.
4. Select the feature for which the tolerance is to be defined from the Selection drop down
list.
The Form tab and the appropriate feature tab will be automatically selected.
5. Define the required tolerances (and datums if necessary).
6. Click [Apply] to define the tolerances.
7. Click [OK] when all the tolerances have been defined.
8. You do not need to create corresponding profiles in the Measured tab, but if you have
defined datum features then you will need to create the corresponding measured ones.
The Measured model must be a mesh or solid.
9. Go to the Compare tab and click on the Evaluate GD&T tool
To define and evaluate GD&T tolerances on dimensions
1. In the Nominal task create the required nominal features.
2. Define the required dimensions of the features by clicking on the appropriate tool from
the GDT Dimensions toolbar.
3. Click on the required feature points to define the dimensions of either a single feature or
the dimensions between features.
The dimensions flyout will appear in the scene and in the Inspection tree.
4. Click on the Create GD&T Annotation tool.
5. Click on the Dimensions tab.
6. Select the required dimension from the Selection drop down list.
7. Click on the appropriate sub tab and enter the upper and lower tolerance to be applied to
this dimension.
8. Click [Apply].
The dimension flyout will be adapted to show the defined tolerance.
9. In the Measured task detect the required measured features.
10. In the Compare task click on the Evaluate GD&T tool.
11. The Dimension flyouts will be adapted to show the results of the evaluation.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
121
To define a composite datum
1. In the Nominal task create the features that wish to use for the datums. These would
typically be planes.
2. Click on the Create GD&T Annotation tool.
3. Select one of the group of features from the Selection drop down list.
4. Enter the (number) to define the datum.
5. In the additional features field select those features that are to be included in the
composite datum.
6. If the group contains just two items choose whether you wish to use the separate or the
middle plane.
7. Click [Apply]
To define a composite tolerance
1. In the Nominal task create the features that wish to group together for the composite
tolerance. These must be of the same type, e.g. circles or round slots.
2. Click on the Create GD&T Annotation tool.
3. Select one of the group of features from the Selection drop down list.
4. Enter the (number) to define the datum.
5. Click on the Location or Orientation tab, then click on the Composite tab.
6. From the Additional features list at the bottom of the tab, select the features to be
included in the group.
7. In the upper row in the tolerance field define the tolerance for the group of features.
8. In the lower field define the individual tolerance that will be applied to each of the
features in the group.
9. Click [Apply].
Linear Perpendicular
Determines the true linear dimension between two points or between a point and defined direction
This tool determines and displays the true 3D (linear) distance between two points or
between the point and a line/axis or the origin of the axis system. The distance can be
determined between any two points on the measured model or two points on nominal
features.
Options are provided to allow you to select a point on that section that lies within a radius
of a user-selected point.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
122
The Linear Perpendicular property sheet
Towards
The options provided here allow you to choose how the second point will be defined. The
options provided are:
Second click
in this case the dimension will be determined between any two points defined by mouse
clicks. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled "Dim2pt".
Origin
in this case the linear dimension between a selected point and the origin of the coordinate
system will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled
"Dim2pt".
X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis,
in this case the perpendicular dimension between the selected point and the selected axis
will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled
"DimPerpendicular".
List of features
in this case the dimension will be determined between the selected point and the
perpendicular direction towards the selected feature. The dimension will appear in the
Inspection tree labelled "DimPerpendicular".
Find Extreme
Check this option ON to determine the dimension of a point that lies within a defined
radius around the selected point.
Note that this option is only effective if you are measuring the dimension on a section.
Search Radius
This value determines the radius of the circle around the user-selected point used to
define the dimension.
Target
This can be Closest Distance or Furthest Distance. This determines which point on the
search circle will be used to define the dimension. These options are illustrated in the
figure below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
123
To determine the true 3D distance between two points
1. Click on the Linear/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.
2. Select the option "Second Click" from the Towards menu.
3. If you are measuring a section, you can use the Find Extreme option described above.
4. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB select a point in the measured model or
on nominal/measured feature
A small yellow square appears.
5. Move the pointer and click with LMB to select a second location.
A second yellow square is created with a bi-directional arrow connecting the two yellow
squares with the labeled distance.
6. Drag the pointer to position the displayed dimension as required.
7. Click with LMB to fix the measurement labels.
The dimension remains on the scene and appears in the Inspection tree.
8. Click on a new point to create another dimension measurement.
To determine the true 3D distance between a point and a line
1. Click on the Linear/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.
2. Select the required option from the Towards menu. This can be one of the coordinate axes
or a feature.
3. If you are measuring a section, you can use the Find Extreme option described above.
4. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB select a point in the measured model or
on nominal/measured feature
A small yellow square appears.
5. Drag the pointer to position the displayed dimension as required.
6. Click with LMB to fix the measurement labels.
The dimension remains on the scene and appears in the Inspection tree.
7. Click on a new point to create another dimension measurement.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
124
Note: The Bi-directional arrow labeling the measurement would relocate and stick to their axes
when the scene view is tumbled.
Aligned Parallel
Creates dimensions that are aligned with an axis or a feature
This tool determines the distance between two points in a specified direction. The points
can be any two selected point in the measured model, or selected points on features in the
nominal model. The direction in which the dimension is measured can be selected and
includes the model and the screen axes as well as parallel to defined features.
Specific options are available for measuring the dimension of a section that allow you to
select a point that lies within a radius of the user-selected point.
The Aligned Parallel property sheet
Parallel To
The options in this drop down list allow to select the direction in which the dimension
will be measured. The following options are provided:
Automatic XYZ
this option enables you to interactively select the direction for the dimension to match the
screen axes.
X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis,
the dimension will be aligned with the X, Y or Z axis and the name of the axis will be
indicated on the flyout.
List of defined features
in these cases, the dimension will be determined in a direction that is parallel to the
selected feature.
Find Extreme
Check this option on to determine the dimension of a point that lies within a defined
radius around the selected point.
Note that this option is only effective if you are measuring the dimension on a section.
Search Radius
This value determines the radius of the circle around the user-selected point used to
define the dimension.
Target
This can be Closest Distance or Furthest Distance. This determines which point on the
search circle will be used to define the dimension. These options are illustrated in the
figure below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
125
To measure the distance between two points
1. Click on the Aligned/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.
2. Select the direction in which the dimension will be measured from the list available in the
Parallel To drop down list.
3. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB select a point in the measured model or
on nominal/measured feature
A small yellow square appears.
4. Move the pointer and click with LMB to select a second location.
A second yellow square is created with a bi-directional arrow connecting the two yellow
squares with the labeled distance.
5. Drag the pointer to position the distance measurement along the required axis.
If you have selected the option Automatic XYZ, you can adjust the dimension presented
as you drag.
6. Click with LMB to fix the measurement labels.
The dimension remains on the scene and appears in the Inspection tree.
7. Click on a new point to create another dimension.
Radius
Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs
This tool measures the radius of the circle and arc features that were created in the
Nominal or Measured task.
The method whereby the dimension is determined depends in the method used to select the
feature in the scene. When the lasso tool is used to select the feature then a Least Squares
Fit is used to fit a circle over all the points.
To determine the radius of a circular feature
1. Click on the Radius tool.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
126
2. Click on the center point of a circle. A line arrow passing through the center of the circle
with a single arrow on the circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.
3. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the line and click on the label to fix it.
To determine a radius using the Least Squares Fit
1. Click on the Radius tool.
2. In the Selection dialog click on the Lasso Select option.
3. Use the LMB to trace a lasso around the required points.
4. Click with the MMB to define the lasso.
5. Click again with the MMB to determine the circle that passes through the points.
A line arrow passing through the center of the circle with a single arrow on the
circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.
6. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the line and click on the label to fix it.
To measure the radius between two points
1. Click on the Radius tool.
2. In the Selection dialog click on the Pick Select option.
3. Use the LMB to click on the first point.
4. Use the LMB to select the second point.
A circle will appear that passes through the two points.
5. Adjust the position as required and click again with the LMB to define it.
6. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the line and click on the label to fix it.
Diameter
Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs
The Diameter tool measures the diameter of the circle and arc features that were created
on the Nominal or Measured models.
The method whereby the dimension is determined depends in the method used to select the
feature in the scene. When the lasso tool is used to select the feature then a Least Squares
Fit is used to fit a circle over all the points. When the Pick tool is used, the circle will be
created through the picked points.
To determine the diameter of a circular feature
1. Click on the Diameter tool.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
127
2. Click on the center point of a circle. A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and
connecting the circumference of the circle is created with a label showing the distance of
the diameter.
3. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the bi-directional arrow and click on
the label to fix it.
To determine a diameter using the Least Squares Fit
1. Click on the Diameter tool.
2. In the Selection dialog click on the Lasso Select option.
3. Use the LMB to trace a lasso around the required points.
4. Click with the MMB to define the lasso.
5. Click again with the MMB to determine the circle that passes through the points.
A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and connecting the circumference of the
circle is created with a label showing the distance of the diameter.
6. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the bi-directional arrow and click on
the label to fix it.
To measure the diameter between two points
1. Click on the Diameter tool.
2. In the Selection dialog click on the Pick Select option.
3. Use the LMB to click on the first point.
4. Use the LMB to select the second point.
A circle will appear that passes through the two points.
5. Adjust the position as required and click again with the LMB to define it.
6. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the bi-directional arrow and click on
the label to fix it.
Angle
Creates an angular dimension
This interactive tool is used to compute the angle between two lines created on the
measured object. The angle shown is always less than 90 deg. Lines are made longer if
necessary. Use this tool on planer points (intersecting lines/sections), otherwise end points
of the angle will not necessarily be on the line.
The Angle property sheet
Use LSQ Fit
This option works on sections. Instead of using the line connecting the first 2 points, a
least square fit line over all points in between these 2 points is used.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
128
To create an Angular Dimension
1. Click on the Angular tool.
If you are measuring a section, you can click on the arrow to open the property sheet and
use the Use LSQ Fit option described above.
2. Pick a point on the measured object.
A dynamic preview of the line used for dimension will appear with one end anchored at
the selected point and the other end at the current cursor location. Any movement of the
cursor will immediately update the line preview.
3. Pick second point, which will define the first line.
4. Pick a third point. This will generate a new line starting at the second point and reveal the
angle between the two lines.
5. Move the cursor at this position to update the dimension.
6. Click on a fourth point to define the angle between 2 objects (lines).
7. Click on the label to fix the position of text.
Gap Flush Caliper
Use of predefined calipers to determine Gap and Step dimensions in a repeatable manner along a rail
Gap - Step measurements are common practice in applications such as Sheet metal and
Aeronautics. They are used to describe the relation of adjacent parts.
In almost all most cases, this is still a manual operation, where people use plastic
‘calipers’ to check the gap, while a hand-sweep checks for the step. Each measurement is
made on multiple sections along a rail. A rail consists of multiple sections and contains the
statistics of these Gap – Step measurements. This tool allows the use of predefined calipers
to determine Gap and Step dimensions in a repeatable manner along a rail.
It schedules the Gap-Flush Dimension dialog that contains three tabs.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
129
Gap-Flush Dimension dialog
Dimension tab
Nominal
The number of nominal sections selected.
Measured
The number of measured sections selected.
Manual
This option allows the user to manually indicate the Gap – Step dimension points.
Least Square Fit
When this option is checked all points between the first two points are used to fit a line
Caliper
This allows the user to select a caliper from the list of available calipers
Use on Rail
When checked, the caliper will be used on all sections in a rail.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
130
Section healing tolerance
This tolerance value allows you to ignore small gaps in the sections when positioning the
caliper.
Gap Caliper Definition tab
Caliper
[Save]
This opens a Save As dialog and saved the current caliper to disc and renames the
‘current’ caliper with the file name (without extension).
[Load]
This opens a File Import dialog and allows you to select an existing caliper file. The
selected caliper file and the caliper is added to the drop down list.
Dimension
Each distance represents a dimension of the caliper as shown in the picture.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
131
Angles
Each angle represents an angle of the caliper as shown in the picture.
Flush Caliper Definition
Caliper
[Save]
This opens a Save As dialog and saves the current caliper to disc and renames the
‘current’ caliper with the file name (without extension).
[Load]
This opens a File Import dialog and allows you to select an existing caliper file. The
selected caliper file and the caliper is added to the drop down list.
Dimension
Each distance represents a dimension of the caliper as shown in the picture.
Angles
Each angle represents an angle of the caliper as shown in the picture.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
132
Reverse dimension sign
When this option is checked, it reverses the sign of the flush dimensions used during the
detection of the dimension.
To create a gap / flush using a caliper
1. Use the Create Section tool, in the FeatureFitting or the Compare toolbars to create
sections and add them to a rail.
2. Click on the Create Gap / Flush using Calipers tool.
3. Define the Caliper required by clicking on the Gap Caliper Definition tab or the Gap
Caliper Definition tab, or click [Load] to load a previously saved caliper.
4. Click [Save] to save the defined caliper.
5. Click on the Dimensions tab.
6. Click Calipers.
7. Check the 'Use on Rail' then select the rail that the rail on which the caliper will be
placed.
8. Click [Dimension].
The caliper is automatically positioned on the rail/section(s) and computes the distances defined
by the caliper.
When used on Gap or Step dimensions, the caliper information is stored and visible in the
Information dialog.
Modify Nominal
The Modify Nominal Ribbon Group contains commands to modify the nominal solid
models.
Align Normals
Aligns the Surface Normal orientations of all (selected) solids
The surface normals of the nominal model need to point in the same relative direction to
obtain valid comparison results (i.e. outside points have positive deviations and inside
points have negative deviations). The Align Normals tools unifies and aligns Normals of all
the faces of the selected Solid model to a marked face.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
133
The Align Normals property sheet
[Select Reference]
This button is used to mark a reference face in a solid to align other selected faces with.
Only one surface can serve as reference, this is always the last selected one.
[Select To Align]
This button is used to mark a limited set of faces for aligning with the reference surface.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter sets the tolerance distance between two surfaces that is used by
the search algorithm to find the neighboring surfaces.
Two-sided lighting
The Two-sided lighting checkbox controls the lighting of the model faces. If checked ON,
the model has both sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has their faces lit on
the positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the Face Normals. This
parameter is also available in the Property tree.
Note: When using Align Normals on a selected number of faces only, the faces are marked in red
upon selection. If Two-sided lighting is turned off, the dark faces show the red color in a deep red
close to black.
[Align]
This button activates the aligning process of the normals, based on the parameters set in
the property sheet.
To align normals
1. Click on the Align Normals tool.
2. The Select dialog appears. This allows you to choose whether you wish to select
individual faces with the Pick option, or select multiple faces within a lasso. Since only
one surface can be selected as the reference, select the Pick option in this dialog.
3. Click the small black triangle next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet. This
is necessary if you wish to adapt the parameters, or if you wish to align just a few surface.
4. Click with the LMB on the model to select the reference surface. This will be colored red.
5. If you just want to align all normals to this surface, simply click the MMB.
6. If you have the property sheet open click [Select Reference]. It will change to [Selected]
to indicate that the selection is made.
7. If you wish to align the normals of specific surfaces select them. This can be done using
the Pick option in the Select dialog with the key to add to the selection and the key to
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
134
subtract from selection. Alternatively you can to switch to the Lasso mode in the Select
dialog and create a lasso to enclose the required surfaces. The selected faces are colored
in red. The faces turn deep red on selection if the faces are black due to single side
lighting.
8. Click [Select to Align] to mark the selected faces as the faces to be aligned. The button
changes to [Selected] to indicate that the selection is made.
9. Set the Tolerance parameter if needed.
10. Click [Align] button to align all the marked faces with the Reference face.
Flip Normal
Changes the direction of the Normal of selected surfaces
The surface normals of the nominal model need to point in the same relative direction to
obtain valid comparison results (i.e. outside points get positive deviations and inside points
get negative deviations). The Flip Normal tool flips one or more faces of the selected model
to achieve the correct orientation.
The Flip Normal property sheet
[Flip Normals]
This button switches the direction of the normals of the selected faces.
Two-sided lighting
The Two-sided lighting checkbox controls the lighting of the model faces. If checked ON,
the model has both sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has their faces lit on
the positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the Face Normals. This
parameter is also available in the Property tree.
All Faces
The All Faces checkbox allows you to switch the normal direction of all faces on the
model.
To change the direction of normals of surfaces
1. Click the Flip Normal tool.
2. The Select dialog appears. This allows you to choose whether you wish to select
individual faces with the Pick option, or select multiple faces within a lasso.
3. Click on the arrow next to tool if you wish to open the property sheet. You need to open
the property sheet if you wish to adjust the lighting or to switch the direction of all the
faces.
4. Select the faces to switch using the selected tool. The faces will be colored red.
5. To select all the faces check the All Faces button in the property sheet.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
135
6. To switch the normals of the selected faces either click with the MMB on the model or
click [Flip Normals] in the property sheet.
Note: If no results appear after the flip normal command, check if the Two-sided lighting option is
enabled. In that case, both sides are lit and there is no visual difference.
Remove Duplicate Faces
Removes duplicated faces from the imported model
This tool removes duplicate faces in the imported Solid models. Duplicate faces can give
undesirable results during comparison.
The Remove Duplicate Face(s) property sheet
[Highlight Duplicate Face(s)]
This button highlights the duplicate face(s) in selected solid(s).
Duplicate Face(s)
This field shows the total number of duplicate faces highlighted after the Highlight
Duplicate Face(s) button is clicked. It shows the total number of duplicate faces removed
after Remove Duplicate Face(s) command is executed.
[Remove Duplicate Face(s)]
This button removes the highlighted face(s).
To remove Duplicate Face(s)
1. Click on a non-selected Model to see the bounding box.
2. Click on the Remove Duplicate Face(s) tool.
3. The Selection dialog appears in which you can choose whether to use the single Pick
option or the lasso option.
4. If you wish to work with the property sheet, click on the small arrow next to the Remove
Duplicate Face(s) tool.
5. Highlight the duplicated surfaces. This can be done either:
- by clicking [Highlight Duplicate Face(s) button] or
- by clicking with the MMB on the model.
6. The number of duplicated faces is shown in the Duplicate Face(s) field or in the status
bar.
7. (Optional) Using the Shift and Ctrl buttons, you can select more faces or deselect
unwanted face(s) highlighted in the previous step.
8. Remove the duplicated faces either by clicking [Remove Duplicate Face(s)] in the
property sheet, or by clicking with the MMB on the model.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
136
9. The number of removed faces is indicated in the Duplicate Face(s) field and in the status
bar.
Remove Faces
Removes selected faces from the model
This tool removes selected faces from an imported solid model.
The Remove Faces property sheet
[Remove Selected Face(s)]
This button removes the selected face(s) from one or more solids.
To remove a face
1. Click on the Remove Faces tool.
2. The Select dialog appears. Choose whether you wish to select individual faces with the
Pick option, or select faces within a lasso.
3. Click on the small arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet.
4. Select the face(s) from one or more solids, using the selected tool.
5. Click MMB on the model or click [Remove Selected Face(s)] in the property sheet to
remove the selected faces.
The faces will be removed from the model. This operation can be undone if necessary using the
Undo tool from the Quick Access Toolbar or the from the File -> Edit menu.
Hide Faces
Hides or shows the solid faces
This tool hides selected faces or shows all faces in solid.
The Hide Faces property sheet
[Hide Selected Face(s) ]
This button hides the selected faces from one or more solids.
[Show All Faces]
This button shows all the faces, hidden by Hide Selected Face(s) command from one or
more solids.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
137
To hide faces
1. Click on the Hide Face(s) tool.
2. The Select dialog appears. Choose whether you wish to select individual faces with the
Pick option, or select multiple faces within a lasso.
3. Click on the arrow next to tool if you wish to open the property sheet.
4. Select the face(s) from one or more solids using the selected tool.
5. Click MMB on the model or [Hide Selected Face(s)] in the property sheet to hide the
selected face(s).
To show all faces
1. Click on the Hide Face(s) tool.
2. Click on the arrow next to tool to open the property sheet.
3. Select one or more solids for which you want to show all the faces hidden by Hide
Face(s) command.
4. Click [Show All Faces] in the property sheet to show all the faces for selected solids.
Select Single Side
Creates a new solid from selected surfaces
This tool selects surfaces connected to a reference surface within a given tolerance and
extracts them into a new separate solid. The separated solid can be used as a stand-alone
solid to compare to the measured models.
The Select Single Side property sheet
New Name
Enter a name for the extracted solid.
Angle (degrees)
This parameter specifies the angle deviation tolerance of the surfaces being searched. Any
surface whose slope is equal or below than the tolerance angle value with respect to the
Reference surface can be marked and isolated.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter specifies the tolerance distance between adjacent or neighboring
surfaces while the function is searching for surfaces.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
138
[Run]
The run button initiates the search process according to the Angle and Tolerance values
set in the property sheet.
[Separate Solid(s)]
The Separate Solid(s) button isolates the surfaces detected by the Run process into a new
independent solid. The newly extracted Solid will have the name as defined in the “New
Name” edit box of the property sheet. The original solid’s name remains unchanged.
To isolate a single side solid
1. Click the “Select Single Side” tool.
2. The Select dialog appears. This allows you to choose whether you wish to select
individual faces with the Pick option, or select multiple faces within a lasso. Since only
one surface can be taken as the reference, then the Pick option is the easiest to use.
3. Click on the arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet. You need to
open the property sheet if you wish to adjust the command parameters.
4. Select the reference face in the Solid using the selected tool. The selected surfaces are
highlighted in red.
5. Adjust the Angle and Tolerance values if necessary.
6. Search for the surfaces that match the parameters either by clicking the MMB or [Run] in
the property sheet.
The number of surfaces that match the criteria is indicated in the status bar at the bottom
of the window.
7. Enter the name of the new solid.
8. Create the new solid either by clicking MMB or [Separate solids] in the property sheet.
A new solid will appear in the Inspection tree with the specified name.
Merge Solids
Merges selected solids into one
This tool merges selected solids into one solid. This tool is only available if more than one
solid is selected.
To merge selected solids
1. Select more than one solid. Use the <Ctrl> key to make multiple selection in the
inspection tree.
2. Click the Merge Selected Solids tool.
The selected solids will be merged into one solid with -Merged as suffix.
Mirror Objects
Mirrors objects around a plane
The Mirror Objects command mirrors selected objects across a specified plane.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
139
Mirror Objects Property Sheet
Plane
This field defines the mirroring plane of the current coordinate system. This has three
predefined planes: XY, YZ and XZ.
Position
The Position field specifies the position of the plane (rendered as translucent gray circular
disc) on the normal axis, e.g. when the XY plane is selected, the Position defines the
plane’s position on the Z-axis.
The current position is indicated in the bottom right hand corner of the screen to aid you
find the required position.
Keep Original
If this option is checked ON, a copy is made when the original object is mirrored. If it is
not checked the object is simply moved to new position on the other side of the mirror
plane.
[Mirror]
This starts the mirror process.
To mirror an object
1. Select a the object to be mirrored on the scene or the Inspection tree.
2. Click the Mirror Objects tool.
The current default plane will appear in the scene, with a rectangular handle to
manipulate it.
Click on the View all tool if necessary if the plane is not visible.
3. Click on the arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet to adjust the
parameters.
4. Drag the rectangular handle to adjust the position of the plane, or enter the required value
in the Position field.
The current position is indicated in the bottom right hand corner of the screen to aid you
find the required position.
5. Either click the MMB in the scene or click [Mirror] in the property sheet to mirror the
object.
A mirrored version of the solid will appear in the scene and in the Nominal inspection Tree.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
140
Handheld Measurement task
The Handheld Measurement task provides all the tools required for making a Handheld scan
measurement.
Details about the scanners and localizers supported and their configuration are contained in the
Handheld API manual.
When first selected, Focus attempts to connect to the Localizer (Arm) and the Scanner to be used.
If no Localizer or Scanner have yet been configured, the Connection dialog will appear in which
you can select the correct hardware.
If a Localizer and a Scanner have been specified, Focus attempts to connect to them. This will be
indicated by the message "Connecting" appearing in the Status bar. If all is well then the message
will switch to "Ready" and you can proceed with the Handheld Measurement.
If there is a problem, this will be indicated in the Message area
Click on [Details] to find out more about the cause of the problem.
Click on [Retry] when the problem has been corrected.
Previews
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
141
The Previews Ribbon Group tools present panels in which the current characteristics of the
scan are presented.
Scanner Image
Displays the Scanner Image panel
This tool toggles the presence of the Scanner Image panel in which a 2D view of the scan
line and the intensity level is presented.
This provides you with a view of the scan line and the intensity level thus enabling you to judge
their quality.
When performing a hand held scan, you should try to ensure that the laser line and the laser spot
stay close together as possible. This ensures that the optimum number of points are captured.
The Intensity level should always be as high as possible while remaining green.
Digital Readout
Displays the Digital Readout panel
This tool toggles the presence of the Digital Readout panel in which messages and the
coordinates of the centre of the Field of View of the scanner are displayed.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
142
The X,Y and Z coordinates are shown in the currently selected coordinate system that has been
selected using the Coordinate System tool from the Measure ERROR: Variable (Ribbon-Group)
is undefined..
The message area displays the current measurement status, indicating whether some adjustment
needs to be made or whether the system is "OK" to make the measurement.
Measure
The Measure Ribbon Group contains all the tools required to make a Handheld scan
measurement.
Prescan
Sets the scene display area to match the scanning region
This tool enables you to make some preliminary scan movements that will define the
extremities of the scanning region and then to set the view shown in the scene to match the
scanning region.
When the Handheld Measurement task is first scheduled, the view shown by the scene camera, is
usually centered on the origin of the Localizer arm. This is invariably some distance from the
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
143
space containing the part to be scanned. This tool ensures that the space shown in the display
coincides with that occupied by the scanned part.
To set the scene display
1. Click on the Prescan tool.
2. Holding the scanner at the required angle, move the scanner over the part making sure to
include all extremities and so encompass the complete bounding box around the object.
3. Press the main trigger button.
The displayed view will be adapted to set the complete part in the centre of the screen.
Handheld Scan
Enables handheld measurements
This tool starts the scanning process of the part. When the scanning process is completed it
initializes the generation of a mesh.
To make a handheld scan measurement
1. Click on the Handheld Scan tool.
2. You may receive warning bleeps and messages if the Localizer is not in a suitable
position.
3. Position the scanner so that it is at the correct height and angle to scan the object.
Try to ensure that the dot and the laser line are as close together as possible.
4. Press the trigger button to start the scan and press it again to stop the first scan pass.
5. Repeat this for as many passes over the object as are required.
6. To adjust the view of the scanned object, press and hold the trigger button. Rotate and
zoom the image as required, then press the trigger button again to set the new view.
7. Press the Stop / End button to halt the scanning processing.
The processing of each of the point clouds created will be initiated. The result will be a single
mesh object representing a fused combination of all the point clouds.
(This automatic processing of the point clouds is set using the Processing Settings tool.)
Tactile Measurement
Schedules the Tactile Measurement module
This tool schedules the Tactile Measurement module in which you can make tactile
measurements to combine with the current handheld scanned measurements. The Tactile
Measurement module includes all the tools required to make measurements and define
features.
The different parts of the interface are shown below.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
144
Features Ribbon Band
The Features Ribbon Band contains all the tools for measuring, constructing and managing
features.
Focus Return
The Return button returns you to the Focus Handheld Measurement task. All the measurements
and constructions defined in the Tactile Measurement module will be saved and incorporated into
the current Inspection document.
Teach
Teach ERROR: Variable (Ribbon-Group) is undefined.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
145
The Teach Ribbon Group contains a set of tools to measure features.
Point
Creates a measured point feature
This tool enables you to create a measured point feature that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The Measure POINT dialog
Measurement counter
The number of points required to measure the chosen feature is displayed in the green
counter. Each time a point is measured this number decreases. A default number of points
is displayed when the dialog is first scheduled. The number of points required can be
adjusted using the buttons described below.
By 5
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 5.
By 1
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 1.
[Default]
Resets the number of required points to the default value.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
146
[Key in]
When this button is clicked you can enter the number of points you wish to use from the
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Shows in red, the number of points already measured for the creation of the feature.
The [Delete] button enable you to delete a collected point.
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known
center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and
the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors
must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the
shape of a part, rather than dimensions.
Compensation Direction
This determines the direction of the vector used for the probe compensation.
The following options are available:
Auto Axis Direction
the direction is determined from the nearest part reference frame axis and one of the six
standard axes (±X,±Y,± Z).
Touch Vector Dir (direction)
the direction is calculated from the approach vector taken by the probe during the
measurement of the part surface. This type of probe compensation can have larger
measurement cosine errors since the approach vector is not guaranteed to be normal to the
part surface.
Micro Plane
the direction is normal to a micro plane measured on the part. When this option is
selected, the software automatically switches to the measurement of three points that will
determine the micro plane close to the feature. Once the micro plane has been
determined, the measurement of the required feature can be made. -
Polar XY, Polar YZ, or Polar ZX
the direction is defined by projecting a line from the part reference frame origin into the
specified plane
Polar 3D
the direction corresponds to a temporary line from the part reference frame origin to the
measured point.
X, Y or Z axis of the part reference frame.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
147
Projection
A measured point feature may be placed at the exact X, Y, Z position where it was
measured, or it may be mathematically moved to a standard working plane or axis termed
the "projection".
The following options are available:
None
no projection is performed; the measured point is placed at the X, Y, Z position where it
was measured.
An existing plane
this must be dragged from the Feature Database and dropped onto the list.
XY, YZ, ZX Plane
the planes formed by the X, Y and Z axes of the current part reference frame.
X, Y Z axis
one of the axes of the current part reference frame.
To create a measured Point feature
It is recommended that you use the default settings for measuring a point feature.
1. Enter a name for the feature if you wish to use a name other than the default name
presented.
Then click the [Update] button.
2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use an average to determine the
point feature.
3. Choose whether you wish to apply Probe Compensation and if so choose the
Compensation Direction.
4. Select a Projection plane if you wish to project the measured point onto a plane. If you
select "None" the point will be located at the exact coordinates where it was measured.
5. Place the probe in the required position and take the required number of tactile
measurements.
The newly measured point appears in the Feature Database.
Line
Creates a measured line feature
This tool enables you to create measured line features that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The measurement of a line feature requires the specification of a plane on to which the
measured points can be projected in order to determine the line.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
148
The Measure LINE dialog
Measurement counter
The number of points required to measure the chosen feature is displayed in the green
counter. Each time a point is measured this number decreases. A default number of points
is displayed when the dialog is first scheduled. The number of points required can be
adjusted using the buttons described below.
By 5
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 5.
By 1
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 1.
[Default]
Resets the number of required points to the default value.
[Key in]
When this button is clicked you can enter the number of points you wish to use from the
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Shows in red, the number of points already measured for the creation of the feature.
The [Delete] button enable you to delete a collected point.
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
149
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known
center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and
the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors
must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the
shape of a part, rather than dimensions.
Orientation Plane/Axis
Any measured feature that has 2D geometry requires the specification of an Orientation
Plane/Axis and selection of the 2D Feature Location. Both options must be enabled and
specified together.
The Orientation Plane/Axis (commonly referred to as the "working plane") is the plane in
which the feature lies. It is used to determine both the probe compensation vector and
projection of the measured points to calculate the feature geometry.
The following options are available:
An existing plane
this must be dragged from the Feature Database and dropped onto the list.
Auto
one of the XY, YZ, or ZX planes of current part reference frame. The Tactile
Measurement module automatically selects the closest orthogonal plane as determined
from the measurement points describing the feature.
XY, YZ, ZX
one of the current part reference planes.
Bestfit Plane
the Tactile Measurement module will create a bestfit plane to the measurement points.
2D Feature Location
The 2D Feature Location option determine the location of the orientation plane, selected
from the dropdown list shown above, relative to the active reference frame. The choice
establishes which 3rd axis point will be used to set the feature location.
Projection
projects the measured feature to the 3rd axis origin point on the selected orientation plane.
Average Height
calculates the mathematical average of the 3rd axis locations of the individual measured
points.
Measurement Mode
Trigger
the Tactile Measurement module will collect a point each time a trigger is detected.
Scan
this method is not supported in the Tactile Measurement module.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
150
Relative Measurement
When this option is checked then the orientation plane used to determine the feature
geometry will be determined by sampling a plane aound the feature to be measured. The
software automatically switches to the Measure Plane tool. When the required number of
points to determine the plane have been measured you are returned to the measure the
required feature.
To create a measured Line feature
1. Enter a name for the feature if you wish to use a name other than the default name
presented.
Then click the [Update] button.
2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use more than the minimum
suggested.
3. It is recommended that you use the Relative Measurement function.
Check the option ON.
You will be switched to the Measure Plane functionality.
Measure at least three point to determine the local relative plane.
4. Set any other parameters required.
5. Place the probe in the required position and take the required number of tactile
measurements.
The newly measured line will appear in the Feature Database.
Circle
Creates a measured circle feature
This tool enables you to create measured circle features that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The measurement of a circle feature requires the specification of a plane on to which the
measured points can be projected in order to determine the circle.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
151
The Measure CIRCLE dialog
Measurement counter
The number of points required to measure the chosen feature is displayed in the green
counter. Each time a point is measured this number decreases. A default number of points
is displayed when the dialog is first scheduled. The number of points required can be
adjusted using the buttons described below.
By 5
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 5.
By 1
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 1.
[Default]
Resets the number of required points to the default value.
[Key in]
When this button is clicked you can enter the number of points you wish to use from the
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Shows in red, the number of points already measured for the creation of the feature.
The [Delete] button enable you to delete a collected point.
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
152
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known
center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and
the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors
must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the
shape of a part, rather than dimensions.
Orientation Plane/Axis
Any measured feature that has 2D geometry requires the specification of an Orientation
Plane/Axis and selection of the 2D Feature Location. Both options must be enabled and
specified together.
The Orientation Plane/Axis (commonly referred to as the "working plane") is the plane in
which the feature lies. It is used to determine both the probe compensation vector and
projection of the measured points to calculate the feature geometry.
The following options are available:
An existing plane
this must be dragged from the Feature Database and dropped onto the list.
Auto
one of the XY, YZ, or ZX planes of current part reference frame. The Tactile
Measurement module automatically selects the closest orthogonal plane as determined
from the measurement points describing the feature.
XY, YZ, ZX
one of the current part reference planes.
Bestfit Plane
the Tactile Measurement module will create a bestfit plane to the measurement points.
Range
When the Full Circle option is checked ON, a complete circle will be measured. When
this option is checked OFF, an arc will be measured.
2D Feature Location
The 2D Feature Location option determine the location of the orientation plane, selected
from the dropdown list shown above, relative to the active reference frame. The choice
establishes which 3rd axis point will be used to set the feature location.
Projection
projects the measured feature to the 3rd axis origin point on the selected orientation plane.
Average Height
calculates the mathematical average of the 3rd axis locations of the individual measured
points.
Measurement Mode
Trigger
the Tactile Measurement module will collect a point each time a trigger is detected.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
153
Scan
this method is not supported in the Tactile Measurement module.
Guided Plane
A guided plane allows you to restrict the
measurement of points to a specific zone that will
aid in determining the feature being measured.
The guided plane is defined relative to the selected
Orientation Plane / Axis. This may NOT be Auto
or Bestfit Plane.
Offset
the distance between the guiding plane and the Orientation Plane/Axis.
Trigger zone
the zone around the guiding plane in which points will be automatically collected. The
trigger zone is centered around the plane. The current point will be collected if it lies
within the trigger zone and when the previous point was on the opposite side of the
guiding plane.
Advanced Options
This enables you to choose the algorithm to use for feature fitting. The following options
are available:
Least Squares : fits a feature that minimizes the average squared error of all the data
points.
Max Inscribed : fits the biggest feature that fits inside all the data points.
Min Circumscribed : fits the smallest feature that fits inside all the data points.
Min/Max : fits a feature halfway between two features, with a common center, that have a
minimum distance between them to enclose all data points. This algorithm minimizes the
maximum error. Note that the two features are not the same as those produced using Max
Inscribed and Min Circumscribed.
Relative Measurement
When this option is checked then the orientation plane used to determine the feature
geometry will be determined by sampling a plane aound the feature to be measured. The
software automatically switches to the Measure Plane tool. When the required number of
points to determine the plane have been measured you are returned to the measure the
required feature.
To create a measured Circle feature
1. Enter a name for the feature if you wish to use a name other than the default name
presented.
Then click the [Update] button.
2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use more than the minimum
suggested.
3. It is recommended that you use the Relative Measurement function.
Check the option ON.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
154
You will be switched to the Measure Plane functionality.
Measure at least three point to determine the local relative plane.
4. Set any other parameters required.
5. Place the probe in the required position and take the required number of tactile
measurements.
The newly measured circle will appear in the Feature Database.
Plane
Creates a measured plane feature
This tool enables you to create measured plane features that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The Measure PLANE dialog
Measurement counter
The number of points required to measure the chosen feature is displayed in the green
counter. Each time a point is measured this number decreases. A default number of points
is displayed when the dialog is first scheduled. The number of points required can be
adjusted using the buttons described below.
By 5
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 5.
By 1
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 1.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
155
[Default]
Resets the number of required points to the default value.
[Key in]
When this button is clicked you can enter the number of points you wish to use from the
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Shows in red, the number of points already measured for the creation of the feature.
The [Delete] button enable you to delete a collected point.
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known
center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and
the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors
must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the
shape of a part, rather than dimensions.
Measurement Mode
Trigger
the Tactile Measurement module will collect a point each time a trigger is detected.
Scan
this method is not supported in the Tactile Measurement module.
To create a measured Plane feature
1. Enter a name for the feature if you wish to use a name other than the default name
presented.
Then click the [Update] button.
2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use more than the proposed
minimum.
3. Choose whether you wish to apply Probe Compensation.
4. Place the probe in the required position and take the required number of tactile
measurements.
The newly measured plane appears in the Feature Database.
Cylinder
Creates a measured cylinder feature
This tool enables you to create measured cylinder features that will be added to the
Feature Database.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
156
The Measure CYLNDR dialog
Measurement counter
The number of points required to measure the chosen feature is displayed in the green
counter. Each time a point is measured this number decreases. A default number of points
is displayed when the dialog is first scheduled. The number of points required can be
adjusted using the buttons described below.
By 5
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 5.
By 1
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 1.
[Default]
Resets the number of required points to the default value.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
157
[Key in]
When this button is clicked you can enter the number of points you wish to use from the
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Shows in red, the number of points already measured for the creation of the feature.
The [Delete] button enable you to delete a collected point.
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known
center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and
the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors
must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the
shape of a part, rather than dimensions.
Measurement Mode
Trigger
the Tactile Measurement module will collect a point each time a trigger is detected.
Scan
this method is not supported in the Tactile Measurement module.
This enables you to choose the algorithm to use for feature fitting. The following options
are available:
Least Squares : fits a feature that minimizes the average squared error of all the data
points.
Max Inscribed : fits the biggest feature that fits inside all the data points.
Min Circumscribed : fits the smallest feature that fits inside all the data points.
Min/Max : fits a feature halfway between two features, with a common center, that have a
minimum distance between them to enclose all data points. This algorithm minimizes the
maximum error. Note that the two features are not the same as those produced using Max
Inscribed and Min Circumscribed.
To create a measured Cylinder feature
1. Enter a name for the feature if you wish to use a name other than the default name
presented.
Then click the [Update] button.
2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use more than the proposed
minimum.
3. Choose whether you wish to apply Probe Compensation.
4. Click on Advanced options if you need to modify the fitting algorithm.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
158
5. Place the probe in the required position and take the required number of tactile
measurements.
The newly measured cylinder appears in the Feature Database.
Cone
Creates a measured cone feature
This tool enables you to create measured cone features that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The Measure CONE dialog
Measurement counter
The number of points required to measure the chosen feature is displayed in the green
counter. Each time a point is measured this number decreases. A default number of points
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
159
is displayed when the dialog is first scheduled. The number of points required can be
adjusted using the buttons described below.
By 5
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 5.
By 1
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 1.
[Default]
Resets the number of required points to the default value.
[Key in]
When this button is clicked you can enter the number of points you wish to use from the
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Shows in red, the number of points already measured for the creation of the feature.
The [Delete] button enable you to delete a collected point.
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known
center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and
the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors
must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the
shape of a part, rather than dimensions.
Measurement Mode
Trigger
the Tactile Measurement module will collect a point each time a trigger is detected.
Scan
this method is not supported in the Tactile Measurement module.
This enables you to choose the algorithm to use for feature fitting. The following options
are available:
Least Squares : fits a feature that minimizes the average squared error of all the data
points.
Max Inscribed : fits the biggest feature that fits inside all the data points.
Min Circumscribed : fits the smallest feature that fits inside all the data points.
Min/Max : fits a feature halfway between two features, with a common center, that have a
minimum distance between them to enclose all data points. This algorithm minimizes the
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
160
maximum error. Note that the two features are not the same as those produced using Max
Inscribed and Min Circumscribed.
To create a measured Cone feature
1. Enter a name for the feature if you wish to use a name other than the default name
presented.
Then click the [Update] button.
2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use more than the proposed
minimum.
3. Choose whether you wish to apply Probe Compensation.
4. Click on Advanced options if you need to modify the fitting algorithm.
5. Place the probe in the required position and take the required number of tactile
measurements.
The newly measured Cone appears in the Feature database
Sphere
Creates a measured sphere feature
This tool enables you to create measured sphere features that will be added to the Feature
Database.
The Measure SPHERE dialog
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
161
Measurement counter
The number of points required to measure the chosen feature is displayed in the green
counter. Each time a point is measured this number decreases. A default number of points
is displayed when the dialog is first scheduled. The number of points required can be
adjusted using the buttons described below.
By 5
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 5.
By 1
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 1.
[Default]
Resets the number of required points to the default value.
[Key in]
When this button is clicked you can enter the number of points you wish to use from the
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Shows in red, the number of points already measured for the creation of the feature.
The [Delete] button enable you to delete a collected point.
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known
center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and
the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors
must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the
shape of a part, rather than dimensions.
Measurement Mode
Trigger
the Tactile Measurement module will collect a point each time a trigger is detected.
Scan
this method is not supported in the Tactile Measurement module.
This enables you to choose the algorithm to use for feature fitting. The following options
are available:
Least Squares : fits a feature that minimizes the average squared error of all the data
points.
Max Inscribed : fits the biggest feature that fits inside all the data points.
Min Circumscribed : fits the smallest feature that fits inside all the data points.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
162
Min/Max : fits a feature halfway between two features, with a common center, that have a
minimum distance between them to enclose all data points. This algorithm minimizes the
maximum error. Note that the two features are not the same as those produced using Max
Inscribed and Min Circumscribed.
To create a measured Sphere feature
1. Enter a name for the feature if you wish to use a name other than the default name
presented.
Then click the [Update] button.
2. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use more than the proposed
minimum.
3. Choose whether you wish to apply Probe Compensation.
4. Click on Advanced options if you need to modify the fitting algorithm.
5. Place the probe in the required position and take the required number of tactile
measurements.
The newly measured Sphere appears in the Feature database
Slot
Creates a measured square or round slot feature
This tool enables you to create measured square or round slot features that will be added
to the Feature database.
The type of slot is selected by clicking on the arrow below the tool button.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
163
The Measure SQSLT and RNDSLT dialog
Measurement counter
The number of points required to measure the chosen feature is displayed in the green
counter. Each time a point is measured this number decreases. A default number of points
is displayed when the dialog is first scheduled. The number of points required can be
adjusted using the buttons described below.
By 5
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 5.
By 1
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 1.
[Default]
Resets the number of required points to the default value.
[Key in]
When this button is clicked you can enter the number of points you wish to use from the
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Shows in red, the number of points already measured for the creation of the feature.
The [Delete] button enable you to delete a collected point.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
164
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known
center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and
the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors
must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the
shape of a part, rather than dimensions.
Orientation Plane/Axis
Any measured feature that has 2D geometry requires the specification of an Orientation
Plane/Axis and selection of the 2D Feature Location. Both options must be enabled and
specified together.
The Orientation Plane/Axis (commonly referred to as the "working plane") is the plane in
which the feature lies. It is used to determine both the probe compensation vector and
projection of the measured points to calculate the feature geometry.
The following options are available:
An existing plane
this must be dragged from the Feature Database and dropped onto the list.
Auto
one of the XY, YZ, or ZX planes of current part reference frame. The Tactile
Measurement module automatically selects the closest orthogonal plane as determined
from the measurement points describing the feature.
XY, YZ, ZX
one of the current part reference planes.
Bestfit Plane
the Tactile Measurement module will create a bestfit plane to the measurement points.
2D Feature Location
The 2D Feature Location option determine the location of the orientation plane, selected
from the dropdown list shown above, relative to the active reference frame. The choice
establishes which 3rd axis point will be used to set the feature location.
Projection
projects the measured feature to the 3rd axis origin point on the selected orientation plane.
Average Height
calculates the mathematical average of the 3rd axis locations of the individual measured
points.
Measurement Mode
Trigger
the Tactile Measurement module will collect a point each time a trigger is detected.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
165
Scan
this method is not supported in the Tactile Measurement module.
Relative Measurement
When this option is checked then the orientation plane used to determine the feature
geometry will be determined by sampling a plane aound the feature to be measured. The
software automatically switches to the Measure Plane tool. When the required number of
points to determine the plane have been measured you are returned to the measure the
required feature.
To create a measured slot feature
1. Enter a name for the feature if you wish to use a name other than the default name
presented.
Then click the [Update] button.
1. Specify how many points to be measured, if you wish to use more than the minimum
suggested.
2. It is recommended that you use the Relative Measurement function.
Check the option ON.
You will be switched to the Measure Plane functionality.
Measure at least three point to determine the local relative plane.
3. Set any other parameters required.
4. Place the probe in the required position and take the required number of tactile
measurements.
The newly measured slot will appear in the Feature Database.
Auto Feature
The Auto Feature tools allow you to measure features without having to specify the type of
feature beforehand : the Tactile Measurement module automatically determines the feature type.
2D Auto Feature
Automatically determines the type of 2D feature that fits measured points
This tool automatically determines the type of 2D feature (line, circle) that fits your
measured points, and creates a feature of this type. By limiting itself to 2D features only,
the Tactile Measurement module provides an Auto End capability to Auto Feature 2D -
when a new point cannot fit the currently-determined 2D feature, the Tactile Measurement
module creates that feature and begins new 2D feature detection starting with the new
point.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
166
The Measure Unknown dialog
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. This will be filled in by the Tactile Measurement
module as it determines the type of feature that is being measured.
If you enter your own name click the [Update] button to accept it.
Type
Set the Auto Type check box ON, to automatically determine the feature.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known
center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and
the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors
must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the
shape of a part, rather than dimensions.
Orientation Plane/Axis
Any measured feature that has 2D geometry requires the specification of an Orientation
Plane/Axis and selection of the 2D Feature Location. Both options must be enabled and
specified together.
The Orientation Plane/Axis (commonly referred to as the "working plane") is the plane in
which the feature lies. It is used to determine both the probe compensation vector and
projection of the measured points to calculate the feature geometry.
The following options are available:
An existing plane
this must be dragged from the Feature Database and dropped onto the list.
Auto
one of the XY, YZ, or ZX planes of current part reference frame. The Tactile
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
167
Measurement module automatically selects the closest orthogonal plane as determined
from the measurement points describing the feature.
XY, YZ, ZX
one of the current part reference planes.
Bestfit Plane
the Tactile Measurement module will create a bestfit plane to the measurement points.
2D Feature Location
The 2D Feature Location option determine the location of the orientation plane, selected
from the dropdown list shown above, relative to the active reference frame. The choice
establishes which 3rd axis point will be used to set the feature location.
Projection
projects the measured feature to the 3rd axis origin point on the selected orientation plane.
Average Height
calculates the mathematical average of the 3rd axis locations of the individual measured
points.
Collection Points
The number of points that have already been measured in order to measure the feature.
[Delete point]
Deletes the last point that was measured.
[End Collection]
Ends the current collection of measured points.
To measure an automatically determined feature type
1. Click on the 2D Auto Feature tool.
2. Set the Auto Type option ON.
3. Define the Probe Compensation, Orientation Plane/Axis and 2D Feature Location
parameters as required.
4. Start measuring points.
3D Auto Feature
Automatically determines the type of 3D feature that fits measured points
This tool automatically determines the type of 3D feature (cylinder, cone) that fits your
measured points, and creates a feature of this type. By limiting itself to 3D features only,
the Tactile Measurement module provides an Auto End capability. When a new point
cannot fit the currently-determined feature, the Tactile Measurement module creates that
feature and begins new feature detection starting with the new point.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
168
The Measure Unknown dialog
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. This will be filled in by the Tactile Measurement
module as it determines the type of feature that is being measured.
If you enter your own name click the [Update] button to accept it.
Type
Set the Auto Type check box ON, to automatically determine the feature.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known
center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and
the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors
must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the
shape of a part, rather than dimensions.
Orientation Plane/Axis
Any measured feature that has 2D geometry requires the specification of an Orientation
Plane/Axis and selection of the 2D Feature Location. Both options must be enabled and
specified together.
The Orientation Plane/Axis (commonly referred to as the "working plane") is the plane in
which the feature lies. It is used to determine both the probe compensation vector and
projection of the measured points to calculate the feature geometry.
The following options are available:
An existing plane
this must be dragged from the Feature Database and dropped onto the list.
Auto
one of the XY, YZ, or ZX planes of current part reference frame. The Tactile
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
169
Measurement module automatically selects the closest orthogonal plane as determined
from the measurement points describing the feature.
XY, YZ, ZX
one of the current part reference planes.
Bestfit Plane
the Tactile Measurement module will create a bestfit plane to the measurement points.
2D Feature Location
The 2D Feature Location option determine the location of the orientation plane, selected
from the dropdown list shown above, relative to the active reference frame. The choice
establishes which 3rd axis point will be used to set the feature location.
Projection
projects the measured feature to the 3rd axis origin point on the selected orientation plane.
Average Height
calculates the mathematical average of the 3rd axis locations of the individual measured
points.
Collection Points
The number of points that have already been measured in order to measure the feature.
[Delete point]
Deletes the last point that was measured.
[End Collection]
Ends the current collection of measured points.
To measure an automatically determined feature type
1. Click on the 3D Auto Feature tool.
2. Set the Auto Type option ON.
3. Define the Probe Compensation, Orientation Plane/Axis and 2D Feature Location
parameters as required.
4. Start measuring points.
Advanced
The Advanced toolbar provides tool that allows you to make specific measurement types.
Single Point Circle
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
170
Creates a circle feature from a single point measurement
This tool enables you to detect a circle feature by measuring a single point that is at the
centre of the circle. The circle is created at the intersection of a reference plane and the
probe tip.
The circle measured has a smaller diameter than the probe tip. The probe tip must have a
non-zero diameter and a reference plane is necessary for the calculation.
The Single Point Circle dialog
Measurement counter
The number of points required to measure the chosen feature is displayed in the green
counter. Each time a point is measured this number decreases. A default number of points
is displayed when the dialog is first scheduled. The number of points required can be
adjusted using the buttons described below.
By 5
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 5.
By 1
Increases or decreases the number of required points by 1.
[Default]
Resets the number of required points to the default value.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
171
[Key in]
When this button is clicked you can enter the number of points you wish to use from the
keyboard.
Pts Collected
Shows in red, the number of points already measured for the creation of the feature.
The [Delete] button enable you to delete a collected point.
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Reference Plane
This is the plane in which the circle lies and which is used to calculate the circle. The
following options are available:
An existing measured plane which can be selected in the display or dragged from the
Feature Database into the drop down list.
One of the reference planes (XY, YZ, XZ)
A Sampling plane that will be determined by the measurement of three points.
When this option is selected the software automatically switches to the Measurement
Plane function.
To create a circle from a single point measurement
1. Click on the Single Point Circle tool.
2. Enter a name for the feature if you wish to use a name other than the default name
presented.
Then click the [Update] button.
3. It is recommended that you use the Sampling Plane option to determine the reference
plane.
You will be switched to the Measure Plane functionality.
Measure at least three point to determine the local sampling plane.
4. Place the probe in the required position and measure the point.
Construct Feature
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
172
The Construct Feature Ribbon Group provides the following commands to construct new features
from existing measured or previously constructed features:
Point
Constructs a new Point feature based on existing features
This tool enables you to construct new point features that are located at intersections and
specified distances from other features, or in defined positions.
The Construct POINT dialog
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
173
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Construct Methods
A selection of methods to construct the feature are provided, each of which are described
below. The parameter selection fields will adapt to the match the selected construction
method.
There are several means whereby you can specify the features to be used for the
construction method:
Clicking on the required feature in the display.
Dragging the required feature from the Feature Database into the input field.
By clicking on the ellipsis button .
This schedules a dialog in which you can select the required reference axis or plane.
Midpoint of two points
This method creates a new Point at the midpoint between two selected Point features. The
Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere
feature.
Intersection of Two Lines
This method constructs a point at the intersection of two selected Line features. The Line
feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one
of the reference frame axes.
If the selected lines are coplanar, the intersection point is constructed at the intersection of
the two lines (which may require that they be extended). If the lines are not coplanar, the
point is constructed at the midpoint of the single line that joins the selected line features
and which is perpendicular to both.
Intersection of Line and Plane
This method constructs a point at the intersection of selected Line and Plane features. The
Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or
one of the reference frame axes.
The plane can be either a measured plane or one of the three working planes coincident
with the current origin. The point feature is constructed where the extended line
intersects the plane.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
174
Projection Point onto Line
This method constructs a new Point feature by projecting an existing Point onto a Line.
The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone
feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Projection Point onto Plane
This method constructs a new point feature by projecting an existing Point onto a Plane.
The plane can be either a measured plane or one of the three working planes coincident
with the current origin.
Intersection of a Line and a Circle
This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Circle. If
necessary the line will be extended to intersect with the circle. If two intersections occur,
the user chooses which point to use. If the line and circle do not intersect, the point will
be constructed at the location where the line is closest to the circle.
Intersection of Two Circles
This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a two circles. These
circles must be co-planar and intersect. If two intersections occur, the user chooses which
point to use.
Offset Point
This method constructs a new Point feature that is offset by a specified distance from an
existing Point feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre
of a Circle or Sphere feature.
Move Point along Vector
This method constructs a new Point feature located at a specified distance along the
direction of a Line feature. The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis
of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Intersection of Line and Sphere
This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Sphere. The
Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or
one of the reference frame axes. If two intersections occur, the user chooses which point
to use.
Centroid of a Feature
This method constructs a new Point feature at the centroid (centre of mass) of a 2D or 3D
feature.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
175
Intersection of Line and Cylinder
This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Cylinder.
The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone
feature or one of the reference frame axes. If two intersections occur, the user chooses
which point to use.
Intersection of Line and Cylinder
This method constructs a new Point feature at the intersection of a Line and a Cone. The
Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or
one of the reference frame axes. If two intersections occur, the user chooses which point
to use.
Define
This method constructs a new Point feature at a defined location.
To define a Point:
1. Enter the 3 coordinate positions of the point in the X, Y and Z fields.
Click [Apply all] to view the feature in the display.
2. Select the direction of the outward normal from the options in the drop-down list.
3. Click [Flip] to change the normal direction by 180 degrees.
High / Low Point
This method constructs a new Point feature that corresponds to the maximum or
minimum distance of a point cloud from a reference feature. The reference feature can be
either an existing Point, Line or Plane feature.
A Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere
feature.
A Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, or the axis of a Cylinder or Cone
feature.
When a Plane feature is selected as a reference, the constructed high or low point can be
calculated either through an absolute distance, or with respect to the plane's normal to
allow for negative distances.
Points from Cloud
This method constructs a new Point features at the same location as selected points within
a cloud.
Line
Constructs new Line features based on existing features
This tool enables you to construct new Line features that are located at intersections and
specified distances from other features or in defined positions.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
176
The Construct LINE dialog
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Construct Methods
A selection of methods to construct the feature are provided, each of which are described
below. The parameter selection fields will adapt to the match the selected construction
method.
There are several means whereby you can specify the features to be used for the
construction method:
Clicking on the required feature in the display.
Dragging the required feature from the Feature Database into the input field.
By clicking on the ellipsis button .
This schedules a dialog in which you can select the required reference axis or plane.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
177
Line through two points
This method constructs a new Line feature that joins two selected Point features. The
Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere
feature.
Line through a point normal to a line
This method constructs a new Line feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and is perpendicular to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an
existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined
by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame
axes.
Line through a point parallel to a line
This method constructs a new Line feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and is parallel to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing
Point, or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined by an
existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Line through a point normal to a plane
This method constructs a new Line feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and is perpendicular to a selected Plane feature. The Point feature can be defined by an
existing Point, or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Plane feature can be
selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the three working planes coincident
with the current origin. The plane is extended to intersect with the constructed Line.
Intersection of two planes
This method constructs a new Line feature that forms the intersection of two selected
Plane features. The Planes will be extended if necessary so that they intersect. The Plane
feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the three working
planes coincident with the current origin.
Projection of a line on a plane
This method constructs a new Line feature that is formed by the projecting a selected
Line feature onto a selected Plane feature in a direction normal to the Plane. The Plane
will be extended if necessary to enable the projection to be made.
The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone
feature or one of the reference frame axes. The Plane feature can be selected from an
existing measured Plane or one of the three working planes coincident with the current
origin.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
178
Line through a point tangent to a circle
This method constructs a new Line feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and is tangent to a selected Circle feature. The selected Point and Circle must be coplanar.
The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point, or the centre of a Circle or Sphere
feature.
Line tangent to two circles
This method constructs a new Line feature that is tangent to two Circle features. The two
Circles must be coplanar. The user chooses which tangent to use.
From slot axis
This method constructs a new Line feature that corresponds to the axis of a selected Slot
feature. The selected Slot can be open, round or square.
Mid-line of two lines
This method constructs a new Line feature that lies midway between two selected Line
features. The selected Lines do not have to intersect. The Line feature can be defined by
an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame
axes.
Through a point at an angle to a line
This method constructs a new Line feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and is at a specified angle to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by
an existing Point, or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be
defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference
frame axes.
Define
This method constructs a new Line feature with a defined length at a defined location.
To define a Line:
1. Enter the required length.
2. Enter the 3 coordinate positions of the start point of the line in the X, Y and Z fields.
Click [Apply all] to update the feature in the display.
3. Select the direction of the line from the options in the drop-down list.
Click [Apply all] to update the feature in the display.
Click [Flip] to change the direction by 180 degrees.
4. Select the Orientation plane from the options in the drop-down list.
(The Orientation Plane is used to determine vector touch directions, probe compensation
vectors, and the projection plane for the 2D feature).
Click [Apply all] to update the feature in the display.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
179
5. Click [OK] to create the new Line feature.
Circle
Constructs new Circle features based on existing features
This tool enables you to construct new Circle features that are located at intersections and
specified distances from other features or in defined positions.
The Construct CIRCLE dialog
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Construct Methods
A selection of methods to construct the feature are provided, each of which are described
below. The parameter selection fields will adapt to the match the selected construction
method.
There are several means whereby you can specify the features to be used for the
construction method:
Clicking on the required feature in the display.
Dragging the required feature from the Feature Database into the input field.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
180
By clicking on the ellipsis button .
This schedules a dialog in which you can select the required reference axis or plane.
Circle through three points
This method constructs a new Circle feature that passes through three selected Point
features. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or
Sphere feature.
Arc through three points
This method constructs a new circular arc feature that passes through three selected Point
features. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or
Sphere feature.
Projection of a circle onto a plane
This method constructs a new Circle feature by projecting an existing circle feature onto a
selected Plane feature. The Plane feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane
or one of the three working planes coincident with the current origin.
Intersection of a cylinder and a plane
This method constructs a new Circle feature that corresponds to the intersection of
selected Cylinder feature and a selected Plane feature. The circle will be constructed at
the true intersection, or can be projected onto the Plane feature if required. The Plane
feature can be extended to enable the intersection if necessary.
The Plane feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the three
working planes coincident with the current origin.
Intersection of a cone and a plane
This method constructs a new Circle feature that corresponds to the intersection of
selected Cone feature and a selected Plane feature. The circle will be constructed at the
true intersection, or can be projected onto the Plane feature if required. The Plane feature
can be extended to enable the intersection if necessary.
The Plane feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the three
working planes coincident with the current origin.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
181
Intersection of a sphere and a plane
This method constructs a new Circle feature that corresponds to the intersection of
selected Sphere feature and a selected Plane feature. The circle will be constructed on the
selected Plane. The Plane feature can be extended to enable the intersection if necessary.
The Plane feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the three
working planes coincident with the current origin.
Intersection of two spheres
This method constructs a new Circle feature that corresponds to the intersection of two
selected Sphere features. The two Spheres must intersect.
Tangent to two lines
This method constructs a new Circle feature whose circumference is tangent to two
selected Line features. The selected Line features must be coplanar and they must
intersect.
Circle on cone with diameter
This method constructs a new Circle feature at a specified diameter of an existing Cone
feature. The center of the constructed Circle lies on the axis of the cone and its normal
corresponds to the cone axis.
Intersection of a cone and a cylinder
This method constructs a new Circle feature at the intersection of a selected Cone feature
and a selected Cylinder feature. The selected Cone and Cylinder must be coaxial.
Circle through two circles
This method constructs a new Circle feature whose circumference passes through the
center of two selected existing Circle features. The selected Circles must be coplanar.
Intersection of a two cones
This method constructs a new Circle feature at the intersection of two selected Cone
feature. The selected Cones must intersect.
Intersection of a cylinder and a sphere
This method constructs a new Circle feature at the intersection of a selected Cylinder and
Sphere feature. The selected Cylinder and Cone must intersect.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
182
Define
This method constructs a new Circle feature with a defined diameter at a defined location.
To define a Circle:
1. Enter the required Diameter.
2. Select the required Type.
Inner - creates an internal feature (hole).
Outer - creates an external feature (boss)
3. Enter the 3 coordinate positions to define the centre of the circle in the X, Y and Z fields.
Click [Apply all] to update the feature in the display.
4. Select the Orientation plane from the options in the drop-down list.
(The Orientation Plane is used to determine vector touch directions, probe compensation
vectors, and the projection plane for the 2D feature).
Click [Apply all] to update the feature in the display.
Click [Flip] to change the orientation by 180 degrees
5. Click [OK] to create the new Circle feature.
Plane
Constructs new Plane features based on existing features
This tool enables you to construct new Plane features that are located at intersections and
specified distances from other features or in defined positions.
The Construct PLANE dialog
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
183
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Construct Methods
A selection of methods to construct the feature are provided, each of which are described
below. The parameter selection fields will adapt to the match the selected construction
method.
There are several means whereby you can specify the features to be used for the
construction method:
Clicking on the required feature in the display.
Dragging the required feature from the Feature Database into the input field.
By clicking on the ellipsis button .
This schedules a dialog in which you can select the required reference axis or plane.
Plane through a point and a line
This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a
Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of
a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Plane parallel to a line
This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and is parallel to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an existing
Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined by an
existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Plane normal to a line
This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and is perpendicular to a selected Line feature. The Point feature can be defined by an
existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature. The Line feature can be defined
by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame
axes.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
184
Plane parallel to a plane
This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through a selected Point feature
and is parallel to a selected Plane feature. The plane will be mathematically extended to
allow coincidence with the point, but the constructed plane has the same dimensions as
the selected plane.
The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere
feature. The Plane feature can be selected from an existing measured Plane or one of the
three working planes coincident with the current origin.
Plane through a line and parallel to another line
This method constructs a new Plane feature that passes through one Line feature and is
parallel to a second Line feature. The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the
axis of a Cylinder or Cone feature or one of the reference frame axes.
Mid-plane of two points
This method constructs a new Plane feature that is perpendicular (normal) to the line
joining two selected Point features. The plane is positioned on the mid-point of the line.
The Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere
feature.
Mid-plane of two lines
This method constructs a new Plane feature that is based on two selected Line features.
The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone
feature or one of the reference frame axes. The resulting constructed plane depends on the
relative orientation of the selected Line features:
Parallel and coplanar- the lines are in
the same plane and are parallel to each
other.
The constructed plane is perpendicular
to the plane connecting the two lines.
Intersecting and coplanar - the lines
are in the same plane and intersect.
The constructed plane is perpendicular
to the plane connecting the two lines.
It bisects the angle of intersection
between the two lines, so two planes are
possible.
The user chooses which plane is
required.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
185
Skewed - the lines lie in two different
planes.
The constructed plane is perpendicular
to the planes containing the line features.
Mid-plane of two planes
This method constructs a new Plane feature that lies on the plane between two selected
Plane Features. It bisects the angle of intersection between the two planes so two new
planes are possible. The user chooses which plane is required.
Offset plane
This method constructs a new Plane feature that is parallel to an existing Plane feature. It
is located a specified distance along the normal to the selected Plane. If a negative offset
is specified the constructed Plane is located on the opposite side of the selected Plane.
Center plane of two lines
This method constructs a new Plane feature that is based on two selected Line features.
The Line feature can be defined by an existing Line, the axis of a Cylinder or Cone
feature or one of the reference frame axes. The resulting constructed plane depends on the
relative orientation of the selected Line features:
Parallel and coplanar- the lines are in
the same plane and are parallel to each
other.
The constructed plane is perpendicular
to the plane connecting the two lines.
Intersecting and coplanar - the lines
are in the same plane and intersect.
The constructed plane is perpendicular
to the plane connecting the two lines.
It bisects the angle of intersection
between the two lines, so two planes are
possible.
The user chooses which plane is
required.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
186
Skewed - the lines lie in two different
planes.
The constructed plane is parallel to the
planes containing the line features.
Define
This method constructs a new Plane feature with a defined size at a defined location.
To define a Plane:
1. Enter the required Length and Width.
The length is defined relative to a specified length vector.
2. Enter the 3 coordinate positions to define the centre of the circle in the X, Y and Z fields.
Click [Apply all] to update the feature in the display.
3. Select the direction of the outward normal from the options in the drop-down list.
Click [Apply all] to update the feature in the display.
Click [Flip] to change the direction by 180 degrees.
4. Select the direction of the length from the options in the drop-down list.
Click [Apply all] to update the feature in the display.
Click [Flip] to change the direction by 180 degrees.
5. Click [OK] to create the new Plane feature.
Best Fit - Feature
Creates a prismatic geometric feature that best fits selected point features.
This tool creates a prismatic geometric feature that best fits selected point features. The
point features are based on existing features.
A number of feature types can be constructed. The number of points and the specific
parameter values required depend on the feature to be constructed.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
187
The Construct (FEATURE) dialog
According to the type of feature to be constructed, this dialog can contain the following fields.
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Probe Comp.
Probe Compensation is a calculated 3D vector adjustment from the known
center of the probe stylus ball to the actual point of contact between the ball and
the part. An approximate value is the radius of the ball used, but other factors
must be considered when high accuracy and precision are required.
Probe compensation need not be used if the measurements are to determine the
shape of a part, rather than dimensions.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
188
Orientation Plane/Axis
Any measured feature that has 2D geometry requires the specification of an Orientation
Plane/Axis and selection of the 2D Feature Location. Both options must be enabled and
specified together.
The Orientation Plane/Axis (commonly referred to as the "working plane") is the plane in
which the feature lies. It is used to determine both the probe compensation vector and
projection of the measured points to calculate the feature geometry.
The following options are available:
An existing plane
this must be dragged from the Feature Database and dropped onto the list.
Auto
one of the XY, YZ, or ZX planes of current part reference frame. The Tactile
Measurement module automatically selects the closest orthogonal plane as determined
from the measurement points describing the feature.
XY, YZ, ZX
one of the current part reference planes.
Bestfit Plane
the Tactile Measurement module will create a bestfit plane to the measurement points.
2D Feature Location
The 2D Feature Location option determine the location of the orientation plane, selected
from the dropdown list shown above, relative to the active reference frame. The choice
establishes which 3rd axis point will be used to set the feature location.
Projection
projects the measured feature to the 3rd axis origin point on the selected orientation plane.
Average Height
calculates the mathematical average of the 3rd axis locations of the individual measured
points.
Fitting Algorithm
This enables you to choose the algorithm to use for feature fitting. The following options
are available:
Least Squares : fits a feature that minimizes the average squared error of all the data
points.
Max Inscribed : fits the biggest feature that fits inside all the data points.
Min Circumscribed : fits the smallest feature that fits inside all the data points.
Min/Max : fits a feature halfway between two features, with a common center, that have a
minimum distance between them to enclose all data points. This algorithm minimizes the
maximum error. Note that the two features are not the same as those produced using Max
Inscribed and Min Circumscribed.
Type
The Type parameter determines the direction of the boundary vectors for an enclosed
geometric feature:
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
189
Inner - All vectors point inward to each other creating an internal feature (hole, slot).
Outer - All vectors point outward away from the feature surface creating an external
feature (boss, web, rib).
List of selected points
Points to be used to best fit the feature can be selected by :
Clicking on them directly in the display.
Dragging from the Feature Database and dropping them into the list.
Point can be deleted from the list by:
Selecting them and pressing the <Delete> key.
Features that can be constructed from best fitting points
Line
This tool constructs a new Line feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
features can be selected on an existing Point, Circle or Sphere feature.
A minimum of two Points must be selected.
Circle
This tool constructs a new Circle feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
features can be selected on an existing Point, Circle or Sphere feature.
A minimum of three Points must be selected.
Plane
This tool constructs a new Plane feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
features can be selected on an existing Point, Circle or Sphere feature.
A minimum of three Points must be selected.
Sphere
This tool constructs a new Sphere feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
features can be selected on an existing Point, Circle or Sphere feature.
A minimum of four Points must be selected.
Cylinder
This tool constructs a new Cylinder feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.
A minimum of five Points must be selected.
Cone
This tool constructs a new Cone feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.
A minimum of three Points must be selected.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
190
Point
This tool constructs a new Point feature mid way between selected Point features. The
Point feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere
feature.
A minimum of two Points must be selected.
Ellipse
This tool constructs a new Ellipse feature that best fits selected Point features. The Point
feature can be defined by an existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.
A minimum of five Points must be selected.
Best Fit - Offset Line
Constructs a new Line feature that is a specified distance from selected point features
The Construct Bestfit Offset Line command creates a new Line that is a specified distance
from selected point features. A Bestfit Offset Line is useful if you have a datum line that
cannot be measured, or a theoretical center-line / axis that is not directly measurable. It
allows you to use nominal dimensions of a part to define where a line is to be constructed
relative to existing points.
The Bestfit Offset LINE dialog
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
191
Offset Direction
Choose the direction in which offset values will be defined.
List of points
This contains a list of points that will be used to best-fit the new line. At least two points
must be specified.
Points - the name of the selected feature containing the point. This can be selected in the
display or dragged from the Feature Database. Point features can be defined by an
existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.
Distance : the distance between the feature point and the line. Enter values in the Offset
Direction. Values can be positive or negative.
Probe Comp : use these check boxes to apply Probe Compensation to any non-
compensated measured point(s).
Working Plane
Choose the plane in which the new Line feature lies.
[Preview]
Click [Preview] to see a preview of the line.
[OK]
Click [OK] to accept and create the new feature.
Best Fit - Offset Plane
Constructs a new plane that is a specified distance from selected point features
The Construct Bestfit Offset Plane command creates a new plane that is a specified
distance from selected point features through which the best fit is made. A Bestfit Offset
Plane is useful if you have a datum plane that cannot be measured, or is too small to get an
accurate measurement due to the extremely tight point spacing that would result.
The Bestfit Offset PLANE dialog
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
192
Name
The name to be assigned to the feature. A default name is presented.
To change the name, enter the required name in the input field then click the [Update]
button.
Plane Normal
Choose the direction in which the normal to the plane will lie.
List of points
This contains a list of points that will be used to best-fit the new plane. At least three
points must be specified.
Points - the name of the selected feature containing the point. This can be selected in the
display or dragged from the Feature Database. Point features can be defined by an
existing Point or the centre of a Circle or Sphere feature.
Distance : the distance between the feature point and the line. Values can be positive or
negative. Positive values are in the same direction as the Plane Normal.
Probe Comp : use these check boxes to apply Probe Compensation to any non-
compensated measured point(s).
[Preview]
Click [Preview] to see a preview of the plane.
[OK]
Click [OK] to accept and create the new feature.
Define Cylinder
Defines a Cylinder feature
The Define to Construct Cylinder tool allows you to construct a cylinder feature by
defining its nominal position, geometric properties, and dimensions.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
193
The Construct Cylinder dialog
Label
The Label field enables you to define a unique identification for the constructed feature.
A default one is presented by default. You can enter a user-defined label in the input field.
Type
These options set the direction of the boundary vectors for an enclosed geometric feature:
Inner - All vectors point inward to each other creating an internal feature (hole, slot).
Outer - All vectors point outward away from the feature surface creating an external
feature (boss, web, rib).
Size
These fields enable you to define the dimensions of the Cylinder.
The Height is defined along the axis (see below).
Dimensions must be defined in the measuring system units.
Base Center
Enter the 3D coordinate of the centre of the base of the cylinder relative to the defined
coordinate system.
Axis
The Axis of the cylinder defines the direction in which the height is defined.
You can enter vector components to define a direction or select a coordinate axis.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
194
The Flip button reverses the defined direction by180 degrees.
Define Cone
Defines a Cone feature
The Define to Construct Cone tool allows you to construct a cone feature by defining its
nominal position, geometric properties, and dimensions.
The Construct Cone dialog
Label
The Label field enables you to define a unique identification for the constructed feature.
A default one is presented by default. You can enter a user-defined label in the input field.
Type
These options set the direction of the boundary vectors for an enclosed geometric feature:
Inner - All vectors point inward to each other creating an internal feature (hole, slot).
Outer - All vectors point outward away from the feature surface creating an external
feature (boss, web, rib).
Size
These fields enable you to define the dimensions of the cone as shown in the figure
below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
195
The Height is defined along the cone axis (see below) and can allow a truncated cone to
be defined.
Dimensions must be defined in the measuring system units.
Cone Apex
Enter the 3D coordinate of the apex (top) of a cone relative to the defined coordinate
system.
Axis
The Axis of the cone defines the direction in which the height is defined.
You can enter vector components to define a direction or select a coordinate axis.
The Flip button reverses the defined direction by180 degrees.
Define Sphere
Defines a Sphere feature
The Define to Construct Sphere tool allows you to construct a sphere feature by defining its
nominal position, geometric properties, and dimensions.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
196
The Construct Sphere dialog
Label
The Label field enables you to define a unique identification for the constructed feature.
A default one is presented by default. You can enter a user-defined label in the input field.
Type
These options set the direction of the boundary vectors for an enclosed geometric feature:
Inner - All vectors point inward to each other creating an internal feature (hole, slot).
Outer - All vectors point outward away from the feature surface creating an external
feature (boss, web, rib).
Size
This field enables you to define the diameter of the sphere. The dimension must be
defined in the measuring system units.
Center
Enter the 3D coordinate of the centre of the sphere relative to the defined coordinate
system.
Window
The Window ERROR: Variable (Ribbon-Group) is undefined. allows you to choose the interface
panels that are displayed.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
197
Clicking on the small arrow on the Window tool reveals the following menu:
Feature Database
Switches the Feature Database panel on or off.
DRO Window
Switches the Digital Read Out panel on or off.
Status Bar Window
Switches the Status bar panel on or off.
View Tools Window
Switches the View Tools bar on or off.
View Tools bar
The View tools allow you to modify the displayed part.
Zooms in
Each click zooms in by 25%.
Zooms out
Each click zooms out by 25%.
Zoom all
Adjusts the zoom so that all features fit within the graphical scene.
Zoom slide
Use the scroll bars to zoom.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
198
Zoom box
Zooms in on a user defined area.
1. Click on the zoom box tool.
2. Place the mouse cursor on one corner of the box.
3. Press the LMB and drag the cursor to the opposite corner.
4. Release the mouse button.
The area within the box will fill the scene.
Translate
Moves the part over the scene.
1. Click on the tool.
2. Drag with the left mouse button.
3. Press Esc to stop the translate function
Rotate
Rotates the part around the current center of rotation.
1. Click on the tool.
2. Drag with the left mouse button to rotate the object
3. press Esc to end the rotation.
Set rotation center
Sets the center of rotation which can either be a point on in the display, or the center of a
selected feature.
1. Click on the tool
2. Either click anywhere in the scene to set the centre of rotation there
3. Or select a feature.
Set View port
Allows you to set the angle from which you view the part in the graphical display.
1. Click on the tool
2. A menu appears
3. Select your view.
View Feature Label
Displays a label with the name of a selected feature.
1. Click on the tool.
2. Click on the feature (in the display) whose label is required.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
199
Status bar
The Status Bar runs along the bottom of the window.
It shows the current status of the measurement, and displays instructional messages to guide you
through operations.
The Status bar can be shown or hidden using the Window menu.
Feature Database
The Feature Database lists features that have been measured or constructed.
The Features Database can be shown or hidden using the Window menu.
Right-clicking on the Feature Database produces a pop-up menu that provides a number of
operations that can be performed on the items in the database.
Show
Shows a feature which has been previously hidden.
Hide
Hides the selected feature.
Find...
Schedules a dialog in which you can search for a particular item in the Feature database.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
200
1. Enter the name of the item required.
2. Select the direction in which the search is to be made.
3. Check the Match Case box if the search is to be case sensitive.
4. Click [Find next].
Feature Data
This opens a dialog in which the properties of the selected item are displayed.
Show Label
This displays the name of the feature in the display.
Hide Label
Hides the label that has been displayed using the Show Label function.
Delete
Deletes the selected feature.
Rename
Allows you to rename the selected feature.
Change ID/OD Property
This allows you to change the properties of a selected feature that has an inner/outer
property. This can be especially useful for an arm measurement of a circle or other feature
in which the property was set incorrectly based on the first vector. This operation can be
performed on a circle, cylinder, cone and sphere.
The Change ID/OD Feature Property dialog appears. The current property setting is
selected.
Check the "Update nominal to reflect property change" option to update the nominal
values (such as diameter, center, etc.) along with changing the inner/outer property.
Click [OK] to change the feature property.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
201
Digital Read Out
The DRO (Digital Read Out) window shows the current position of the stylus center. In the
current selected coordinate system.
The DRO (Digital Read Out) can be shown or hidden using the Window menu.
Coordinate System
Sets the coordinate system
This tool enables you to choose the coordinate system in which the scanned measurements
will be made. By default the coordinate system used is that of the localizer arm. Other
coordinate systems can be selected based on alignments that are currently listed under the
Alignments node in the Inspect section of the Inspection tree.
Alignments can be made using a number of tool in the Align Ribbon Group in the Align task.
To set the coordinate system
1. Click on the arrow next to the Coordinate System tool.
2. A list of available coordinate systems will appear.
The Machine Coordinates system will always be available.
Other entries correspond to existing alignments.
3. Click on the Coordinate system required.
The display will adapt to show the origin of the coordinate system.
The values displayed in the Digital Readout will be based on the newly selected coordinate
system.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
202
Settings
The Settings Ribbon Group contains a set of tools to configure your hardware settings.
Connection
Sets the scanner and the localizer to be used for the scan
This tool enables you to choose the localiser and the scanner to be used in the
measurements. If no localiser and scanner have been previously specified then this
operation will be scheduled as soon as the Handheld Measurement task is selected.
Scanners and Localizers must have been configured using the Hardware Configuration
tool.
The Connection dialog
Localizer
A list of currently configured localizers.
Scanner
A list of currently configured Scanners.
[OK]
Selects the Localizer and Scanner and starts the connection process.
Hardware Configuration
Configures the Scanner, the Localizer and performs a Qualification procedure
This tool schedules the Hardware Configuration dialog.
All aspects of configuring hardware for handheld scanning operations are described in the
HandHeld API manual.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
203
Processing Settings
Sets the mesh processing parameters
Measured point clouds are automatically converted to a mesh at the end of the scanning
process. The default processing parameters are designed to obtain an optimum mesh. This
tool enables you to set the filtering level to be used in the mesh generation process and to
disable it if necessary.
The automatically generated mesh replaces the point clouds and appears in the Measured panel in
the Inspection tree.
The Processing Settings dialog
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
204
Fuse scan when finished
When this option is checked, all point clouds will be automatically and optimally
processed to obtain a single mesh at the end of the scanning process. The point clouds are
removed.
If you wish to perform all the processing yourself using the tools in the Filter/Mesh
Ribbon Group in the Measured task then you should uncheck this option.
Keep original patches
When this option is checked the original point cloud patches will be retained when the
single mesh is created.
Filter
When the Automatic option is checked then the level of filtering will be determined
automatically. If you wish to apply more or less filtering, uncheck this option then set the
required level using the slider below.
Measured task
The Measured task is primarily used for preparing the measured data for alignment and
comparison.
The Preparation of Measured data include:
Importing the Measured datasets and managing their membership in the scene.
Manipulating the Measured dataset by merging, splitting and cleaning up point clouds or
meshes as well as removing unwanted areas (such as clamping handles or the scanning
bed for example).
Creating, filtering and managing meshes.
Using Feature Fitting tools to detector fit a variety of shaped features (such as circles,
planes slots) as well as other objects such as edge, borders and intersections. These can be
used for feature-based comparison with measured models.
Detected measured features can also be renamed to match corresponding ones in the
nominal model and have their dimensions determined.
Modifying the Measured model objects by scaling, smoothing and reversing the normals
as well as selecting, duplicating and offsetting the model.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
205
Creating sections and adding them to a rail.
Some advanced tools enable you to refine, remove, add quick shading and determine the
volume of a mesh. In addition model objects can be mirrored and a golden template
determined.
The Measured task includes the following Ribbon Groups:
o Import Measured
o Cut / Merge
o Filter / Mesh
o Feature fitting
o Modify Measured
o Sections : all the tools in this ribbon group are described in the Solid Workflow.
o Advanced
Import Measured
The Import Measured Ribbon Group contains commands to import the Measured data and
to add measured objects to the data set.
Import
Imports a point cloud / mesh
This tool imports a new point cloud or a mesh from a variety of file types and places the
object in the measured section of the Inspection data tree.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
206
The Import dialog
Files of type
You can import files of the following types:
Delimited ASCII: any ASCII file where the X, Y and Z values are separated by a
delimiting character ISO: a file with ISO codes (such as G00, G01, ...)
STL: an ASCII or binary STL (stereo lithography) file
IGES: points in an IGES file
RIS: a Range Image Standard file.
Hyscan: a Hyscan measurement file.
Metris Base file (mbf-format).
Kube files (sab2 format)
Metris Focus files (*.mfi)
The options available depend on the type of file being imported.
Import as a single point cloud
You can import several files at the same time. All files you select must be of the same
type. If you check the Import as a single point cloud checkbox, a single point cloud will
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
207
be created from the selected files. If you leave this checkbox unchecked, each file will be
imported as a separate point cloud.
Import as Feature points
This option allows you to import cloud points directly as features.
Use prefilter 1 out of
During import you can filter the point cloud by checking the Use prefilter 1 out of
checkbox. Enter the Prefilter step in the Prefilter’s edit box. Only one out of Prefilter step
points of the point cloud(s) in the file will be visible in static display.
Note: If you use a prefilter when importing a STL file, the mesh will be discarded.
Merge all point clouds
If the Merge all point clouds option is checked ON, all the selected point clouds are
merged into one point cloud and only one object is added into the Measured tree. If
Merge all point clouds option is checked OFF, all the point clouds are imported one by
one, and a separate object is created for each point cloud in the Measured tree.
When the importation is started, ISO, STL, IGES, RIS Hyscan, Metris Base and Kube files are
directly imported. For Delimited ASCII files, the Import Delimited ASCII dialog appears. This
dialog has three tabs that must be stepped through in order to complete the importation.
The General tab
The General tab shows a preview of your file. Each line in the preview is preceded between
brackets by its line number in the file. By default the preview only shows you the beginning
and end of the file. If you press the Show full preview button, the preview will expand to
show the whole file.
Note that it may take some time to view a large file.
You can also set the following options in the General tab:
Skip first lines
Inspection will not read the first lines in the file (for example the file header)
Skip last lines
Skip last lines: Inspection will not read the last lines in the file (for example the file
footer)
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
208
The Delimiters tab
The columns for the X, Y and Z values in a delimited ASCII file are separated by one or
more delimiting characters.
Delimiters
Selection of delimiters indicating the columns in the file.
The Treat consecutive delimiters as one
This checkbox, allows you to collapse consecutive delimiters into one.
Data preview
View if the contents of the file, with columns separated by ‘|’ characters.
The Columns tab
The Columns tab allows you to set what columns in your file will be used for the X, Y and Z
coordinates. For each coordinate you can choose to read it from a column in the file, or to
keep it fixed at a certain value.
To import a point cloud / mesh
1. Click the Import Point cloud tool to open the Import dialog box.
2. Select the File Type in the drop down box at the bottom of the dialog.
3. Select one or more files and click the [Open] button.
4. If the Import delimited ASCII dialog box pops up, modify the parameters under General,
Delimiters or Columns tabs if needed and click the OK button when done.
The point cloud(s)/ meshes are imported and automatically placed under the "Data" node of the
Measured section of the Inspection tree.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
209
Add to Measured
Adds a selected object to the measured data
This tool adds an object (point cloud, mesh or feature ) to the Measured section of the
Inspection Tree. This tool is only active when an object (Point cloud / mesh / feature) is
ready to be added to the Measured section and has been selected. Since Focus
automatically adds the object to the Data node of in the Measured section of the tree, the
tool is typically grayed out after import.
Note: This operation can only be applied to "'Operable objects". These can be modified by
selecting the Configure Workflow option from the Workflow menu.
To add objects to the Measured section of the Inspection tree
1. Click the Mixed Object Select tool.
2. Click on the point cloud(s)/mesh(s) or features to be added to the Measured section of the
Inspection tree.
3. Click on the Add to Measured too.
The object will be added to the "Data" node in the Measured section of the Inspection tree.
Cut/Merge
The Cut / Merge Ribbon Group contains commands to cut and merge point cloud data.
Merge
Merge point clouds/meshes into a single object
The Merge tool merges a number of point clouds or meshes into a single object.
To merge point clouds or meshes
1. Select multiple point clouds or meshes either in the scene or the Inspection tree
2. Click the Merge tool.
The point clouds/mesh(s) are merged into one.
Subtract
Subtracts a selected cloud or mesh from a reference to remove overlap errors
This tool corrects small overlap errors that can occur when objects have been scanned
from multiple angles. These overlap errors become visible when point clouds are merged
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
210
and meshed. It allows you to subtract a pointcloud / mesh from a reference pointcloud, or it
allows you to subtract meshes from a solid.
The Subtract property sheet
Pointcloud/Mesh
When this button is checked, the tool will subtract a pointcloud or mesh from a reference
pointcloud/mesh.
Select Reference
Click this button to define the point cloud/mesh that is currently selected as the reference.
If a point cloud / mesh was selected before the tool is activated, this is taken to be the
reference.
Select to Subtract
Click this button to define the point cloud/mesh that is currently selected as the point
cloud/ mesh to subtract from the reference.
Subtract distance
Enter a value to be used as the distance to determine the overlap area.
Blend
If this option is selected, the points that lie within the user defined overlap area are moved
together gradually, masking a potential step remaining between the point clouds/meshes.
Solid
When this button is checked, the tool allows you to keep parts of a mesh that are close to
Solid faces, and have a local normal direction that is within a user defined angle
tolerance. All parts of the mesh that satisfy both conditions will be retained. All parts of
the mesh that are outside these parameters will be subtracted.
Subtract distance
Enter the value used to define the overlap or proximity distance between the solid face
and the mesh.
Subtract distance
Enter the value used to define the angular deviation between the local normal directions.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
211
Remove small areas
When this option is checked, then isolated areas that match the above criteria but which
are smaller than the value defined below will be removed.
Minimum area size
This value determines the area size that will be removed when the Remove small areas
option is used.
Subtract
Click this button to start the subtraction process. After the subtraction, the subtracted item
is indicated as such in the Inspection tree.
To subtract a cloud from a reference pointcloud
1. Click on the small arrow next to the Subtract tool.
2. Check the button next to Pointcloud/Mesh.
3. Select the point cloud/mesh to be used as the reference either in the scene or the tree.
4. Click on the [Select Reference] button. This will adapt to indicate that one has been
selected.
5. Select the point cloud/mesh to be subtracted in either the scene or the Inspection tree.
6. Click on the [Select to Subtract] button. This will adapt to indicate that one has been
selected.
7. Enter a value for the Subtract distance to define the overlap.
8. Check the Blend option if you want to blend the points in the overlap area, to remove a
distinct step between the two clouds.
9. Click [Subtract].
The subtracted pointcloud/mesh will appear in the Measured section of the Inspection tree with
the suffix _Subtracted added to its name.
To subtract a mesh from a reference solid
This procedure requires that you have a solid and a mesh available. The solid must be visible in
the scene (in the Nominal task).
1. Click on the small arrow next to the Subtract tool.
2. Check the button next to Solid.
3. Select the solid to be used as the reference in the tree.
4. Click on the [Select Reference Solid from Tree] button. This will adapt to indicate that
one has been selected.
5. Select the mesh to be subtracted in either the scene or the Inspection tree.
6. Click on the [Select Meshes to Subtract] button. This will adapt to indicate that one has
been selected.
If no mesh is selected, the subtraction will be performed on all the meshes in the
Inspection tree.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
212
7. Enter a value for the Subtract distance to define the proximity distance between the solid
and the mesh.
8. Enter a value for the Subtract angle to define the angular tolerance between the normals
of the solid and the mesh.
9. If you wish to remove small areas that match the above criteria check the Remove small
areas button and then enter a value for the minimum area to be defined as "small".
10. Click [Subtract].
The subtracted mesh will appear in the Measured section of the Inspection tree with the suffix
_Subtracted added to its name.
To use the Subtract tool without opening the property sheet
1. Select the object to be used as the reference in the tree.
2. Click on the tool.
3. If you wish to subtract a specific object in the tree, select it.
4. Click the MMB.
The (selected) object will be subtracted from the reference according to the settings in the
property sheet. If no pre-selected object is available, all pointclouds or meshes in the tree will be
subtracted.
Separate
Separates selected areas of point clouds, meshes, compare objects and borders into distinct objects
The Separate tool is used to create separate point cloud (s) or mesh(s) from a single
original object. This tool can operate on point clouds, meshes, 3D compare objects and
borders.
Separate property sheet
Visible Parts
When checked ON, only those points that are visible in the scene will be selected. Points
or mesh parts that are behind the plane in of the scene will not be selected.
When this option is checked OFF, then all points / meshes that lie in the direct line into
the scene will be selected.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
213
Keep copy of original
When checked ON, the parent object is retained. The results of the command are put into
a new object.
Extra Points
When checked ON, extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the
line defined by the lasso. In the case of a mesh additional triangles will be generated in
order to create a straight cut edge. This is illustrated in the figure below.
Cut effect with and without extra points
Plane
When this option is selected then the separation will be made along a specified plane.
Method
You can select the required plane from the drop down menu.
Value
This displays the value of the currently selected position of the plane. The value can be
entered manually or by clicking an object in the scene.
Direction
This determines whether the part that extends in the positive or negative direction will be
highlighted and termed the inner part.
To separate a pointcloud or mesh with a lasso
This method allows you to manually select the part of the point cloud or mesh.
1. Click on the arrow next to the Separate point clouds/meshes tool to open the property
sheet.
2. Check the Visible Parts option if required.
3. Check the Keep copy of original option if required.(The original can always be deleted
afterwards if necessary.)
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
214
4. Check the Extra Points option if required.
5. Make sure that the Plane option is OFF.
6. In the scene create a lasso to define the area to be kept, clicking with the MMB to end the
definition.
7. The selected part will be highlighted in red.
To change the selection make a new lasso and click once again with the MMB.
8. When the selected portion is as required, click with the MMB again to execute the cut
operation, or click on the Separate point clouds/meshes icon in the property sheet.
Two new objects will appear in the Measured panel of the inspection tree. The highlighted
section will be termed the "_Inner" part.
To separate a part of pointcloud or mesh relative to the coordinate system
1. Click on the arrow next to the Separate point clouds/meshes tool to open the property
sheet.
2. Check the Visible Parts option if required.
3. Check the Keep copy of original option if required. (The original can always be deleted
afterwards if necessary.)
4. Check the Extra Points option if required.
5. Make sure that the Plane option is ON.
6. Choose the plane to be used as the cutting plane.
7. Click with the LMB in the scene to determine the required position of the plane.
8. Click the MMB.
One part that will be separated will be highlighted in red.
9. To change the position click with the LMB again and then with the MMB.
10. When the selected portion is as required, click with the MMB again to execute the cut
operation, or click on the Separate point clouds/meshes icon in the property sheet.
Two new objects will appear in the Measured panel of the inspection. The part that extended in
the positive direction will be termed the "_Inner" part.
Note: To view the lasso selection for the recorded script, click on the Cut command in the
Automation window.
Keep Selected
Retains a selected part of a point cloud or mesh
The Keep Selected tool is used to isolate a selected region of point cloud(s) or mesh(s) by
deleting the rest of the point cloud(s) or mesh(s). This tool is the complement of the Delete
Selected tool. This tool can operate on point clouds, meshes, 3D compare objects and
borders.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
215
Keep Selected property sheet
Visible parts
When checked ON, only those points that are visible in the scene will be selected. Points
or mesh parts that are behind the plane in of the scene will not be selected.
When this option is checked OFF, then all points / meshes that lie in the direct line into
the scene will be selected.
Keep copy of original
When checked ON, the original point cloud or mesh is retained and the kept part of the
point cloud or mesh will appear as a new object in the Inspection tree.
Extra points
When checked ON extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the line
defined by the lasso. In the case of a mesh additional triangles will be generated in order
to create a straight cut edge. This is illustrated in the figure below.
Keep cut effect with and without extra points
Plane
When this option is selected then the cut will be made along a specified plane.
Method
You can select the required plane from the drop down menu.
Value
This displays the value of the currently selected position of the plane. The value can be
entered manually or by clicking an object in the scene.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
216
Direction
This determines whether the part that extends in the positive or negative direction will be
kept.
To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be kept with a lasso
This method manually selects the part of the point cloud or mesh relative to the screen.
1. Click on the arrow next to the Keep Selected tool to open the property sheet.
2. Check the Visible Parts option if required.
3. Check the Keep copy of original option if required. (The original can always be deleted
afterwards if necessary.)
4. Check the Extra Points option if required.
5. Make sure that the Plane option is OFF.
6. In the scene create a lasso to define the area to be kept, clicking with the MMB to end the
definition.
7. The part to be kept will be highlighted in red.
To change the selection make a new lasso and click once again with the MMB.
8. When the selected portion is as required, click with the MMB again to execute the cut
operation, or click on the Keep Selected icon in the property sheet.
The kept selection of the point cloud or mesh will appear as a new entry in the Inspection tree.
To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be kept relative to the coordinate system
1. Click on the arrow next to the Keep Selected tool to open the property sheet.
2. Check the Visible Parts option if required.
3. Check the Keep copy of original option if required.(The original can always be deleted
afterwards if necessary.)
4. Check the Extra Points option if required.
5. Make sure that the Plane option is ON.
6. Choose the plane to be used as the cutting plane.
7. Click with the LMB in the scene to determine the required position of the plane.
8. Click the MMB.
The part to be kept will be highlighted in red.
9. To change the position click with the LMB again and then with the MMB.
10. To change the side that is to be kept, switch the Direction parameter.
11. When the selected portion is as required, click with the MMB again to execute the cut
operation, or click on the Keep Selected icon in the property sheet.
Note: To view the lasso selection for the recorded script, click on the Cut command in the
Automation window.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
217
Delete Selected
Deletes selected regions of a point cloud or mesh
The Delete Selected tool is used to delete the selected region, maintaining the non-selected
regions. This tool is the complement of the Keep Selected tool. This tool can operate on
point clouds, meshes, 3D compare objects and borders.
Delete Selected property sheet
Visible Parts
When checked ON, only those points that are visible in the scene will be selected. Points
or mesh parts that are behind the plane in of the scene will not be selected.
When this option is checked OFF, then all points / meshes that lie in the direct line into
the scene will be selected.
Keep copy of original
When checked ON, the original point cloud or mesh is kept unchanged; the result of the
command appears as a new object.
Extra points
When checked ON extra points will be created in order to keep the cut line follow the line
defined by the lasso. In the case of a mesh additional triangles will be generated in order
to create a straight cut edge. This is illustrated in the figure below.
Delete effect with and without extra points
Plane
When this option is selected then the cut will be made along a specified plane.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
218
Method
You can select the required plane from the drop down menu.
Value
This displays the value of the currently selected position of the plane. The value can be
entered manually or by clicking an object in the scene.
Direction
This determines whether the part that extends in the positive or negative direction will be
deleted.
To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be deleted with a lasso
This method manually selects the part of the point cloud or mesh relative to the screen.
1. Click on the arrow next to the Delete Selected tool to open the property sheet.
2. Check the Visible Parts option if required.
3. Check the Keep copy of original option if required. (The original can always be deleted
afterwards if necessary.)
4. Check the Extra Points option if required.
5. Make sure that the Plane option is OFF.
6. In the scene create a lasso to define the area to be deleted, clicking with the MMB to end
the definition.
7. The part to be deleted will be highlighted in red.
To change the selection make a new lasso and click once again with the MMB.
8. When the selected portion is as required, click with the MMB again to execute the cut
operation, or click on the Delete Selected icon in the property sheet.
The deleted selection of the point cloud or mesh will appear as a new entry in the Inspection tree.
To select a part of pointcloud or mesh to be deleted relative to the coordinate system
1. Click on the arrow next to the Delete Selected tool to open the property sheet.
2. Check the Visible Parts option if required.
3. Check the Keep copy of original option if required.(The original can always be deleted
afterwards if necessary.)
4. Check the Extra Points option if required.
5. Make sure that thePlane option is ON.
6. Choose the plane to be used as the cutting plane.
7. Click with the LMB in the scene to determine the required position on the axis or of the
plane.
8. Click the MMB.
The part to be deleted will be highlighted in red.
9. To change the position click with the LMB again and then with the MMB.
10. To change the side that is to be deleted, switch the Direction parameter.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
219
11. When the selected portion is as required, click with the MMB again to execute the cut
operation, or click on the Delete Selected icon in the property sheet.
Note: To view the lasso selection for the recorded script, click on the Cut command in the
Automation window.
Filter/Mesh
The Filter / Mesh Ribbon Group contains commands to filter and triangulate the measured
cloud/mesh data.
Note that the Refine mesh tool has been moved to Advanced ribbon group.
Fuse
Fuses multiple clouds or meshes
This tool fuses multiple point clouds and produces a single mesh. This tool provides a
convenient means of performing a number of Filter /Mesh operations into a single efficient
method of creating an optimal mesh from a number of point clouds.
The Fuse Clouds and Meshes property sheet
Selection
The number of point clouds / meshes selected to be fused together.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
220
Keep original
Check this option to keep a copy of the original point clouds or meshes after the Fuse
operation.
Localizer type
Select the type of localizer that was used to create the point clouds.
Scanner type
Select the type of scanner that was used to create the point clouds.
Filtering
Automatic
When this option is checked ON, Focus determines the optimum filtering level to be
applied when creating the mesh.
When this option is checked OFF you can set the level of filtering required. If small holes
are being lost for example, you can set the filtering level to be Less by moving the slider.
If you wish to adapt the filtering you should make sure that the original point clouds are
kept.
To fuse multiple point clouds or meshes
1. Select the point clouds to be fused.
2. To create an optimal single mesh simply click on the Fuse tool.
3. To adapt the Fuse process, click on the arrow to open the property sheet.
Check the Keep original button on,
Click [OK].
If the filtering is not exactly as required, uncheck the Automatic option and adjust the
filtering level.
Reselect the point clouds and repeat the process.
To apply specific conditions to the mesh generation process, use the separate tools in the Filter /
Mesh ribbon group.
Filter
Filters a point cloud using the scatter, grid and/or curvature filter
The Filter Point Cloud tool decimates the points in a point cloud using scatter, grid or
curvature filters.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
221
The Filter point cloud dialog
Scatter
The scatter filter is the first filter that can be used when working on a point cloud that
contains scatter points. The scatter filter uses the Radius and # of Points parameters.
Note: The scatter filter is a good tool to remove the scattered, island points.
Radius
The scatter filter will remove those points that have less than a specified number of points
in their surrounding sphere with a radius set by the Radius parameter.
# of Points
The scatter filter will remove those points that have less than this number of points in
their surrounding sphere with a radius set by the Radius parameter.
Grid
The grid filter will construct a set of cubes in space. The filter keeps one point in each
cube. So, the bigger the size of the cubes, the more points will be filtered out. The result
of this filter is a point cloud with a homogeneous point density. The size of the cube is set
by the Distance parameter.
Note: The grid filter is a good tool to use to obtain a uniformly distributed point cloud.
Distance
The Distance parameter specifies the length of the cubes used by the grid filter. A
distance of 1 drawing unit yields cubes of 1 x 1 x 1 drawing units in size.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
222
Curvature
The Curvature filter is the smartest of all the filters. The Curvature filter will filter out
many points in the flat areas and will keep many points in areas with high curvature. In
order to do this, the curvature filter classifies the points into several curvature classes
using following parameters. On every curvature class, a grid filter is applied.
Contrast
The Contrast parameter defines how the points are classified. A contrast of 0 filters all
points with the Max. Grid parameter. A contrast of 50 filters points in the class with
medium curvature with the average of the Min. and Max. Grid parameter. A higher
contrast will tend to filter more point classes with small grid parameter.
Max Grid
The class with the lowest curvature is filtered with the Max. Grid parameter.
Min Grid
The class with the highest curvature is filtered with the Min. grid parameter.
Smallest Detail
The highest curvature to take into account is determined by the Smallest Detail parameter.
If this parameter is set 0, the smallest detail will be determined automatically. Otherwise,
this parameter represents the size of the smallest detail in your drawing. You can click the
Suggest button and request the application to suggest the right value to be used as the
smallest detail to compute the curvature. You can set this parameter to be larger than the
noisy areas in your drawing so as to discard noise from the point cloud.
Hide Quick Shading
The Hide Quick Shading check box can be checked ON to hide the quick shading and
checked OFF to retain the quick shading.
Anti-Aliasing
The Anti-Aliasing check box can be checked ON to avoid filter artifacts.
[Filter]
Filter the point cloud according to the defined parameters.
[Undo]
Undoes the last filter operation.
Points
Provides a summary of the filter operation.
[Apply]
Applies the filter and closes the dialog.
[Close]
Closes the dialog without applying the filter.
To filter a point cloud
1. Select the point cloud to be filtered.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
223
2. Click the Filter Point Cloud tool.
3. Choose the preferred method of filtering.
4. Set the appropriate parameters.
5. Click [Filter].
6. Apply other filters if necessary.
7. Click [Apply] to accept the filtered point cloud.
Optimize
Optimizes a point cloud
The Optimize tool optimizes the quality of a point cloud or mesh by removing noise from
the measurement data.
To Optimize a Mesh
1. Select a point cloud or mesh.
2. Click the Optimize tool.
Mesh
Triangulates a point cloud to a mesh
The Mesh Point cloud command triangulates point cloud(s), to create a new mesh object.
Mesh point cloud property sheet
Max Edge Length
Triangles with an edge larger than this value will be removed to avoid that the mesh will
close holes. If the Max Edge Length parameter has a zero value, no triangles will be
removed.
To mesh a point cloud
1. Select one or more point clouds.
2. Click on the arrow next to the Mesh tool to open the property sheet.
3. Enter the Max Edge Length value.
4. Click the Mesh Point cloud icon to create the mesh
The mesh will appear in the Inspection tree.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
224
Remove mesh
Converts a mesh to point cloud
The Remove Mesh command removes the faces of a mesh. As a result, a new point cloud
object is created.
To Remove a mesh
1. Select a mesh.
2. Click the Remove mesh tool.
Feature Fitting
Features are geometrical entities, definable in both the Nominal and Measured data. The purpose
of detecting features is to extract the geometrical entities and obtain specific parameters such as a
center point, axis direction, radius etc. for use in alignment, comparison and/or dimension
verification.
Features in the Nominal CAD are well-defined geometries. Detection of these features is easy
because of the clean input.
Features in the measured data are approximated geometries. Their position and parameters are
extracted using a specific algorithm on a point cloud or mesh. In this calculation, the user can fix
some parameters, such as the radius of a circle to get a different approximation of its center.
Because of the above fundamental differences between nominal and measured feature detections,
different methods are used:
Mesh : features are detected from vertices within a given tolerance, starting from user-
specified vertices.
Point cloud : features are detected from points within a given tolerance, starting from
user-specified points.
Feature fitting is supported for:
Point clouds
Meshes
Borders
Focus Inspection offers several feature fitting tools. All these feature-fitting tools support the
rapid MMB option to fit the selected feature.
Detect/Fit Feature
Opens up the Feature Detection panel in which you can select the feature(s) to be fitted.
This tool opens the feature detection panel in which you can select the type of feature to be
detected and set the parameters to detect it. Certain features (circles, slots and points) can
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
225
be detected either from existing nominal features or by manual selection of the start
points. Some of the options in this panel may be insensitive due to the context in which you
are working.
Method
The fields in this panel determine whether features will be detected manually from start
points, or from existing nominal features.
Detect from Nominal
When this option is selected, measured features that correspond to existing nominal
features will be searched for. This method can only be used to detect certain features
(circles, points, surface points, points created using the Combi Hem/Profile/Edge tool or
slots)
Detection offset
The value entered in this field determines the 'offset' that will be used to detect points that
can be included in the feature.
Verify start points
The Nominal Circle/Slot features automatically generate start points using the Detection
offset value. These start points are used to detect the Measured features. Checking this
option enables a verification of the generated start points: only start points that are in a
plane will be used.
All Nominal
When this button is checked, measured features based on all the nominal features of the
applicable type will be searched for.
Manually selected from tree
When this button is checked, measured features based on selected nominal features of the
applicable type will be searched for.
Detect from manually clicked start points
When this option is selected, all types of measured features can be detected.
To detect measured features from nominal features
Before starting this procedure, nominal features (circles, points, surface points, points created
using the Combi Hem/Profile/Edge tool or slots) must have been defined on the nominal model
and be available in the Inspection tree.
1. Click on the Feature fitting tool.
2. Click the option Detect from Nominal.
3. Enter a Detection offset value.
4. Check the Verify start points option if required.
5. To search for measured features that correspond to all nominal features check the "All
Nominal" option.
6. To search for measured features based on particular nominal features check the
"Manually detected from tree" option, then select the required nominal features in the
tree.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
226
7. Click [Detect] button at the bottom of the Feature Detection panel.
The feature detection process will begin. The message line will indicate the total number of
nominal features involved, the number of corresponding measured features that were detected
and the number that were not (failed). Those features that were detected will appear in the
Measured panel in the Inspection tree.
To detect measured features by manual selection of start points.
1. Click on the Feature fitting tool.
2. Click the option "Detect from manually clicked start points".
3. Click on the required feature tool. The fields in the panel will be adjusted as required.
4. Follow the instructions given on the corresponding page.
Create Measured Feature Point
Creates a feature point at a specified location
The Create Measured Feature Point tool creates a feature point at the given coordinates.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
227
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the Auto Rename
Features tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the measured feature point.
[Create]
This button creates the point with the defined name at the specified position.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
228
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To create a measured feature point
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click the Create Measured Feature Point tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature if required.
4. There are two means to define the position of the feature point:
EITHER
Click with the LMB in the scene where you want to create the feature point.
OR
Enter the required XYZ coordinates in the corresponding fields in the panel.
5. To create the point
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Create] in the definition panel.
6. Click [Close] when all the required features have been defined.
The feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
Note: Measured feature points can be created even there is no model available.
Detect /Fit Measured Line
Detects or creates a Line feature.
This tool fits a straight line to the selected points in the data, or creates a line according to
specified characteristics.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
229
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the Auto Rename
Features tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
230
Theoretical mesh
When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.
Fit
When this option is checked, then some or all of the feature characteristics can be defined
in the fields below.
Fixed Length
When this option is checked, the line feature will have a specified length. This length is
specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the line will be set in a specified location.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the line.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the direction of the line will be defined by a specified
vector.
I, J, K
The components of the vector defining the direction of the line.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model. If
any characteristics have been defined they will be fitted to the feature.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the line have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the length, the center point and the direction. It will create a line feature with
these characteristics.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a line feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Line tool.
3. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
4. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
5. Enter a value for some of the line characteristics if required.
6. Select one or more points in the model using the chosen tool.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
231
7. To detect the line feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
To create a line feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Line tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature.
4. Check the Fit button ON.
5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the line, i.e. its length, center point and direction.
6. Click [Create]
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
Detect / Fit Measured Circle
Detects or creates a measured circle feature.
This tool fits a circle to the selected points in the data, or allows you to create a circle
based on specified characteristics.
Note that this type of feature can also be detected directly from a corresponding nominal feature.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
232
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the Auto Rename
Features tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Plane
This option is only available when the Statistics option is checked ON. It provides
additional statistical information on the
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
233
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Theoretical mesh
When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
Depth
Since features are determined in a plane, the depth determines the length of the rays of the
projection of each point to this plane. The image below shows the difference between a
low and high Depth parameter indicated in red.
Fit
When this option is checked, then some or all of the feature characteristics can be defined
in the fields below.
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the circle feature will have a specified radius. This radius is
specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the circle will be set in a specified position.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the circle.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the axis of the circle will be defined by a specified vector.
I, J, K
The components of the vector defining the direction of the circle.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model. If
any characteristics have been defined they will be fitted to the feature.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
234
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the circle have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the radius, the center point and the direction. It will create a circle feature with
these characteristics.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a circle feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Circle tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required
4. If you want to detect the circle entirely from the measured model, then click the Detect
option ON.
Then enter a value for the tolerance and any other parameters if required.
5. If you wish to detect a circle on the model that has some defined characteristics, then
click the Fit option ON.
Then enter a value for some of the circle characteristics.
6. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
7. Select the required points in the model using the chosen tool.
8. To detect the circle feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the Inspection tree.
To create a circle feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Circle tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature.
4. Check the Fit option ON.
5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the circle, i.e. its radius, center point and
direction.
6. Click [Create]
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
235
Detect Measured Round Slot
Detects a Round Slot feature.
The Detect Measured Round Slot tool fits a round slot to the selected points in the
Measured data.
Note that this type of feature can also be detected directly from a corresponding nominal feature.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the Auto Rename
Features tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
236
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Plane
This option is only available when the Statistics option is checked ON. It provides
additional statistical information on the
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Theoretical mesh
When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
Depth
Since features are determined in a plane, the depth determines the length of the rays of the
projection of each point to this plane.
The figure below shows the difference between a low and high Depth parameter indicated
in red.
Slot Type
The Slot Type parameter specifies at which ends the slot will be truly round. The choices
are between :
Both Ends: Fits a complete round slot to the selected points.
First End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the first end.
Second End: Fits a semi round slot to the selected points, favoring the second end.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
237
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a round slot feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Round Slot tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
5. Select the points in the model using the chosen tool.
6. To detect the round slot feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
Detect Measured Rectangular Slot
Detects a Rectangular Slot feature.
This tool fits a Rectangular Slot to the selected points in the data.
Note that this type of feature can also be detected directly from a corresponding nominal
feature.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
238
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the Auto Rename
Features tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Plane
This option is only available when the Statistics option is checked ON. It provides
additional statistical information on the
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
239
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Theoretical mesh
When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
Depth
Since features are determined in a plane, the depth determines the length of the rays of the
projection of each point to this plane.
The figure below shows the difference between a low and high Depth parameter indicated
in red.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a rectangular slot feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Rectangular Slot tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
5. Select the points in the model using the chosen tool.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
240
6. To detect the rectangular slot feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
Detect Measured Key Slot
Detects a Key Slot feature
The Detect Measured Key Slot tool fits a key slot to the selected points in the data. A key
slot has two component holes, a small one and a big one, which are used as the base for
key slot construction.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
241
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the Auto Rename
Features tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
242
Plane
This option is only available when the Statistics option is checked ON. It provides
additional statistical information on the
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Theoretical mesh
When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
Depth
Since features are determined in a plane, the depth determines the length of the rays of the
projection of each point to this plane.
The figure below shows the difference between a low and high Depth parameter indicated
in red.
Slot
The Slot parameter defines the key slot shape. Two options are available:
Straight: The resulting key slot has a smaller circular hole component that is extended to
the bigger circular hole component as shown below.
Tangent: The resulting key slot has a smaller circular hole component that is
progressively enlarged to the bigger circular hole component as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
243
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a key slot feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Key Slot tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. Define the tolerance and the type of slot.
5. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
6. Select one or more points in the model using the chosen tool.
7. To detect the key slot feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
Detect Measured Hexagon Slot
Detects a Hexagonal Slot feature
The Detect Measured Hexagonal Slot tool fits a hexagonal slot to the measured model.
Note that this type of feature can also be detected directly from a corresponding nominal feature.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
244
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the Auto Rename
Features tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Plane
This option is only available when the Statistics option is checked ON. It provides
additional statistical information on the
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
245
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Theoretical mesh
When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
Depth
Since features are determined in a plane, the depth determines the length of the rays of the
projection of each point to this plane.
The figure below shows the difference between a low and high Depth parameter indicated
in red.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a hexagon slot feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Hexagon tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
5. Select one or more points in the model using the chosen tool.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
246
6. To detect the hexagon slot feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
Detect / Fit Measured Plane
Detects or creates a plane feature.
This tool fits a plane to the selected points in the data, or allows you to create a plane
based on specified parameters.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
247
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the Auto Rename
Features tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Theoretical mesh
When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
Fit
When this option is checked, then some or all of the feature characteristics can be defined
in the fields below.
Fixed Size
When this option is checked, the each side of the plane feature will have a specified
length. This length is specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the plane will be set in a specified position.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the plane.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the normal of the plane will be defined by a specified
vector.
I, J, K
The components of the vector defining the direction of the normal to the plane.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model. If
any characteristics have been defined they will be fitted to the feature.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
248
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the plane have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the size, the center point and the direction. It will create a plane feature with
these characteristics.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect plane feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Plane tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. If you want to detect the plane entirely from the measured model, then click the Detect
option ON.
Then enter a value for the tolerance and any other parameters if required.
5. If you wish to detect a plane on the model that has some defined characteristics, then
click the Fit option ON.
Then enter a value for some of the plane characteristics.
6. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
7. Select the required points in the model using the chosen tool.
8. To detect the plane feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
To create a plane feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Plane tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature.
4. Check the Fit option ON.
5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the plane, i.e. its size, center point and direction.
6. Click [Create].
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
249
Detect/Fit Measured Cylinder
Detects or creates a Cylinder feature
This tool detects or fits a cylinder to the selected points in the data or creates a cylinder
according to defined parameters.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the Auto Rename
Features tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
250
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Theoretical mesh
When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the cylinder feature will have a specified radius. This radius
is specified in the input field.
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the cylinder feature will have a specified height. This radius
is specified in the input field
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the cylinder will be set in a specified position.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the cylinder.
Fixed Direction
When this option is checked, the axis of the cylinder will be defined by a specified vector.
I, J, K
The components of the vector defining the direction of the line.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model. If
any characteristics have been defined they will be fitted to the feature.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the cylinder have been defined in
the panel, i.e. the radius, the height, the center point and the direction. It will create a
cylinder feature with these characteristics.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
251
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a cylinder feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Cylinder tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. If you want to detect the cylinder entirely from the measured model, click the Detect
option ON.
Then enter a value for the tolerance and any other parameters if required.
5. If you wish to detect a cylinder on the model that has some defined characteristics, then
click the Fit option ON.
Then enter a value for some of the cylinder characteristics.
6. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
7. Select the required points in the model using the chosen tool.
8. To detect the cylinder feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
To create a cylinder feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Cylinder tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature.
4. Check the Fit option ON.
5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the cylinder, i.e. its radius, height, center point
and direction.
6. Click [Create].
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
252
Detect / Fit Measured Sphere
Detects or creates a sphere feature.
This tool fits a sphere to the selected points in the Measured data, or creates a sphere
based on defined parameters.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Note: You can re-name measured features to match nominal features using the Auto Rename
Features tool available from the feature fitting toolbar.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
253
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Theoretical mesh
When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
Fit
When this option is checked, then some or all of the feature characteristics can be defined
in the fields below.
Fixed Radius
When this option is checked, the radius of the sphere feature will have a specified length.
This length is specified in the input field.
Fixed Center
When this option is checked, the center of the sphere will be set in a specified position.
X, Y, Z
The coordinates of the center of the sphere.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model. If
any characteristics have been defined they will be fitted to the feature.
[Create]
This button appears when the all the characteristics of the sphere have been defined in the
panel, i.e. the radius and the center point. It will create a sphere feature with these
characteristics.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
254
To detect sphere feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Sphere tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. If you want to detect the sphere entirely from the measured model, then click the Detect
option ON.
Then enter a value for the tolerance and any other parameters if required.
5. If you wish to detect a plane on the model that has some defined characteristics, then
click the Fit option ON.
Then enter a value for some of the sphere characteristics.
6. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
7. Select the required points in the model using the chosen tool.
8. To detect the sphere feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
To create a sphere feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Sphere tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature.
4. Check the Fit option ON.
5. Specify all the characteristics relating to the sphere, i.e. its radius and center point.
6. Click [Create].
The new feature will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
Detect / Fit Measured Cone
Detects or creates a cone feature on existing objects
This tool fits a cone frustum to the selected points in the data.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
255
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected based on the starting points
defined on an existing selected object.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
256
Theoretical mesh
When this option is checked ON, the feature will be detected from a polygon face.
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
Fit
When this option is checked, the feature will be fitted through the selected points / faces
[Detect]
This button will detect or fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the
model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a cone feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Cone tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. Click the Detect radio button and adjust the tolerance if required.
5. Select the starting points in the model on which the cone will be detected.
6. To detect the cone feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
Feature detection will be attempted and the new feature will appear in the Features section of the
Measured panel in the inspection tree.
To fit a cone feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Cone tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. Click the Fit radio button.
5. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
257
The Pick select option selects complete objects. The Lasso option can be used to select
specific regions. Click with the MMB to confirm the lasso selection.
6. Click on the [Detect] button.
A cone will be fitted to the defined area.
Create Measured Point cloud/Mesh-Area
Creates a Point cloud / Mesh-area feature
This tool duplicates and converts a set of polygon lasso selected points into a feature
object.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, and indication of the feature type and a number.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
258
[Detect]
This button will fit the detect the area once it has been defined on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To create a point cloud feature
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click the Create Measured Point cloud/Mesh-Area tool.
3. Enter a name for the feature if required.
4. Click with the Lasso tool to define the required area on the model.
5. To create the area
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [ Detect] in the definition panel.
The area will appear in the Features section of the Measured panel in the inspection tree.
Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin
Detects a measured cylindrical pin
This tool enables you to detect a measured cylindrical pin. A cylindrical pin is defined by a
cylinder of specific height, and radius on a base.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
259
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
260
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a Measured Cylindrical Pin
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
5. Select three points on the base of the cylindrical pin, then three points on the contour of
the pin.
6. To detect the feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The feature detection process will begin. If the feature could not be detected, this will be
indicated in the message line at the bottom of the user interface. If the feature detection was
successful, the feature with the defined name will appear in the Features section of Measured
data tree. A shape representing the detected feature will be drawn on the point cloud.
Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin with Cone Guiding
Detects a measured cylindrical pin with conical guiding
This tool enables you to detect a measured cylindrical pin with conical guiding. A
cylindrical pin is defined by a cylinder of specific height, and radius on a base, with a
chamfered edge.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
261
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
262
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a measured cylindrical pin with conical guide
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin with Cone Guiding tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
5. Select three points on the base of the cylindrical pin, then three points on the contour of
the pin.
6. To detect the feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The feature detection process will begin. If the feature could not be detected, this will be
indicated in the message line at the bottom of the user interface. If the feature detection was
successful, the feature with the defined name will appear in the Features section of Measured
data tree. A shape representing the detected feature will be drawn on the point cloud.
Detect Measured Diamond Pin
Detects a measured diamond pin
This tool enables you to detect a measured diamond pin. A diamond pin is defined by a pin
of specific height, with a cross shaped section.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
263
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
264
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a measured diamond pin
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Diamond Pin tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
5. Select three points on the base of the diamond pin, then three points on the contour of the
pin.
6. To detect the feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The feature detection process will begin. If the feature could not be detected, this will be
indicated in the message line at the bottom of the user interface. If the feature detection was
successful, the feature with the defined name will appear in the Features section of Measured
data tree. A shape representing the detected feature will be drawn on the point cloud.
Detect Measured T-Stud
Detects a measured T stud
This tool enables you to detect a measured T-stud. A T-stud is defined by a cylindrical pin
with a larger radius head on a base.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
265
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
266
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a measured T-Stud
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured T-Stud tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
5. Select three points on the base of the stud, then three points on the upper surface of the T-
stud.
6. To detect the feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The feature detection process will begin. If the feature could not be detected, this will be
indicated in the message line at the bottom of the user interface. If the feature detection was
successful, the feature with the defined name will appear in the Features section of Measured
data tree. A shape representing the detected feature will be drawn on the point cloud.
Detect Measured Welded Bolt
Detects a measured welded bolt
This tool enables you to detect a measured welded bolt. A welded bolt is defined by a
threaded pin on a base.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
267
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
268
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a measured welded bolt
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Welded Bolt tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
5. Select three points on the base of the stud, then three points on the threaded contour of the
bolt.
6. To detect the feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The feature detection process will begin. If the feature could not be detected, this will be
indicated in the message line at the bottom of the user interface. If the feature detection was
successful, the feature with the defined name will appear in the Features section of Measured
data tree. A shape representing the detected feature will be drawn on the point cloud.
Detect Measured Christmas Tree
Detects a measured Christmas tree
This tool enables you to detect a measured Christmas tree. A Christmas tree something you
hang decorations on but is also defined by a threaded stud with a pointed end on a base.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
269
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
270
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a measured Christmas tree
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Christmas Tree tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
5. Select three points on the base of the object then three points on the contour.
6. To detect the feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The feature detection process will begin. If the feature could not be detected, this will be
indicated in the message line at the bottom of the user interface. If the feature detection was
successful, the feature with the defined name will appear in the Features section of Measured
data tree. A shape representing the detected feature will be drawn on the point cloud.
Detect Measured Welded Nut
Detects a measured welded nut
This tool enables you to detect a measured welded nut. A welded nut is defined by a
threaded nut on a base.
The Feature Parameters are as shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
271
Feature Name
This field can be used to assign a name to the measured feature. The default name
contains the prefix Meas_, an indication of the feature type and a number.
Statistics
The Statistics option generates statistical information about the detected feature and its fit
on the measured data indicating how closely the feature is fitted with the measured data.
It pops up the Feature Statistics Information dialog box to show this information and adds
the statistics object under the detected feature.
It is recommended that you keep this option ON.
Note: Statistics are mandatory if you are performing a GD&T tolerance evaluation
Detect
When this option is checked, the feature will be detected on an existing selected object.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
272
Tolerance
The Tolerance parameter determines the accuracy of the fit. The fitting starts with the
user indicated points and ‘grows’ until the tolerance limit is reached. The lower the
tolerance the higher the accuracy of the fit.
Depth
The depth of the nut.
[Detect]
This button will fit the feature once the required input has been selected on the model.
[Undo]
This undoes the previous operation, removing the last created feature. This can be
repeated until all features in the tree have been removed when the button becomes
insensitive.
[Close]
This closes the feature detection panel.
To detect a measured welded nut
1. Click on the Detect/Fit Measured Feature(s) tool.
2. Click on the Detect Measured Welded Nut tool.
3. Enter a name for the new feature if required.
4. In the Selection dialog choose whether to make selections using the single Pick option or
using the Lasso option.
5. Select three points on the base of the welded nut.
6. To detect the feature:
EITHER
Click the MMB in the scene
OR
Click [Detect] in the feature detection panel.
The feature detection process will begin. If the feature could not be detected, this will be
indicated in the message line at the bottom of the user interface. If the feature detection was
successful, the feature with the defined name will appear in the Features section of Measured
data tree. A shape representing the detected feature will be drawn on the point cloud.
Intersection
Creates a intersection feature between two existing features
The Intersection tool creates intersection object (point/line) that can be used afterwards for
dimensioning.
Intersections can be made with following objects:
Apparent Intersection Closest intersection
Object Result Object Result
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
273
2 planes line 2 planes line
1 plane and 1
line
point 1 plane and 1
line
point
2 lines and the
current view
direction
point 1 plane and 1
cylinder
point
2 cylinders
(cylinders
should behave a
lines) and the
current view
direction
point 1 Line and 1
Cylinder
point (closest to
both axes)
1 line and 1
cylinder
point 1 point and 1
line
1 point (middle
between point
and line)
1 point and 1
line
point (closest
distance)
2 Cylinders point (closest to
both axes)
1 plane and 1
cylinder axis
point 2 lines point (closest to
both axes)
These objects must be selected before the tool becomes available.
The Intersection property sheet
[Compute Apparent/Closest Intersection]
This button will generate the feature according to the parameters set.
Apparent
When this option is checked, a feature will be generated if the objects appear to intersect.
Closest
When this option is checked, if the objects do not intersect, then the mid point of the
closest distance between them is defined as the intersection point.
To create an Intersection
1. Click on the Mixed Object Selection tool.
2. Select two valid objects as given in the table. Use the <Ctrl> key to select the second
item.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
274
3. Click on the arrow to open the property sheet.
If you click directly on the tool the intersection will be created using the last used
settings.
4. Choose whether to generate an Apparent or a Closest intersection.
5. Click the [Compute Apparent/Closest Intersection] button to generate the required
intersection.
Note: Intersection objects are added to the Inspection tree; in the Nominal panel when both
source objects are nominal, in the Measured panel when any of the objects is measured.
Project Object
Projects features and sections to the XY, YZ or XZ plane at a given location, or a feature plane or a solid/mesh.
This tool can be used as preparation for dimensioning. It allows you to project point
features, line features or sections onto planes or the model.
Project dialog box
[Select to project]
This button updates the field alongside to indicate the number of features or sections that
have been selected to project.
Target
The Target onto which the feature/section will be projected. This can be:
The XY/ YZ/ XZ planes
The plane associated with a feature.
The CAD model, a Point Cloud or a Mesh
Unbounded
When checked ON, the projection will be made to the infinite 3D plane.
Location
The location represents the (3rd) coordinate position for the XY, YZ and XZ plane.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
275
Direction
This option only applies when the target is a CAD model, a Point Cloud or a Mesh. It
allows you to select the direction in which the projection towards the target will be made.
When only 1 direction is checked, the projection is in the selected direction.
When 2 directions are checked, the direction of the projection is to a point found at the
intersection of the specified plane going through the original point, and the target object.
When 3 directions are checked, the direction of the projection is that of the closed
distance between the point and the target object.
Keep original
When this option is checked, a copy of the original object is created before the projection
takes place .
[Project]
The Project button projects the selected objects to the target.
To project a point, line or section
1. Select the object to be projected.
2. Click on the Project Object tool.
3. Select the Target from the drop down list.
4. Enter any other parameters associated with the target.
5. Choose whether to keep the original or not. (It can be deleted afterwards.)
6. Click [Project].
A new object will appear in the Inspection tree labelled {object}_Projected.
Detect Edge
Detects edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles on sections
This tool is used to detect Edges (corners) Combi Hems and Combi Profiles using calipers.
It allows you to define, load and save caliper definitions and to choose the type of output
feature required. The features types are selected on sections that have been created on the
object.
An Edge (Corner) is defined as:
The projection of point ‘c’ onto a line ‘ab’ in the direction of caliper angle ‘1’
Directions: normal of line ‘ab’ and normal of caliper angle ‘1’
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
276
Edge detection
A Combi-Hem is defined as:
First point: connection point ‘b’
Second point: projection of ‘c’ onto line ‘ab’ in direction of caliper angle ‘1’
Directions:
First point: normal of line ‘ab’
Second point: normal of line ‘ab’ AND normal of caliper angle ‘1’
Combi-Hem detection
An Combi-Profile is defined as:
First and second points: connection point ‘b’
Third point: connection point ‘c’
Directions:
First and second point: normal of line ‘ab’.
Third point: normal of caliper angle ‘1’
Combi-Profile detection
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
277
The Detect Edge - Combi Hem - Combi Profile dialog
This dialog has two tabs; the Caliper tab enables you to define and select calipers, and the Detect
tab enables you to select the caliper to be used and detect the required feature.
The Detect tab
Nominal
The number of nominal sections selected.
Measured
The number of measured sections selected.
Caliper
This allows you to select a caliper from the list of available calipers. Calipers are defined
in the Caliper tab.
Use on Rail
When checked, the caliper will be used on all sections in a rail.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
278
Output
Select the required feature output - Edge, Combi-hem or Combi-Profile.
Section healing tolerance
This tolerance value allows you to ignore small gaps in the sections.
The Caliper tab
Caliper
[Save]
This opens a Save As dialog and saved the current caliper to disc and renames the
‘current’ caliper with the file name (without extension).
[Load]
This opens a File Import dialog and allows you to select an existing caliper file. The
selected caliper file and the caliper is added to the drop down list.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
279
Dimension
Each distance represents a dimension of the caliper as shown in the picture.
Angles
Each angle represents an angle of the caliper as shown in the picture.
[Detect]
Click this button to detect the required feature type on the selected sections.
To detect an Edge, Combi hem or Combi Profile
This tool detects feature types on sections that have already been created.
1. Select the sections on which the features are to be detected.
2. Click on the Detect Edge-Combi Hem - Combi Profile feature(s) tool.
3. Choose a caliper from those that have already been defined, or click on the Caliper tab
and define one.
4. If the sections are on a rail check the 'Use on Rail' button and then select the rail.
5. Choose the type of feature required.
6. Click [Detect].
Auto Dimension
Detects measured dimensions from nominal dimensions
This tool can be used to detect measured feature dimensions on and between dimensions
defined on nominal features.
In order for this function to work, the pairs of nominal / measured features must have names
with the required prefix. The dimension of the measured feature named Meas_{feature} can only
be determined if the corresponding nominal feature is called Nom_{feature}.
Auto Dimension property sheet
All Dimensions
When this option is checked, then dimensions of, or between, measured features that
correspond to all the existing nominal feature dimensions will be searched for. If not
checked, then dimensions need to be selected in the Inspection tree.
To detect measured feature dimensions from nominal feature dimensions
Before starting this procedure the following pre-requisites are necessary :
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
280
Nominal features (circles, surface
points, round slots and square slots)
must have been defined on the nominal
model using the Feature Fitting tool in
the Nominal Task.
Dimensions must have been determined
for these features using the tools in the
"GD&T Dimensions" ribbon group in
the Nominal Task.
Corresponding features must be defined
on the Measured Model.
These corresponding Measurement
features must have the same name as the
Nominal feature with the prefixes Meas_
instead of Nom_.
By default measured dimensions will be determined for All existing nominal dimensions.
1. To detect measured feature dimensions that correspond to particular nominal feature
dimensions, select the required nominal feature dimensions in the tree.
2. Click on the tool directly.
The detection process will start. Corresponding measured feature dimensions will appear in the
Inspect section of the tree.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
281
The message area will show the number of dimensions found and the number not matched
(failed).
Failed dimensions can be exported using the Failed Features tool in the Export ribbon group in
the Reporting task.
Auto Rename
Re-names measured features to match the corresponding nominal features.
This tool enables you to re-name measured features so that their identification matches that
of the nominal features to which they are closest. The tool initiates a search of the
measured features within a specified distance and renames all of them that it finds within
this distance of the corresponding nominal feature.
The Auto Rename property sheet
Search Distance
This specifies the distance (in mm) over which the tool will search for a corresponding
Nominal feature. Measured features that have no corresponding Nominal feature within
this specified distance will not be renamed.
To automatically rename measured features
This procedure assumes that you have a set of Nominal and Measured features available in the
Inspection tree. An example of two such sets are shown below.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
282
1. Select the features to be renamed in the Measured panel in the Inspection tree.
2. Click on the Auto Rename Features tool.
3. In the Property sheet set the required search distance.
(This assumes that the nominal and the measured objects are aligned).
4. Click on the icon at the top of the property sheet.
The search will be initiated and the status bar indicate the progress.
The features for which a corresponding nominal feature was found within the search distance will
be renamed as shown in the example below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
283
Mesh Border
Generates the borders of a mesh
This tool generates the Outside and/or Inside border of a mesh. The resulting object can be
exported in IGES format.
The Mesh Border dialog
Outer border
When this button is checked an outer border for the mesh will be generated.
Inner border
When this button is checked an inner border for the mesh will be generated.
[OK]
Generates the specified borders.
[Close]
Closes the Generate Border dialog without creating the borders.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
284
To generate borders on a mesh
1. Select the mesh
2. Click on the tool.
3. Select the borders to be generated
4. Click [OK].
Flip Feature
Switches the direction of the normal of selected features
The Flip Feature tool flips the directions of the normals of selected features.
Flip Feature property sheet
[Flip Normals]
Switches the normal direction of the selected features.
Two-sided lighting
The Two-sided lighting checkbox controls the lighting of the model faces. If checked ON,
the model has both sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has the faces lit on the
positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the Face Normals. This
parameter is also available in the property tree.
To flip a feature Direction
1. Click the Flip Feature icon. It enables the tool and shows the normals of all features
present.
2. Select the feature using LMB for which you want to flip the normal.
3. Click [Flip Normals] on the property sheet or click on the arrow tip to flip the normal
direction for the selected feature.
Compare Info
Provides information on compared point cloud (s)/mesh(es)
This option schedules the Comparison Information dialog.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
285
Modified Measured
The Modify Measured Ribbon Group contains a number of tools to modify selected point
clouds and meshes.
Assembly Match
Joins multiple point cloud /meshes together
The Assembly Match tool aligns multiple point cloud s point clouds or meshes together.
This tool is used to remove overlap error that may have arisen after scanning with an
inaccurate system, or if the object was moved between scans. It schedules the Assembly
Match dialog.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
286
The Assembly match dialog
Selection
The Selection fields enable you to select the reference and the moveable cloud / meshes.
When the dialog is dialog is first scheduled, the Moveable selection field is filled in with
all available point cloud/meshes, and the Reference field is empty.
No reference
When this option is checked, then no specific reference clouds/meshes will be used as
reference. None will remain fixed.
[Reselect Reference]
This button defines the current selection of clouds/meshes as the reference clouds/meshes,
i.e. those that will remain fixed during the matching process.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
287
[Reselect Moveable]
This button defines the current selection of clouds/meshes as the moveable
clouds/meshes, i.e. those that will be moved during the matching process. By default all
available clouds/meshes are selected.
Search distance
Points of different point cloud(s)/mesh(es) that are closer than this distance can be
selected as overlapping points.
Min. Improvement
This parameter defines the stopping criteria. When the improvement between successive
iterations is smaller that this value, the assembly match stops.
Points in overlap
This parameter defines the number of points in overlap that will be matched during the
process.
Improvement
These fields are updated during the assembly matching process to provide information.
Number of iterations
The number of the last iteration.
Average distance
The average distance moved by all overlap points of the last iteration.
Improvement
The average improvement of the last iteration.
Number of points
The total of overlap points after the previous iteration.
Cloud
The name of each point cloud/mesh
Improvement
The improvement of this point cloud/mesh after the previous iteration.
Distance
The average distance of all overlap points of this point cloud/mesh to the others, after the
previous iteration.
# of points
The number of points of this point cloud/mesh still in the overlap, after the previous
iteration.
[Start]
This starts the assembly matching process between the defined moveable and reference
cloud/ meshes according to the defined settings. The Information fields are filled in to
monitor progress. Once the process is started, this button is renamed [Stop]. If the process
continues until the required improvement is made, this button is named [Restore].
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
288
[Stop]
Once the assembly matching process has been started, this button stops the process at the
end of the current iteration.
[Restore]
This button appears at the end of the assembly matching process. It will restore the
moveable clouds/meshes to their original location. The button is renamed [Start] and a
new matching process can be started.
[Close]
This button closes the Assembly Match dialog.
To match multiple point cloud/meshes
1. Click on the tool. The dialog opens, all clouds/ meshes are selected as moveable.
2. Select the ones required – if necessary, click [Reselect moveable]
3. Select the reference clouds/meshes (those that will not be moved).
4. Click [Reselect Reference].
5. Set the required process settings.
6. Click [Start]
Information is updated in the Improvement fields.
7. Click [Stop ] if necessary.
8. At the end of the process click [Restore] or [Close].
Select Single Side
Creates a new mesh based on a selected surface
This tool selects surfaces connected to a reference surface within a given angle deviation
tolerance and isolates them into a new separate mesh. The separated mesh can be used as
a stand-alone mesh to compare to the measured models.
This tool is only available when a mesh has been created or imported.
The Select Single Side property sheet
New Name
This field can be used to enter a name for the extracted mesh.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
289
Angle (degrees)
This field specifies the angle deviation tolerance of the surfaces being searched. Any
surface whose slope is equal to or below than the tolerance angle value with respect to the
reference surface can be marked and isolated.
Tolerance
This defines a tolerance on the detection of the surface.
[Run]
The run button initiates the search process according to the Angle value set in the
property sheet.
[Separate Meshes]
This button isolates the surfaces detected and marked by the Run operation into a new
independent mesh.
To isolate a single side mesh
1. Click the Select Single Side tool.
The selection mode is activated.
2. Click the arrow next to the tool to open the property sheet.
3. Select the face in the mesh that you want to be the reference surface. The selected surface
turns red.
Note: If multiple faces from one mesh are selected as reference faces, then only last
selected face is taken as the reference face
4. Set the required Angle.
5. Click with MMB or [Run] in the property sheet to identify the surfaces.
6. Edit the name in the New name field if necessary.
7. Once the surfaces are identified and marked in red, use the MMB in the scene or click the
[Separate Meshes] button to separate the selected faces into an individual mesh.
This new mesh will appear in the Inspection tree with the specified name.
Offset Mesh
Applies an offset to a selected mesh
This tool is available for meshes. It applies an specified offset to the selected mesh.
The Offset Mesh property sheet
Keep copy of original
When checked ON a copy of the original mesh will be retained.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
290
Offset Distance
Defines the offset to be applied to the object in the normal direction. Enter a negative
value to apply the offset in the opposite direction
To apply an offset to a mesh
1. Select the mesh object.
2. Click on the arrow next to the tool to open the property sheet.
3. Enter the required offset. A positive value offsets the mesh in the normal direction.
4. Click the tool to apply the offset.
A new mesh appears in the Inspection tree with a name and the suffix _Offset.
Scale
Scales a selected Point cloud / Mesh / Feature
The tool scales the selected point cloud, mesh or feature according to a defined scale
factor in the X, Y and Z directions. It also enables you change the dimensions of the
pointcloud / mesh / feature from mm to inches and vice versa.
The Scale dialog
Free
When this option is checked then a user defined scaling factor can be entered in the X
field. By default the same scale factor will be applied to in the Y and Z directions unless
the Isotropic scale option is checked off.
Inch-> mm
When this option is checked, a scaling factor of 25.4 will be applied in all directions. A
length of 1 inch will become 25.4mm. This factor can not be edited.
mm-> Inch
When this option is checked, a scaling factor of 1/25.4 (0.03937) will be applied in all
directions. A length of 1 mm will become 0.03937inches..This factor can not be edited.
Isotropic scale
This option is available when a Free scaling factor is selected. When checked 'off' it
enables you to define different scaling factors for the X, Y and Z directions.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
291
To scale the dimensions of a point cloud, mesh or feature
1. Select one or more point cloud, mesh or feature.
2. Click on the Scale tool.
3. Check the Free option.
4. Enter the required scaling factor in the X field.
5. To apply different factors in the Y and Z directions, check the Isotropic scale option off.
6. Enter the required scaling factors.
7. Click [Apply] to apply the scaling factor.
The point cloud/mesh/feature will be a scaled. In the Measured data tree it will appear with the
indication _Scaled.
To convert the dimension units of a point cloud, mesh or feature
1. Select one or more point cloud, mesh or feature.
2. Click on the Scale tool.
3. Select the required conversion option, (inch-mm or mm-inch).
4. Click [Apply] to change the units.
The dimensions of the point cloud/mesh/feature will be adapted. In the Measured data tree it will
appear with the indication _Scaled.
Smooth
Smooths selected clouds or meshes
This tool smooths selected point cloud/mesh. It schedules the Smooth dialog.
The Smooth dialog
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
292
Selection
The Selection field displays the current selection. This selection can be modified using
the [Reselect] button.
[Reselect]
Clicking this button, defines the current selection as the target of the operation.
Settings
The parameters set in these fields define the smoothing process.
Maximum displacement.
This field defines the maximum displacement that can be applied to a point during the
smoothing process.
Number of iterations
This field defines the maximum number of iterations that should be used during the
smoothing process.
Statistics
This area displays information relating to the smoothing process:
- Number of points that have been moved.
- Mean distance moved by the points.
- Standard deviation for the movement.
-The minimum distance moved.
- The maximum distance moved.
[Start]
Clicking on this button starts the smoothing process. During the process the button is
renamed to [Stop]. If the [Stop] button is clicked, the smoothing process is terminated at
the end of the current iteration. When the smoothing process has been stopped this button
is renamed [Undo] and allows you to undo the smoothing process and return the points to
their original positions.
[Close]
This closes the Smooth dialog.
To smooth a point cloud/mesh
1. Select the point clouds/meshes to be smoothed.
2. Click on the tool.
3. Check the selection, [Reselect] if necessary.
4. Enter the smoothing settings.
5. Click [Start].
6. Click [Stop].
7. When the process is complete, click [Restore], to remove the effect of the smoothing or
[Close].
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
293
Reverse Mesh Normals
Switches the direction of selected normals
This tool changes the normals of a mesh
The Reverse Mesh Normals property sheet
[Flip normals]
This changes the direction of the selected normals.
Area
When this options is selected, you can select a number of normals.
Two-sided lighting
The Two-sided lighting checkbox controls the lighting of the model faces. If checked ON,
the model has both sides of its faces lit. If checked OFF, the model has their faces lit on
the positive side only. This tool facilitates the visual inspection of the Face Normals. This
parameter is also available in the Property tree.
To change the direction of normals
1. Click on the tool
2. Open the property sheet.
3. Click on mesh surface.
4. Click with the MMB or click on [Flip normals] in the property sheet.
Duplicate
Duplicates selected point cloud (s) / mesh(s)
The tool copies the selected point clouds or meshes or extracts a point cloud from
comparison information generated in the Compare task.
Note: This operation does not duplicate comparison information.
The Duplicate Property sheet
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
294
Keep copy of Compare object
The copy of Compare object option is only available when comparison information is
selected. If the option is checked ON, the comparison information is maintained and a
point cloud is extracted from this object. If the option is checked OFF, the comparison
information is replaced by a point cloud extracted from this object.
To duplicate a point cloud or mesh
1. Select one or more point cloud or mesh.
2. Click on the arrow next to the tool to open the property sheet.
3. Set the Keep copy of Compare object to the required setting.
4. Click the Duplicate tool.
The point cloud(s)/mesh(s) are duplicated.
Advanced
The Advanced Ribbon Group contains a number of advanced functionalities.
Mirror Objects
Mirror objects around a plane
The Mirror Objects command mirrors selected objects across a specified plane.
Mirror Objects Property Sheet
Plane
This field defines the mirroring plane of the current coordinate system. This has three
predefined planes: XY, YZ and XZ.
Position
The Position field specifies the position of the plane (rendered as translucent gray circular
disc) on the normal axis, e.g. when the XY plane is selected, the Position defines the
plane’s position on the Z-axis.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
295
The current position is indicated in the bottom right hand corner of the screen to aid you
find the required position.
Keep Original
If this option is checked ON, a copy is made when the original object is mirrored. If it is
not checked the object is simply moved to new position on the other side of the mirror
plane.
[Mirror]
This starts the mirror process.
To mirror an object
1. Select a the object to be mirrored on the scene or the Inspection tree.
2. Click the Mirror Objects tool.
The current default plane will appear in the scene, with a rectangular handle to
manipulate it.
Click on the View all tool if necessary if the plane is not visible.
3. Click on the arrow next to the tool if you wish to open the property sheet to adjust the
parameters.
4. Drag the rectangular handle to adjust the position of the plane, or enter the required value
in the Position field.
The current position is indicated in the bottom right hand corner of the screen to aid you
find the required position.
5. Either click the MMB in the scene or click [Mirror] in the property sheet to mirror the
object.
A mirrored version of the solid will appear in the scene and in the Nominal inspection Tree.
Quick Shading
Rapidly generates quick shading
The Compute Quick shading command quickly visualizes a point cloud with shading. This
tool prefers dense and uniformly distributed point cloud(s).
Quick Shading property sheet
Smallest Detail
The Small Detail parameter represents the size of the smallest detail in the point cloud
and also determines the size of the disc that is placed on each point in the point cloud.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
296
[Suggest]
In the case of smooth point clouds, the [Suggest] button finds the size of the smallest
detail available in the point cloud. Respecting this number in the Small Detail data box
ensures good approximation of the underlying form.
Note: This small detail parameter is saved after any modification and is available when the
command is revisited.
To compute quick shading
1. Select the point cloud.
2. Open the Compute Quick Shading Property sheet.
3. Enter a value for Small Detail, or click the Suggest button to update the smallest detail
parameter.
4. Click the Compute Quick Shading icon to see the Quick shading of the point cloud.
Remove Shading
Removes quick shading
Remove Quick Shading command removes the Quick shading mode that was used to
visualize a point cloud with the Quick Shading tool.
To remove quick shading
1. Select the point cloud.
2. Click the Remove tool.
Refine Mesh
Refines a mesh to make smaller triangles
This command subdivides an existing mesh. It divides triangles until their edge length is
smaller than the specified maximum edge length. This allows the smoothing operation to be
less intrusive on highly curved areas, such as leading/trailing edge of turbine blades.
The Refine Mesh property sheet
Maximum Edge Length
The maximum length of any edge in the mesh triangles.
Maximum Number of Iterations
This represents the maximum number of iterations that will be performed in order to achieve the
required triangle edge length. If this maximum number of iterations is reached the mesh is
refined to the length that is achieved at the last iteration.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
297
To refine a mesh
1. Select the mesh that is to be refined.
2. Click on the Refine Mesh tool.
3. Enter the maximum length of the triangle required in the new mesh.
4. Enter the Maximum Number of Iterations
5. Click the icon in the top left corner of the property sheet.
Mesh Volume
Calculates the volume of a mesh
The Mesh Volume command calculates the volume of a mesh.
Note: When the mesh is closed, the enclosed volume is calculated. When the mesh is open, the
volume to the XY-plane is calculated.
To compute the volume of a mesh Volume
1. Select a mesh.
2. Click the Mesh Volume command to calculate the volume. The volume will be displayed
in a dialog box as shown below.
Golden template
Provides an average model of the multiple, similar shape objects
A Golden Template is an average model of the multiple, similar shape objects. Typical
objects are those that can not accurately be produced, e.g. car seats that are composed of
foam on the inside and covered with cloth or leather. This tool enables an average to be
constructed from acceptable objects thus enabling a suitable mold to be constructed. It also
provides some statistical information.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
298
The Golden Template dialog
[Reselect]
This field displays the number of point clouds that are currently selected. When point
clouds are selected in the tree then you can use the [Reselect] button to select them for the
golden template computation.
Search Distance
The value entered in this field defines a range over which points will be included in the
averaging process.
Statistics
When this option is checked 'on', then a set of statistics are computed as well as the
average point cloud. These statistics are illustrated in the figure below.
The statistics provided are :
Max Deviation
max. distance for each point. In the drawing below this is -5
Min Deviation
representing min. distance for each point. In the drawing below this is +2
Range
representing the range of each point = 8 (3+5)
6Sigma
representing the 6Sigma variation of all distances of each point.
[Compute]
This calculates the average point cloud and statistics if requested. The average point cloud
appears in the Measured section of the data tree. The statistics appear in the Comparison
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
299
folder of the Inspect section of the data tree. The statistics can also be displayed in a
flyout.
To compute a golden template point cloud
1. Select the point clouds to be included in the averaging process.
(If no clouds are specifically selected, then all available will be included.)
2. Click on the Golden Template tool.
3. To change the original selection, select point clouds in the tree or the display and then
click [Reselect].
4. Enter a distance over which the points will be included in the average.
5. Check the Statistics button if you want to see a set of statistics relating to the collection of
point clouds.
6. Click [Compute].
7. The Average point cloud will appear in the Measured section of the tree.
8. The statistics will appear in the Comparison folder of the Inspect section of the data tree.
They will also appear in the "Golden Template Statistics" dialog.
This dialog can be re-opened by selecting the statistics in the tree and clicking on the
Colors tool in the Info toolbar.
9. The statistics can be visualized for any point as a flyout.
Align task
The Align task is used to align the measured data set to the nominal dataset. It includes tools to:
Align models using a variety of methods.
Align section, using 2D Best Fit.
Manage the models using the Alignment Manager.
Orient the models by translating or rotating them.
Ribbon groups
The Align task includes the following Ribbon Groups:
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
300
Align
Orient
Note that Feature Flyout tools are available from the general toolbar.
Align
The Align Ribbon Group contains commands to align the measured data to the nominal model or
a measured section to the nominal section.
Align N Points
Moves and rotates objects to align them using multiple points
The Align N Points tool is used to align a measured data to a nominal model or specific
locations using N source and N target points. Constraints can be defined for each
individual couple resulting in a constrained alignment. An alignment will minimize the
distance for each set of corresponding points. This tool enables you to create a new
alignment or combine the alignment with an existing one.
Note: The Align N Points tool only is active when there is at least one measured object available in
the scene.
The Align N Points dialog box
This dialog contains two tabs that list the selected pairs of points as well as the constraints
applied to their movement and the results of their alignment.
Create new
When this option is checked, this field shows the name that will be assigned to a new alignment.
A default name is proposed. A user-defined name can be entered.
Update existing
When this option is selected, the new alignment will be combined with the existing alignment
that is selected from the drop-down list.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
301
The Points tab
On/Off light switch
The green light button indicates that the corresponding couple is complete and therefore
available for the alignment process. Clicking the green light toggles to red light button
and vice versa. The red light button indicates that the couple is deactivated: it will not
take part in the alignment calculation and its display is also temporarily removed from the
scene.
Measured point (Actuals)
Measured point – Actuals lists the coordinates of the picked source point. Points can be
selected either on the point cloud or on a section.
Model point (Nominals)
Model point – Nominals lists the coordinates of the target point. This can be either a point
that has been picked on a nominal model, or manually entered coordinates. Points can be
selected point clouds / meshes / features or sections.
Constraints
The Constraints check boxes offer the option for the alignment to use movement/rotation
relative to the X, Y and Z axes of the current coordinate system.
[Pick Points]
The Pick Points button allows picking additional couples of points for the N point
alignment. Clicking the Pick Points button will hide the dialog box from the scene. Once
the points are created or edited, apply the MMB to bring back the hidden dialog box.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
302
[Align]
The [Align] button initiates the alignment process using the active (green light) couples.
The Points tab switches to the Results tab as soon as the Alignment process is finished.
Apart from the alignment process, clicking the [Align] button also creates an Alignment
node with the Alignment name added under the Alignments of the Inspection tree.
[Restore]
The [Restore] button restores the applied alignment process to the state before alignment.
This button is grayed out as long as the alignment is not calculated.
[Close]
The [Close] button quits the Align N Points tool. The couples are removed from the
scene.
The Results tab
The results tab in the Align N Points dialog box becomes active and available when the Apply
button is clicked. The results tab displays the deviations between each set of corresponding
points and the constraints set. The constraints are not editable, but are only displayed as
information to evaluate the resulting deviations.
dX, dY, dZ
These columns represent the remaining distance in the various directions between the
source and target point.
d 3D
The d 3D column represents the remaining distance in 3 dimensions between the source
and target point.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
303
Constraints
The Constraints check boxes display the applied constraints, as information to evaluate
the resulting deviations. The Constraint check boxes are not editable and are grayed out.
[Align]
If the alignment process has not been applied or has been restored, the Apply button
applies the alignment process.
Note: While in the Results tab, the user can switch back to the Points tab manually. After switching
to the Points tab the green/red lights, coordinates and constraints can be edited. The [Align] button
in this case starts aligning from the original location of the point cloud/mesh i.e. the location prior
to starting the Align N Points tool.
[Restore]
The Restore button resets the process. Clicking the Restore button restores the scene to
the original state with the models in their original location and the tab switches to Points
tab.
[Close]
This quits the Align N Points tool. The couples are removed from the scene.
To align measured data to a nominal model
In order to perform this operation, there needs to be at least one nominal and one measured object
in the Nominal and Measured panels of the Inspection tree.
1. The two objects need to be available in the scene. Click on the View all icon in the tool
bar to zoom the view to include the two.
Or create a dual window layout from the Views menu.
2. Click the Align N Points tool to schedule the Align N Points dialog box.
3. To create a new alignment, check the "Create new" options and enter a name for the
Alignment, if this is to be different to the default one.
To combine this alignment with an existing one, check the "Update existing" option and
select the existing alignment to be updated.
4. Place the mouse over the measured data object and observe the pointer changing to a plus
sign (+, crosshair). LMB click to create a source point. You can select point on either the
point cloud or on a section that has been created on the measured model.
With a band line attached to the pointer, LMB click on a corresponding point on the
nominal model to define the target point of the couple. The target point can be on the
model or on a section.
Once a source point is selected, the colors of the numbers of the points on the measured
objects are colored red and the points on the nominal model are colored green.
Once the target point is picked, a line segment (couple) will appear from the selected
source point on the measured data to the current mouse position located at the target point
on the nominal model. The attributes of the couple are posted in the Align N points dialog
box.
5. Create more couples by picking corresponding points on the measured and nominal
model. Only one couple is required to create an alignment is one, but you can define
more. A row of data is added in the Align N Points dialog box for every couple.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
304
6. Click [Align] to initiate the alignment process.
The corresponding point pairs are matched (aligned) by minimizing the sum of square
distances between them. An Align node with the Alignment name is added under the
Alignments section in the Inspection tree.
Note: The performance of the alignment varies with the size of the models and the number and
complexity of the pairs.
To Align Measured data to define locations
In order to perform this operation, there needs to be at least one measured object available.
1. Click the Align N Points tool to schedule the Align N Points dialog box.
2. To create a new alignment, check the "Create new" options and enter a name for the
Alignment, if this is to be different to the default one.
To combine this alignment with an existing one, check the "Update existing" option and
select the existing alignment to be updated.
3. Place the mouse over the measured data object and click on the required source point.
This can be either a point on the point cloud or a section.
The coordinates of this point will appear in the dialog under the Measured point (Actuals)
list.
4. In the corresponding fields for the Model point (Nominals) enter the coordinates of the
point to which the measured data must be aligned.
5. Press the <Enter> key and the couple will appear in the screen; the measured point
indicated in red and the defined point in green.
6. Create as many alignment couples as are required in the same way. .
7. Click [Align] to initiate the alignment process.
To change the position of points
1. Mouse over the source or target point until the cross hair changes to a small box.
2. With the small box displayed click and drag on the model to relocate the point’s end point
location.
To remove points
1. Mouse over the anchor until the couple is highlighted with a gray box. Press the Ctrl key
on the keyboard, and LMB click on the highlighted anchor to delete it.
2. Press the Ctrl key and mouse over a couple to see a crossed X display, indicating that the
couple is ready to be deleted. LMB click the couple to delete it. Once a couple is deleted,
the couple’s attributes in the dialog box are removed, and the number of the rest of the
couples is updated.
To delete all the points
1. Click the Close button to quit the Align N Points tool and restart.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
305
Align 6 Points
Aligns two models using 6 points
This tool allows you to make an alignment between the measured and the nominal models
by selecting up to 6 pairs of matching points. It schedules the Align 6 points dialog.
The Align 6 points dialog
This dialog has two tabs. In the Points tab the pairs of points to be aligned are selected.
Once the alignment has been made, the Results tab is available to show the results of the
alignment.
The Points tab
Create new
When this option is checked, this field shows the name that will be assigned to a new alignment.
A default name is proposed. A user-defined name can be entered.
Update existing
When this option is selected, the new alignment will be combined with the existing
alignment that is selected from the drop-down list.
Measured point (Actuals)
This table shows the coordinates of the points that are selected on the Measured model.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
306
Model point (Nominals)
This table shows the coordinates of the corresponding points that are selected on the
Nominal model.
Constraints
These check boxes indicate whether movement is permitted relative to the X, Y and Z
axes of the coordinate system.
[Align]
This starts the alignment between the points on the Actual and the Nominal model. The
Points tab switches to the Results tab as soon as the Alignment process is finished. The
alignment will appear in the Inspection tree with the given name.
The Results tab
dX, dY, dZ d 3D
These fields indicate the remaining distance in the various directions between the source
and target point. The d 3D column represents the remaining distance in 3 dimensions.
Constraints
The Constraints check boxes display the constraints that were applied during the
alignment.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
307
[Restore]
This button removes the effect of the alignment.
[Close]
This closes the Align 6 Points tool. The pairs are removed from the scene.
To make an alignment using 6 points
There must be at least one nominal and one measured object in the Nominal and Measured panels
of the Inspection tree.
1. Place the two objects in the scene. Click on the View all icon in the tool bar to zoom the
view to include the two. Alternatively select a view layout from the View menu that
includes two windows and then select a model, a window, then click on the View selected
tool.
2. Click the Align 6 Points tool to schedule the Align 6 Points dialog box.
3. To create a new alignment, check the "Create new" options and enter a name for the
Alignment, if this is to be different to the default one.
To combine this alignment with an existing one, check the "Update existing" option and
select the existing alignment to be updated.
4. Place the mouse over the measured data object, and observe the pointer changing to a plus
sign (+, crosshair). LMB click to create a source point.
With a band line attached to the pointer, LMB click on a corresponding point on the
nominal model to plant the target point of the pair.
Once the target point is picked, a line segment (couple) will appear from the selected
source point on the measured data to the current mouse position located at the target point
on the nominal model. The attributes of the couple is posted in the Align N points dialog
box.
5. Create more pairs by picking corresponding points on the measured and nominal model.
6. Click the Align button to initiate the alignment process.
The corresponding point pairs are matched (aligned) minimizing the sum of square
distances between them. Information is displayed in the Results tab. An Align node with
the Alignment name is added under the Alignments in the Inspection tree.
7. Click [Restore] to reject the alignment or [Close] to accept it.
Iterative N Points Alignment
Aligns a measured object to a number of defined nominal points by searching for the corresponding measured points in a nominal direction
This tool allows you to align a measured model to a number of defined points and
directions. The nominal alignment points are given and the corresponding measured points
are automatically searched for in a nominal direction.
This tool is available when you have
nominal 'points for directional compare',
OR nominal 'feature points and a nominal solid / mesh' and a measurement point cloud /
mesh,
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
308
AND an initial alignment has been made using Best Fit for example.
The Iterative N Points Alignment dialog
This dialog has two tabs. In the Points tab the pairs of points to be aligned are selected.
Once the alignment has been made, the Results tab is available to show the results of the
alignment.
The Points tab
Create new
When this option is checked, this field shows the name that will be assigned to a new alignment.
A default name is proposed. A user-defined name can be entered.
Update existing
When this option is selected, the new alignment will be combined with the existing
alignment that is selected from the drop-down list.
Selection
This area shows the current selection of Moveable (Measured) and Nominal objects.
Moveable
This field shows the number of measured points that have been pre-selected in the
Inspection tree. If objects are pre-selected, only those will be moved according to the
alignment. If no pre-selection is made all visible measured objects will be moved.
The current selection can be adapted by selecting the required items in the Inspection tree
and clicking [Reselect Moveable].
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
309
Nominal
It is not necessary to preselect a nominal model. Nominal points are required.
Minimal improvement
In aligning the measured model to fit to the defined nominal points, an iterative process is
used to find the optimum position of the measured object. This field enables you to set
limit on the improvement that will be searched for in successive iterations.
Points
Any number of nominal points can be selected for the alignment. These each have a
number. From the drop down list you can select from all the 2D features and feature
points that are present in the nominal model that will be used for the alignment. Each time
a feature point is selected, a new field appears
Items included in the list are feature points and surface points.
Points for which a direction has been defined are indicated with a green light. Those
which are selected but which do not have a direction defined are shown with an orange
light. Each time a point is selected a new field opens.
To exclude a point from the alignment, click on the green button to turn it red.
X, Y Z
For each point, these fields display the coordinates of the selected feature.
Search direction
For each point, these fields display the direction associated with the point or feature. This
is the direction in which the corresponding measured points will be searched for. These
values can be edited manually to define a specific direction.
If the direction is unknown you can use the [Detect IJK] button to determine it.
[Detect IJK]
Computes the (normal) search direction. It is available when XYZ points are entered and
a nominal solid/mesh is selected.
Constraints
These check boxes indicate whether movement is permitted relative to the X, Y and Z
axes of the coordinate system.
[Align]
This starts the alignment process. This button will only be available once points,
directions and the constraints have been defined. If successful then the Results tab will be
available in which the deviations (movements) will be listed.
The Results tab
The results tab shows the remaining deviations between each aligned point-pair, together with the
set Search direction and constraints. The remaining deviations, Search direction and constraints
are not editable, only displayed as information to evaluate the resulting deviations.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
310
dX, dY, dZ
For each point, these fields list the remaining deviations between each aligned point-pair.
Search direction
For each point, these fields display the search direction used for the alignment. These
fields are for information only and can not be edited.
Constraints
The Constraints check boxes display the constraints that were applied during the
alignment.
[Restore]
This button removes the effect of the alignment.
[Close]
This closes the Iterative N Points Alignment tool. The pairs are removed from the scene.
To make an iterative N points alignment
1. You need to have nominal points for directional compare or points and a nominal solid
/mesh as well as and a measured point cloud / mesh. The nominal points should be
selected within the body of the nominal model, points that are on the edge will be
unlikely to find point cloud points in their normal direction.
2. To convert nominal point to surface points you can use the Surface Points from Points
tool in the Feature Fitting ribbon group.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
311
3. Make an initial alignment using the Best Fit tool for example, which uses all the points.
The Iterative N Points alignment tool allows you to make a more accurate alignments
based on the selected points.
4. Click on the Iterative N Points Alignment tool.
5. To create a new alignment, check the "Create new" options and enter a name for the
Alignment, if this is to be different to the default one.
To combine this alignment with an existing one, check the "Update existing" option and
select the existing alignment to be updated.
6. Define the minimum improvement if different from the default.
7. For each of the six points, select the required nominal point / surface point from the drop
down list.
8. Define the direction to be used for the search. This can be either:
- filled automatically when a direction is associated with the surface point/feature,
- computed using [Detect IJK] in the case of nominal points and a nominal solid / mesh
- entered manually by the user.
9. Edit the Constraints if necessary.
10. When the [Align] button is available, click it to start the alignment.
11. If successful, the alignment appears in the tree, the objects are moved.
Use [Restore] if necessary.
12. When the alignment is complete, click [Close] to close the dialog.
Best Fit
Matches a point cloud to nominal objects using 6DOF best fit
The Best Fit tool aligns selected measured data to all visible or selected nominal models.
The result of the alignment operation appears as an entry in the Inspection tree. A Best Fit
alignment is an iterative process using the condition of minimizing the square of the
distance between the nominal and measured data to converge on a solution. it also
provides a mechanism to adapt the fit to attain positive deviations only between the
moveable and the fixed objects. The measured data can be a combination of meshes and
point clouds. The nominal models can be any combination of solids, meshes, and point
clouds.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
312
The Best Fit dialog box
The Best Fit dialog box has following parameters:
Create new
When this option is checked, this field shows the name that will be assigned to a new alignment.
A default name is proposed. A user-defined name can be entered.
Update existing
When this option is selected, the new alignment will be combined with the existing alignment
that is selected from the drop-down list.
[Reselect Movable]
This field displays the number of objects selected in the Measured section of the data tree
when the dialog was opened. Only measured data can be moveable. To change the
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
313
selection of measured data, select or de-select the items in the data tree and then click
[Reselect Movable].
[Reselect Nominal]
This field displays the number of objects selected in the Nominal section of the data tree
when the dialog was opened. The selected nominal data will remain fixed during the
alignment process..To change the selection of nominal data, select or de-select the items
in the data tree and then click [Reselect Nominal].
Minimal Improvement
The Minimal Improvement parameter represents the criteria used to determine when the
best fit alignment is achieved. If the movement required during any one iteration is
greater than the value specified here, then further iterations will continue until the
movement is less than the specified value. The minimal improvement value is saved
during and in between sessions.
Auto Start Orientation
When this option is checked ON, the orientation (as well as the position) of the moveable
objects will adapted so that it matches that of the fixed objects at the start of the
alignment process. This makes the alignment more robust as it eliminates the importance
of the orientation of the Measured object prior to starting the Best Fit.
Positive Deviations Only
When this option is checked ON, then the best fit alignment will be optimised to
maximize the number of positive deviations. This means that every effort will be made to
ensure that the nominal object fits within the measure (point cloud) object. It is also
possible to apply constraints on the degrees of freedom used in the alignment as explained
below.
Degrees of Freedom
By default the best fit alignment process allows movement in 6 degrees of freedom (3
translational and 3 rotational). You can restrict the degrees of freedom used in the process
by clicking on the [Edit] button, and selecting the degrees of freedom required.
Click [OK] button to confirm the selected degrees of freedom and close the dialog box.
Click the Cancel button to close the dialog box without modifying the degrees of
freedom. The Options section in the Best Fit dialog box will display the selected degrees
of freedom.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
314
Transformation Info
This field shows the translation and rotation applied to the moveable (measured) data
following the best fit alignment.
[Apply]
This button initiates the Best Fit alignment. During alignment, the status bar displays the
number of the iterations done, the average distance between the movable and nominal
models at that moment and the improvement compared to the previous iteration. The
scene is dynamically updated.
A Stop button is also provided that allows you to terminate the process.
When the matching has finished, the status bar shows the matching result.
On successful completion of the best fit alignment process, the alignment name is added
under the Alignments node in the Inspection tree.
[Restore]
The Restore button sets the movable entities back to their location prior to the opening of
the Best Fit dialog box. The Restore button is available when the fitting was manually
stopped or after the completion of the Best fit process.
[Close]
This closes the Best Fit dialog.
To make a best fit alignment between measured and nominal objects
This process requires that measured and nominal models exist in the Inspection tree.
1. Click on the Best fit tool.
2. If no objects were pre-selected, all the objects will be selected by default.
To change the selection, select the objects to be moved and click [Reselect moveable].
Select the objects to remain fixed and click [Reselect Nominal].
3. Define the alignment parameters.
4. Click [Apply] to start the best fit alignment process.
5. You may need to adjust the view to bring the model back into the scene. Click on the
View all tool in the main tool bar to do this.
6. If you are happy with the alignment that you can click the [Close] button. Otherwise click
[Restore] to remove the applied translations and rotations from the moveable object.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
315
2D Best Fit
Matches a measured section to a nominal section using 6 DOF best fit
The 2D Best Fit aligns measured section objects and section compare objects to the
respective nominal sections, minimizing the average square distance. The measured objects
are measured 2D sections. The nominal objects are nominal 2D sections. For compared
sections, the measured and nominal sections are within the compare section object. The
result is an alignment that is added to the list of alignments and all involved measured
sections are re-positioned. 2D Best Fit alignment is an iterative process where each fitting
is attempted repeatedly over the previous state, with the condition of minimizing the square
of the distance between the nominal and measured sections.
Note: The 2D Best Fit tool is only active when there is at least one nominal and one measured
section or one compare section object available in the scene.
The 2D Best Fit dialog box
The 2D Best Fit dialog box has following parameters:
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
316
Create new
When this option is checked, this field shows the name that will be assigned to a new alignment.
A default name is proposed. A user-defined name can be entered.
Update existing
When this option is selected, the new alignment will be combined with the existing alignment
that is selected from the drop-down list.
[Reselect All]
The Movable data field in the Selection group lists the sections that will be aligned to the
nominal sections. The Nominal data box in the Selection group lists the sections to which
the movable sections are aligned. To modify the current selection, manually select the
movable sections, nominal sections & compare section objects and press the Reselect All
button. In the Movable text field, the “1 + 1” represents the “number of measured sections
in the Measured tree + number of measured sections in the compare section objects”. The
content of the Nominal text field is composed in the same way.
Independent Measured Objects
When this option is checked, all the entities are best fitted separately. When each best fit
is done, a new alignment is made with the name of the measured object.
When this option is unchecked, all measured sections are best fitted as one to all nominal.
Minimal Improvement
The Minimal Improvement data box displays the user defined stop criterion. At the end of
each best fit iteration, the improvement of the average distance is checked. If the average
distance has improved more than the Minimal Improvement value, then the best fit
alignment will continue with the next iteration to find a better fit. If the improvement of
the matching distance between two iterations is smaller than the indicated Minimal
Improvement value, the matching stops.
Note: The Minimal Improvement value is saved both during and in between sessions.
Degrees of Freedom
On clicking the [Edit] button, the Transformation Constraints dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box contains check boxes for the rotation and for the three translation
components X, Y, and Z. The degrees of freedom that are checked, will be used in the
best fit. The degrees of freedom that are unchecked will not be used in the best fit.
Click [OK] to confirm the selected degrees of freedom and close the Transformation
Constraints dialog box. Click the Cancel button to close the Transformation Constraints
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
317
dialog box without modifying the degrees of freedom. The Options section in the 2D Best
Fit dialog box will display the selected degrees of freedom.
Transformation Info
After completion of the Best Fit alignment, the Transformation Info section in the 2D
Best Fit dialog box is updated with the alignment result, i.e. the rotation and translation
components of measured data around XYZ.
[Apply]
The Apply button initiates the Best Fit alignment. During alignment, the status bar
displays the number of the iterations done, the average distance between the movable and
nominal models at that moment and the improvement compared to the previous iteration.
The scene is dynamically updated.
During matching, the status bar also contains a [Stop] button that allows the user to
terminate the matching at any time.
When the matching has finished, the status bar shows the matching result.
Note: If the matching is terminated before attaining the requested minimal improvement, the user
can restore the objects to the initial location while the dialog is still open.
On successful completion of the best fit alignment process, the alignment name is added
under the Alignments node in the Inspection tree.
Note: The 2D best fit is only possible if both the measured and nominal sections are parallel. If not,
the Transformation Info section in the 2D Best Fit dialog box will display a message.
[Restore]
The Restore button sets the movable entities back to their location prior to the opening of
the 2D Best Fit dialog box. The Restore button is enabled when the fitting was manually
stopped or after the completion of the 2D best fit process.
[Close]
The Close button quits the 2D Best Fit tool.
Note: Once the 2D Best Fit dialog box is closed, the transformation of the measured data cannot be
undone. 2D Best Fit workflows are based on selection. These selections can be edited at any
moment.
To make a 2D- best fit alignment between measured and nominal objects
Best fit alignment requires that measured and nominal sections exist in the Nominal and
Measured panels of the Inspection tree. You can select the sections to be aligned before the
operation if needed. If no models are pre-selected all models will be selected by default.
1. Click on the 2D Best fit tool.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
318
2. If no objects were pre-selected, all the objects will be selected by default.
To change the selection, re-select the objects to be moved and click [Reselect All].
3. Define the alignment parameters.
4. Click [Apply] button to start the best fit alignment process.
Align 3-2-1
Aligns features based on planes lines and points
This tool enables you to align features using four methods based on the selection of Planes,
Points and Lines.
Align 3-2-1 dialog
Create new
When this option is checked, this field shows the name that will be assigned to a new alignment.
A default name is proposed. A user-defined name can be entered.
Update existing
When this option is selected, the new alignment will be combined with the existing
alignment that is selected from the drop-down list.
[Reselect Movable]
The field shows the current number of measured features selected. When different
features are selected in the tree, use the [Reselect Movable] button to select them for the
operation.
[Reselect Nominal]
The field shows the current number of nominal features selected. When different features
are selected in the tree, use the [Reselect Nominal] button to select them for the operation.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
319
Method
A list containing the available alignment methods. Each of these methods is described in
more detail below.
Measured
The selection of the measured features to be aligned. The features selected depend on the
method selected.
Nominal
The selection of the nominal feature to be aligned. The features selected depend on the
method selected.
Offset
When an offset is defined, the nominal feature is offset with this value.
[Apply]
Applies the alignment as defined by the selection of measured and nominal features
defined by the method.
[Restore]
This button becomes sensitive after the [Apply] button has been used. It restores the
objects to their original positions.
[Close]
Closes the Align 3-2-1 dialog.
Plane-Line-Point
When this method is selected, the Measured plane will be aligned to the target plane. The
remaining degrees of freedom are translations inside the plane and rotations around the normal of
the plane. When an offset is entered, the Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.
The Measured line will be projected in the Measured plane and aligned to the Nominal target
line. The line indicates the main direction.
The remaining degree of freedom is a translation in the direction of the line.
The Measured point will be projected to the Measured plane and then to the projected Measured
line and will fix the last constraint.
To align features using the Plane-Line-Point method
This method requires that nominal and measured planes, lines and point features have been
detected.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
320
1. Click on the Align 3-2-1 tool.
2. Select the Plane-Line-Point method from the drop down menu.
3. To create a new alignment, check the "Create new" options and enter a name for the
Alignment, if this is to be different to the default one.
To combine this alignment with an existing one, check the "Update existing" option and
select the existing alignment to be updated.
4. Click in the Measured column and select the measured plane to be aligned from those
available.
5. Click in the Nominal column and select the target plane to be aligned from those
available.
6. Define an offset if required.
7. Click in the Measured column and select the measured line to be aligned from those
available.
8. Click in the Nominal column and select the target line.
9. Click in the Measured column and select the measured point from those available.
10. Click in the Nominal column and select the target point from those available.
11. Click [Apply] to align the features..
12. Click [Restore] to restore the objects, or [Close] to close the dialog.
Plane-Line-Line
The Measured plane will be aligned to the target plane. The remaining degrees of freedom are
translations inside the plane and rotations around the normal of the plane. When an offset is
entered, the Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.
The Measured line will be projected in the Measured plane and aligned to the Nominal target
line. The projected line indicates the main direction.
The remaining degree of freedom is a translation in the direction of the line.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
321
The second Measured line will also be projected in the Measured plane and intersected with the
first projected line. The intersection point will fix the last constraint.
To align features using the Plane-Line-Line method
This method requires that nominal and measured planes and lines features have been detected.
1. Click on the Align 3-2-1 tool.
2. Select the Plane-Line-Line method from the drop down menu.
3. To create a new alignment, check the "Create new" options and enter a name for the
Alignment, if this is to be different to the default one.
To combine this alignment with an existing one, check the "Update existing" option and
select the existing alignment to be updated.
4. Click in the Measured column and select the measured plane to be aligned from those
available.
5. Click in the Nominal column and select the target plane to be aligned from those
available.
6. Define an offset if required.
7. Click in the Measured column and select the measured line to be aligned from those
available.
8. Click in the Nominal column and select the target line.
9. Click in the third Measured column and select the measured line from those available.
10. Click in the third Nominal column and select the target line from those available.
11. Click [Apply] to align the features..
12. Click [Restore] to restore the objects, or [Close] to close the dialog.
Plane-Plane-Point
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
322
The Measured plane will be aligned to the target plane. The remaining degrees of freedom are
translations inside the plane and rotations around the normal of the plane. When an offset is
entered, the Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.
The second Measured plane will be intersected with the first Measured plane and the intersection
line aligned to the target line. The line indicates the main direction.
The remaining degree of freedom is a translation in the direction of the line.
The Measured point will be projected to the Measured plane and than to the intersection line and
will fix the last constraint.
To align features using the Plane-Plane-Point method
This method requires that nominal and measured planes and point features have been detected.
1. Click on the Align 3-2-1 tool.
2. Select the Plane-Plane-Point method from the drop down menu.
3. To create a new alignment, check the "Create new" options and enter a name for the
Alignment, if this is to be different to the default one.
To combine this alignment with an existing one, check the "Update existing" option and
select the existing alignment to be updated.
4. Click in the Measured column and select the measured plane to be aligned from those
available.
5. Click in the Nominal column and select the target plane to be aligned from those
available.
6. Define an offset if required.
7. Click in the Measured column and select the second measured plane to be aligned from
those available.
8. Click in the Nominal column and select the second target plane from those available
9. Define an offset if required.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
323
10. Click in the Measured column and select the measured point from those available.
11. Click in the Nominal column and select the target point from those available.
12. Click [Apply] to align the features..
13. Click [Restore] to restore the objects, or [Close] to close the dialog.
Plane-Plane-Plane
The Measured plane will be aligned to the target plane. The remaining degrees of freedom are
translations inside the plane and rotations around the normal of the plane.When an offset is
entered, the Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.
The second Measured plane will be intersected with the first plane and the intersection line
aligned to the target line. The line indicates the main direction. When an offset is entered, the
Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.
The remaining degree of freedom is a translation in the direction of the line.
The third Measured plane will be intersected with the first plane and the intersection line
intersected with line created by the first two surfaces. The intersection point will fix the last
constraint. When an offset is entered, the Nominal plane is internally offset with this value.
To align features using the Plane-Plane-Plane method
This method requires that nominal and measured planes features have been detected.
1. Click on the Align 3-2-1 tool.
2. Select the Plane-Plane-Plane method from the drop down menu.
3. To create a new alignment, check the "Create new" options and enter a name for the
Alignment, if this is to be different to the default one.
To combine this alignment with an existing one, check the "Update existing" option and
select the existing alignment to be updated.
4. Click in the Measured column and select the first measured plane to be aligned from
those available.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
324
5. Click in the Nominal column and select the target plane to be aligned from those
available.
6. Define an offset if required.
7. Click in the Measured column and select the second measured plane to be aligned from
those available.
8. Click in the Nominal column and select the second target plane from those available
9. Define an offset if required.
10. Click in the Measured column and select the third measured plane from those available.
11. Click in the Nominal column and select the third target plane from those available.
12. Click [Apply] to align the features..
13. Click [Restore] to restore the objects, or [Close] to close the dialog.
RPS alignment
Invokes RPS alignment
The RPS tool aligns objects and features by subsequently fixing the known degrees of
freedom to a reference position and matching the remaining degrees of freedom while
maintaining the fixed ones.
The RPS tool aligns measured features or objects to corresponding nominal features or
objects by specifying constraints between them. This fixes specific degrees of freedom and
the alignment is made by matching remaining degrees of freedom. The complete alignment
is made by defining a series of constraints.
The RPS alignment dialog box
This dialog allows you to define a series of constraint. Each constraint applies to a particular
feature of object. A constraint can be applied in a series of steps each of which can have a
different weighting.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
325
Constraint Type
A constraint is applied to a pair of features or objects. The constraint can be defined in
two ways:
UCS When this button is checked, the constraint will be defined in a User Coordinate System
(UCS)
Feature
When this option is checked, the constraint will be defined in terms of the feature
characteristics.
Measured
This field enables you to choose the measured feature, area or a point to be picked. This
item will be moved during the alignment.
Nominal
This field enables you to select the nominal feature that corresponds to the selected
measured feature.
Editable fields will appear in which you can specify an offset to be applied to the feature,
that will be taken into account during the alignment.
Constraint
The Constraint drop down list, shows all the possible constraints that can be applied to the
selected measures/nominal features.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
326
Multiple constraints can be applied to these features in different steps. Each step can carry
a different weighting.
If the measured feature is a point cloud area to match to the selected reference faces, the
matching will respect the constraints set in the previous steps. Since matching will
determine all remaining degrees of freedom, it is intended to be used as the last step of the
alignment.
Weight
The Weight parameter represents the relative importance of the constraints in a single
step.
Create new
When this option is checked, this field shows the name that will be assigned to a new alignment.
A default name is proposed. A user-defined name can be entered.
Update existing
When this option is selected, the new alignment will be combined with the existing alignment
that is selected from the drop-down list.
[Apply]
The Apply button starts the alignment. The measured objects are aligned according to the
constraints.
[Restore]
The Restore button restores the measured objects to their original positions.
[Close]
Closes the RPS alignment dialog box. On successful completion of the RPS alignment
process, the alignment appears under the Alignments node in the Inspection tree.
To make an RPS alignment
This function requires that features have been defined on the Measured and the Nominal model.
1. Click on the RPS tool.
2. Define the alignment constraints for the first step.
3. Click on either the UCS or the Feature button.
For details on the different types of feature constraints see the examples below.
4. From the Measured drop down list, select the measured feature to be aligned.
5. From the Nominal drop down list, select the corresponding nominal feature.
6. Define an offset if necessary if you require the measured item to be displaced from he
exact position of the nominal item.
7. From the Constraint drop down box, select the first constraint to be applied.
8. Enter a weighting to this constraint.
9. To define a second constraint on these features, increase the step number.
Choose a new constraint and define a weighting.
10. Select another feature or object and define a new stage in the alignment process.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
327
11. To create a new alignment, check the "Create new" options and enter a name for the
Alignment, if this is to be different to the default one.
To combine this alignment with an existing one, check the "Update existing" option and
select the existing alignment to be updated.
12. Click [Apply] to start the alignment.
The measured model will be moved to align to the nominal one.
Example of defining an alignment using feature constraints
The example below shows an alignment based on a set of feature properties.
In the first stage a pair of circles are aligned so that their centres coincide.
In a second stage a pair of lines are made to coincided.
In a final stage two planes are aligned to be parallel.
Example of an alignment using UCS constraints
The example below shows an alignment based on coordinate system constraints
In the first stage a measured and nominal round slot are constrained to align in the X and the Y
direction. This is achieved through two steps, each of which have the same weighting. In each
case the coordinates of the centre of the slots are displayed.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
328
In a second stage a measured and nominal plane are constrained to align in the Z direction. The
coordinates of the centre of the planes are displayed.
In a final stage selected points are constrained to align in the XYZ direction.
When selecting the option "Picked point" you can either pick corresponding points on the
measured or nominal models or enter the coordinates directly in the input fields.
Enter a matching UCS constraint in the RPS alignment dialog box
1. Check the UCS radio button. The next constraints field will appear in the RPS alignment
dialog box.
2. In the Measured drop down list, select a feature area/ feature point. A set of three edit
boxes shows the center of the area/point.
3. In the Nominal drop down list, select Picked reference/ 3D features. If it is a picked
reference two sets of edit boxes will appear: an empty box and a set of edit boxes to input
the offset to take into account during feature alignment.
4. If the nominal entity type is a Picked Reference, then pick the reference models to align
the feature area/ feature point to. The names of the picked reference faces are listed in the
text box.
5. Optionally enter the offset to take into account during alignment in the edit boxes. In the
right-most edit box, you can enter the offset to take into account for an individual
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
329
reference entity. You can set individual offset values for each reference entity or choose
to set the same offset value for all. In the latter case, enter the common offset value in the
leftmost edit box and press the Set button.
6. In the Constraint drop down list, select the constraint to fix. You can choose to fix a
single coordinate or to match the point cloud / mesh area to the picked reference objects.
In the latter case, the matching will respect the constraints set in the previous steps.
Note: Since matching will determine all remaining degrees of freedom, it is intended to be used as
the last step of alignment
Alignment Manager
Manages the application of alignments on models
This tool provides a number of operations allowing management of alignment
transformations. Every alignment operation creates a named transformation. The default
name consists of an alignment method-specific part and a suffix number. The suffix number
starts with (1) in case no specific alignment of its type already exists, e.g. Align (1), Align
(2), Best Fit (1), etc.
The Alignment Manager dialog
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
330
Transformations
A list of all existing transformations is presented. These can also be seen under the
Alignments node of the Inspection tree.
[Import]
The Import button imports a transformation from an .mtf file (Metris Transformation
File). The imported transformation is added to the list of the transformations in the
Transformations list. Its name is read from the file. In case of conflicts, a serial number is
added at the end of the imported name, e.g. if Best Fit(1) is available and if Best Fit (1)
imported, then Best Fit (1) is renamed as Best Fit (2).
[Export]
The Export button exports the pre-selected transformation to a file with extension .mtf
(Metris Transformation File).
[Invert]
The Invert transformation button inverts the pre-selected transformation from the
Transformations list. A new transformation with an inverted matrix of the selected
transformation will be created. This inverted transformation is available in the Alignment
Manager.
[Combine]
This button combines multiple transformations into a single one. Pressing the Combine
button opens the Group Transformations dialog box, see the chapter on combining
transformations for more information.
Sections
These buttons define how the alignment applies to sections.
2D When this option is selected, the alignment is applied in the section plane.
3D When this option is selected, the alignment is applied in 3D space.
[Apply]
This button applies a selected transformation to any measured data. The objects are
translated and rotated according to the selected transformation matrix.
To rename a transformation
1. Click the transformation name.
2. Type the new name.
To delete a transformation
1. Click the transformation name.
2. Hit the delete key on the keyboard. The transformation name is deleted.
To apply a transformation on a measured data
1. Select the Measured data.
2. Click the transformation name in the Alignment Manager.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
331
3. Click [Apply].
Orient
This Ribbon Group contains a tool that allows you to rotate and translate an object and a
tool that allows you to make fine adjustments to an object's position on the screen.
Translate / Rotate
Performs a defined translation and rotation of an object
This tool translates and / or rotates an object about specified axes.
Translate – Rotate dialog
[Reselect]
The field displays the number of currently selected items that will have the translation /
rotation imposed on them. The [ Reselect ] button enables you to select different objects
in the tree or in the display. The Objects radio button must be selected to do this.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
332
Objects
When this option is checked, objects can be selected for translation / rotation in the
display.
Coordinates
When this option is checked, then the coordinates of the start and end position for the
translation / rotation can be defined directly in the display. The coordinates defining the
movements will appear in the Translation or Rotation fields below.
Name
Enter the name that will be applied to the translation-rotation. This name will appear in
the Inspection tree.
Constraints
The options in the drop down menu allow you to select the manner in which the
translation and the rotation will be applied. Depending on the selection from this menu,
the fields in which the constraints are defined will adapt. The following options are
possible :
Features
This option is only available if features have been defined. In this case the drop down list
will display all features that are listed in the Inspection tree. The movement will be
relative to the feature and the means of defining the movement of the object will depend
on the selected feature.
WCS - World Coordinate System
a general Cartesian system of coordinates.
Translate (WCS)
The direction of the translation is defined in terms of the X, Y, Z axes of the coordinate
system.
The Distance is the corresponding three dimensional distance, computed from the three
components.
Translate (Feature)
The direction is defined by the feature. The Distance is the distance it is to be translated
in the feature direction.
Rotation (WCS)
Axis point : the coordinates of the point through which the axis of rotation will pass.
Axis direction : a vector defining the direction of the axis of rotation.
Rotation angle: the angle of rotation that will be applied to the object about the defined
axis.
Rotation (Features)
Axis point : the coordinates of the point through which the axis of rotation will pass.
Axis direction : a vector defining the direction of the axis of rotation, specified by the
feature.
Rotation angle: the angle of rotation that will be applied to the object about the defined
axis.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
333
Keep copy of original
When this option is checked then a copy of the original object is retained in its position
before the translation / rotation. After the [Apply] button is used, a new (moved) object
appears in the Inspection tree. This checkbox is only available when solids, meshes,
and/or point clouds are selected.
[Apply]
Clicking this button, applies the defined translation or rotation to the selected object.
[Restore]
This button becomes available when the [Apply] button has been used and allows you to
restore the objects to their original position. The copied object will be removed from the
Inspection tree.
[Close]
Closes the dialog.
To translate and rotate an object
1. Select the object to be modified.
2. Click on the Translate-Rotate tool.
3. Enter a name for the translation-rotation.
4. If you wish to select a different object, select it in the Inspection tree, then click
[Reselect]
5. Select the means of defining the translation and/or rotation (constraints).
6. To translate the object first check the Translation radio button.
7. You can then either enter the movement required in the three coordinate directions or you
can define the movement graphically
To do this
- Make sure the Coordinate check button is selected in the Selection field.
- Click on a point on the object that you want to move.
- Drag the mouse to the final position for that point and click again.
(The corresponding coordinates and position will appear in the fields.)
8. To rotate the object, check the Rotation button.
9. You can then either enter the rotation parameters required in the input fields or you can
define the rotation graphically
To do this
- Make sure the Coordinate check button is selected in the Selection field.
- Click on a point on the object that you want to rotate.
- Drag the mouse to the a second point to define the direction and click again.
- Drag the mouse to a third point to define the angle of rotation and click again.
(The corresponding coordinates and position will appear in the fields.)
10. If you wish to retain a copy of the object in its original position, check the "Keep copy of
original" button.
11. Click [Apply] to apply the defined translation / rotation.
12. If the object movement is as required click [Close].
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
334
13. If the movement of the object is not as required, click [Restore] to re-locate the object in
its original position.
Adjust the rotation and translation parameters and repeat the process.
Interactive Alignment
This tool allows you to nudge objects in particular directions
This schedules the Interactive Align dialog.
The Interactive Align dialog
[Reselect]
The field displays the number of currently selected items that will have the movement
imposed on them. The [Reselect ] button enables you to select different objects in the tree
or in the display. The Objects radio button must be selected to do this.
Objects
When this option is checked, objects can be selected for movement in the display.
Rotation point
When this option is checked, a point can be selected in the display to act as the centre of
rotation. Its coordinates will appear in the Rotation Point fields below.
Name
Use this field to enter an alignment name that will be added to the Inspection tree after
applying.
Align
Direction arrows
These buttons in the dialog and on the keyboard move the selected objects in the selected
direction in the screen plane by the defined distance..
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
335
‘+’ and ‘–‘ buttons
These buttons in the dialog and on the keyboard rotate the selected objects around the
normal of the screen plane. Each click rotates the selected objects with the given specified
angle. The ‘+’ button rotates in a counter clockwise direction, the ‘– ‘button in a
clockwise direction.
Rotation Point
These three fields indicate the location of the screen normal axis, used by rotate. By
default the coordinates of the center of the screen are shown here. However, when the
dialog is open, you can click a point on an object to update these coordinates
[Restore]
The [Restore] button becomes available one a translation or rotation has taken place. It
returns the selected objects to their original location – orientation (before the dialog was
opened).
[Accept]
This button accepts the newly defined position and rotation of the objects.
[Close]
This closes the dialog, accepting the current location/orientation of the selected objects.
To interactively align objects
1. Select the objects in the tree or the display that you wish to move.
2. Enter a name for the movements to be applied.
3. Enter distance in the align translation field.
4. Click on any of the direction arrows to move the object by that amount in the
corresponding direction.
5. Enter a rotation angle in the input field.
6. Click on + to rotate the object by the defined angle in a counter clockwise direction.
7. To define the centre of rotation make sure that the Rotation Point check button is checked
"on", then click in the display to define the centre of rotation.
8. Click [Accept] to apply the translation / rotation defined.
9. Click [Restore] to remove the effects of the movement.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
336
Compare task
The Compare task is used to compare the measured data set with the nominal data set.
It includes tools to:
Compare all features, point clouds and meshes in the measured model to those in the
nominal model, either globally or in a specified direction, and present the results of the
comparison.
Create surface points from features or flyouts.
Compare the accuracy of an edge.
Represent the curvature of a point cloud or mesh as a colored compare object.
Compute the distance to the opposite wall and report deviations.
Evaluate defined GD&T tolerances for features.
Modify the flyout display style.
Create and compare sections and add them to a rail.
The Compare task includes the following ribbon groups:
o Compare
o Sections
o Construct : which contains two tools
- The "Intersection" tool is described in the Solid workflow - Nominal task - Feature
fitting ribbon group.
- The "Project Object" tool is described in the Solid workflow - Nominal task - Feature
fitting ribbon group.
Compare
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
337
The Compare Ribbon Group contains functions to compare the measured data to the nominal
model, either globally or along sections, directions or edges.
Global Compare
Compares all points of Measured Point clouds/Meshes/Feature areas to (selected) Nominal objects/3D features
The Global Compare tool is used to reveal the deviation of measured model(s) with respect
to its associated nominal model(s) as a color plot on each point (if the measured model is a
point cloud) or on vertices (if the measured model is a mesh). The Global Compare tool
can also be used to reveal the deviation of feature areas with respect to the nominal
objects/nominal 3D features.
Global Compare properties sheet
Prevent Fall Through
If this parameter is true, then we the comparison is not made to the closest point but to a
“corresponding” point in the measured surface. A nominal point is said to “correspond” to
the measured point when it has a similar normal orientation.
This option is currently supported for measured meshes and nominal solids only. When the sets of
measured or nominal objects contain one or more not supported object types then the Prevent Fall
Through is ignored for not-supported objects. At the end a warning message on “Not supported
object types” is shown in flashing red.
Shape Recognition
If this option is set, adjustments are made to measured points before projecting them onto
Nominal objects to improve shape recognition.
Exclude Border
If this option is set, those points that happen to be projected onto the border of the
Nominal Surfaces are neglected.
Presently only Nominal Meshes and Solid faces support this option (have border points
defined), while the point clouds and features do not have border points defined. Also note
that every solid face has border points surrounding its geometry. When a projected point
lies on a surface border, it is considered as “border projection” even if it is an internal
point for the whole solid composed of multiple faces.
Keep Measured
After a Global comparison, the measured model/feature area is immediately removed
from the data node of the measured tree and placed under the Comparison node of the
Inspection tree. To keep a copy of the measured model, check the Keep Measured option
ON.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
338
Hide Nominal
After a Global comparison, the nominal model is immediately hidden in the Inspection
tree.
To make a global comparison
Note that some comparison parameters are set globally as an attribute of the object. So for solids
for example, the Material thickness and the tolerance range applicable are specified using the
object's attributes.
1. Select the Mixed selection tool.
2. Select both the measured and nominal objects.
The measured objects could be point clouds/meshes/feature areas. The nominal objects
could be nominal models/3D features. More than one object can be selected, meaning that
several solids can be compared to a single point cloud.
3. Open the Global Compare properties sheet and adjust the parameters if needed.
4. Click the Global Compare tool.
The measured objects are compared to the nominal objects. The Comparison is added to the
Comparisons node of the Inspect tree. There will be one comparison object for eaxh solid
selected. The Comparison Information dialog box displays the comparison results.
Directional Compare
Compares nominal data points to mesh(es ) in a specified direction
The Direction Compare tool compares nominal surface points to a points on a mesh and
provides a directional compare object as a result.
This tool works in two ways.
When an anchor point is associated with a nominal point The Anchor point (A) is located in 3D space at (x, y, z). The surface point to be compared
(B) will be located in space at (x+δx, y+δy, z+δ) as shown in the figure below.
Knowing the fixed reference distance in the nominal directional points pair (An, Bn),
automatically detect a measured anchor point Am based on An through a directional
comparison. Am will be deviated from An by a distance ∆
Using the known reference distance (δ) between the nominal anchor point (An) and the
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
339
surface (edge) point (Bn), the Directional Compare tool will automatically detect a
measured anchor point (Am) based on (An). The distance between Am and An .is ∆A.
Using the anchor point deviation ∆A an intermediate nominal point Bn’ = Bn + ∆A (or Bn’
= Am + δ) will be defined. A measured point (Bm ) will be automatically detected and
compared to it using the directional compare algorithm.
Note that, for clarity, the offset between the nominal model and the measured mesh is
exaggerated in the figure above
When no anchor point is associated with a nominal point the surface point(s) are compared with the measured mesh in the direction of the nominal
point.
The directional compare requires either a pre-existing file that defines the positions and
directions to be used in the comparison or new surface points in the nominal tree. It is
accessible when a mesh is available in the data tree.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
340
The Directional Compare dialog box
Meshes
[ Reselect ]
This allows you to update the selection of the measured meshes. If the pre-selection is
empty, then all the mesh(es) are selected by default.
Surface points
From file
Check this option to import the nominal points from a file. This file can be created using
the Surface Point from Point tool in the Feature Fitting toolbar in the Nominal tab.
From tree
Check this option to use defined Surface points in the tree. By default all available
surface points are selected.
[ Reselect ]
Click this button to modify the selection of Surface Points from the tree.
Nominal Points
The list of surface points selected in the tree or in the external file.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
341
Anchor Points
Anchor points can be selected from the points defined in the tree. Click in the right hand
field to select an anchor point from the drop-down list.
Flip nominal surface points orientation
Changes the orientation of the nominal points by 180deg.
Create measured surface points
When this option is checked, individual measured surface points will also be created
instead of just one directional compare object.
Maximum search distance
When this option is checked then a comparison will be made between points that are less
then this distance in the normal direction.
[ Compare ]
The Compare button starts the comparison of the selected surface points to the mesh in
the specified direction. The comparison is added under the Comparisons node in the
Inspection tree.
The Directional Compare Information dialog box displays the comparison results.
[ Close ]
This closes the Directional Compare tool.
To make a Directional comparison
1. Nominal surface points must have been defined on the nominal model. Use the Surface
Point from Point tool in the Feature fitting ribbon group in the Nominal tab). These
nominal points can be saved to the tree or a file.
2. In the Measured tab a mesh must be available. Use the Mesh tool in the Filter/ Mesh
ribbon group.
3. Select the mesh for comparison if required.
4. Select the nominal surface points in the tree if these are available.
5. Click on the Directional Compare tool.
6. The Directional Compare dialog opens
If the mesh was pre-selected it will appear in the Selection field. You can change the
selection by clicking on a mesh in the inspection tree and clicking [Reselect].
If no pre-selection was made, all meshes and all surface points selected by default.
7. If nominal points were selected in a tree, the number will be listed and can be adjusted
using the [Refesh] button.
8. If the comparison is to be made using Anchor points, click in the field next to a nominal
point and select the required anchor point from those presented in the drop-down list.
9. To choose nominal points in a file, check the button next to "From file" and browse for
the file.
10. Check any additional options required as described above.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
342
11. Click on the Compare button.
The surface point(s) are compared with the measured mesh in the specified direction.
12. The Directional Compare Information dialog box displays the comparison results.
If the "Create measured surface points"option was selected, the corresponding points will
appear in the tree.
Surface Point from Point
Creates Surface points from Feature points and Nominal Model.
The Create Surface Points from Feature Points tool creates the surface point(s) from the
selected feature point(s) and the nominal model. At least one nominal model and one
feature point must be visible to create surface points.
This tool can be opened with a nominal model and pre-selecting a point cloud.
The Create Surface Points from Feature Points dialog box
[ Reselect Points ]
The Reselect Points button selects the feature points that are selected in nominal features
tree to create surface point(s). If no feature point is selected, then all the feature points
will be selected.
[ Reselect Nominal ]
The Reselect Nominal button selects the nominal models that are selected in nominal
models tree to create surface points. If no nominal model is selected, then all the nominal
models will be selected.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
343
Warning tolerance
Warning tolerance specifies the normal distance from the feature point to the nominal
model. If the feature point is located beyond the Warning tolerance, then warning
message will be appeared in the Warning message box and however, surface point(s) will
be created.
To tree
When checked, the surface point(s) are added under nominal features tree.
To file
When checked, the surface point(s) are saved into the file specified. These saved surface
point(s) can be used for Directional Compare.
[ Create ]
Click on the Create button to create the surface point(s). The surface point(s) get added
under the nominal features tree as shown below.
[ Delete ]
This button deletes all the surface points that appear in the nominal features tree
irrespective of their visibility. This button is active only after creating the surface point(s)
(i.e. after clicking on the Create button).
[ Close ]
This closes the Create Surface Points dialog box.
To create surface points
1. Import any nominal model and create feature point(s) on the model.
2. Click the Create Surface Points tool.
3. Select the feature point(s) and the nominal model to create surface point(s).
4. Click on the buttons Reselect Points and Reselect Nominal.
5. Set the warning tolerance as required.
6. Check the to tree and to file check boxes if want to add the surface point(s) in the nominal
features tree and save the surface point(s) to the file specified respectively.
7. Click [Create ] to create surface point(s). If to tree check box is checked then surface
point(s) will be added under the nominal features tree.
Surface Point from Flyout
Creates Surface points from flyouts
The Create Surface points from flyouts tool creates the surface points from the selected
flyouts. At least one flyout must be available.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
344
The Create Surface points from flyouts dialog box
[ Reselect Flyouts ]
The Reselect Flyouts button selects the Flyouts that are selected in scene to create surface
points. If no flyout is selected, then all the flyouts will be selected on pressing the
Reselect Flyouts button.
to tree
When checked, the surface point(s) are added under nominal features tree.
to file
When checked, the surface points are saved into the file specified. These points can be
used in the Directional Compare tool.
[ Create ]
This button creates the surface points.
[ Delete ]
Click on the Delete button to delete all the surface points that appear in the nominal
features tree irrespective of their visibility. This button is active only after points have
been created.
[ Close]
This button closes the Create Surface points dialog box.
To create surface points
1. Import any nominal model and measured model and create flyout(s) on the comparison
object.
2. Select the flyout(s) create surface point(s).
3. Click on the buttons Reselect Flyouts.
4. Check the to tree and to file check boxes if want to add the surface point(s) in the nominal
features tree and save the surface point(s) to the file specified respectively.
5. Click on the Create button to create surface point(s). If to tree check box is checked, then
surface point(s) will be added under the nominal features tree.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
345
Compare Edges
Compares the accuracy of an edge
This tool compares the edges of the point cloud/mesh with the solid model. The edge
accuracy is expressed in 2 deviations:
A deviation perpendicular to the untrimmed edge surface.
A deviation inside the trimmed edge surface.
The Edge Inspection dialog box
Name
The name of the comparison.
[ Reselect Measured ]
The Reselect Measured data box lists the objects that will be compared against the
nominal objects. To modify the current selection, manually select the measured objects
and press the Reselect Measured button.
[ Reselect Nominal ]
The Reselect Nominal data box lists the reference objects to edge inspection. To modify
the current selection, manually select the nominal objects and press the Reselect Nominal
button.
[ Draw Line ]
This button allows the user to draw the line close to the edge of the point cloud/mesh to
compare against the nominal edge. The Inspect button gets activated only after drawing
the line and pressing MMB.
Sample Distance
This Sample Distance specifies the distance between the points on the boarder that will be
compared to the edge.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
346
[ Inspect ]
The Inspect button starts the comparison of the selected edge points to the nominal edge
in 2 directions: a deviation perpendicular to the untrimmed edge surface and a deviation
inside the trimmed edge surface.
The comparisons in the above two directions are added under the Comparisons node in
the Inspection tree. The Edge Information dialog box displays the comparison results
[ Close ]
This button closes the Edge Inspection tool.
To compare edges
1. Select edges if required.
2. Press the Compare Edges icon.
3. The Edge Inspection dialog opens.
If the edges were pre-selected they will appear in the Options field. You can change the
selection by clicking on a edge and clicking [Reselect Measured] or [Reselect Nominal].
If no pre-selection was made, all meshes and all surface points selected by default.
4. Click on the Draw Line button to draw the line close to the edge of the point cloud/mesh.
And then press middle mouse button to end the edge selection.
5. Click [Inspect] to start the comparison.
Curvature
Creates the colored compare object expressed as the local radius of a point cloud (s) or mesh(es)
The Curvature tool creates the curvature of point cloud(s) or mesh(es) as a colored
compare object expressed as the local radius of a point cloud(s) or mesh(es). This tool
requires pre-selection.
The Curvature property sheet
Keep Measured
After creating Curvature Radius Information, the measured model is immediately
removed from the data node of the measured tree and placed under the comparison. To
keep a copy of the measured model, check the Keep Measured option.
Smallest Detail
The highest curvature to take into account is determined by the Smallest Detail parameter.
If this parameter is set 0, the smallest detail will be determined automatically. Otherwise,
this parameter represents the size of the smallest detail in your drawing. You can set this
parameter to be larger than the noisy areas in your drawing so as to discard noise from the
point cloud.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
347
To compute the curvature radius
1. Select the mixed selection tool.
2. Select the measured point cloud/mesh.
3. Open the Curvature Radius property sheet and do the following if needed.
4. If a copy of the measured model is to be retained, check the Keep Measured option.
5. Enter the smallest detail.
6. Click on the Curvature Radius tool.
The Curvature Radius Information dialog box displays the Curvature radius results.
Note: If the Keep Measured option is checked OFF, the Curvature radius command is disabled
after the comparison.
Wall Thickness
Computes the distance to the opposite wall
The Wall Thickness tool computes, for every point, the distance to the opposite wall, and
reports the deviations as a standard wall thickness compare object. This tool can only used
on solid(s) and/or mesh(es).
The Wall Thickness dialog box
Upper tolerance
This pre-sets the upper bound for the color settings of the Wall Thickness Information
dialog. They can also be used to calculate the deviations between the upper tolerance and
lower tolerance.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
348
Lower tolerance
This pre-sets the lower bound for the color settings of the Wall Thickness Information
dialog. They can also be used to calculate the deviations with in the upper tolerance and
lower tolerance.
Nominal
This specifies the nominal distance to the opposite wall that needs to be considered for
computing the Wall Thickness.
Angle tolerance
For computing the Wall Thickness, a normal to the surface at every point is taken and a
ray is shot in the opposite direction to hit the opposite surface. The difference in angle
between the ray and the normal to the opposite surface specifies the Angle tolerance. If
this angle is below the Angle tolerance, the Wall Thickness is well defined.
Smooth direction
When the mesh data is noisy, then the normal directions are even more noisy. The Wall
Thickness computed using noisy normals would not be accurate. In that case it is
necessary to check the Smooth direction check box to smoothen the normals data.
Planar
This parameter is used to create a mesh tessellation for the solid. This represents the
maximum distance between the nearby vertices.
Angular
This parameter is used to create a mesh tessellation for the solid. This represents the
maximum angle (degrees) between normals in the nearby vertices.
Output separate faces (lower memory)
When Output separate faces option is checked, then the Wall Thickness information
objects will be created for each face of the solid and added under the comparisons node in
the Inspection tree.
[ Run ]
The Run button starts the computation of Wall Thickness with in the specified upper and
lower tolerance. The Wall Thickness information is added under Comparisons node in the
Inspection tree.
The Wall Thickness Information dialog box displays the Wall Thickness results.
[ Close ]
This closes the Wall Thickness tool.
To make a wall thickness comparison
1. Select the Mixed Object Select tool.
2. Select either the mesh or solid.
3. Open the Wall Thickness dialog box and specify the parameters to compute the Wall
Thickness.
4. Click on the Run button. The Wall Thickness is computed for the selected model and the
Wall Thickness Information dialog box displays the Wall Thickness results.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
349
Evaluate GD&T
Evaluates defined GD&T tolerances for features
This tool evaluates features according to specific GD&T tolerances that were set. The
tolerances must have been set using the Create GD&T Annotation tool in the GD&T
Dimension Ribbon Group of the Nominal task. The result of the evaluation is shown in a
flyout.
The flyout shows the nominal tolerances that were defined along with a graphic that indicates the
type of tolerance. The results of the evaluation are shown below the tolerance with colored
backgrounds; green indicates that the result lies within the tolerance and red that it is outside of
it.
The Evaluate GD&T property sheet
All features
When this check box is ON the evaluation will be performed on all features for which
GD&T tolerances have been defined. If this check box is OFF, then features for which
the evaluation is required must be pre-selected in the Inspection tree
Re-evaluate
When this check box is ON, then tolerances for all features selected for evaluation will be
computed even if they have previously been evaluated. This is the default setting.
Checking this button OFF may be interesting if you have a large number of tolerances to
evaluate and you know (for example) that only position and not shape tolerances need to
be re-evaluated.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
350
To perform an evaluation of GD&T tolerances
1. If you wish to evaluate specific features, select them in the tree, then click on the Eval
GDT tool.
2. If you wish to evaluate ALL the features for which GD&T tolerances have been defined,
click on the arrow to open the property sheet first and then check the button All Features.
3. It is recommended to re-evaluate previously evaluated tolerances, unless there are a large
number that have not been modified.
4. Click on the icon at the top of the property sheet to start the evaluation process.
The properties of the GD&T flyout can be set by double clicking on the evaluation flyout or by
selecting the Flyout Properties tool.
Compare Features
Compares pairs of features of the same type
The Compare Features tool compares pairs of features of the same type. It generates a
flyout that displays all the information relating to the comparison of features. The
information displayed in the flyout is determined by the
The Compare Features property sheet
All Features
If the All Features check box is checked, the Compare Features tool compares all pairs of
features of the same type and corresponding names. For each feature pair, a flyout with
the differences between both is created.
To compare feature pairs
1. Select the measured and corresponding nominal features.
2. Press the Compare Features button.
The features will be compared and for each feature pair a flyout will be created.
An example of such a flyout is shown below.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
351
3. The contents of the flyout can be edited by double clicking on the flyout. This will
schedule the Flyout Properties dialog in which the parameters to be displayed can be
edited.
To compare all feature pairs
1. If your drawing contains multiple features of the same type, ensure that corresponding
features have corresponding names.
2. Open the Compare Features property sheet.
3. Check the All Features option.
4. Press the Compare Features button.
Corresponding features will be compared and for each feature pair a flyout will be
created.
5. The fields on view can be edited as described above.
Compare Info
Provides information on compared point cloud (s)/mesh(es)
This option schedules the Comparison Information dialog.
Flyout Properties
Changes the flyout display style
This tool enables you to edit the display characteristics of an existing flyout.
Flyouts that can be edited using this tool can be created using the following tools from the
Flyouts ribbon group.
The Compare Flyouts tool
The Feature Flyouts tool
The Create Rail Flyout tool
All Flyouts are listed under the "Fyouts"node in the Inspect section of the Inspection Tree,
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
352
This option schedules the Flyout Properties dialog. This dialog contains the Flyout
properties tab, the Flyout Colors tab and the Sign indication tab as described for the
Compare Flyouts tool.
Sections
The Sections Ribbon Group contains tools to create and compare sections as well as managing
rails.
Create Section
Creates Sections on point clouds, meshes and solids
The Create Section tool creates one or more sections on data by user defined axis planes.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
353
The Create Section dialog box
Objects
This field reports the total number of measured models that are available in the scene.
X , Y , Z
These options allow you to create sections parallel to the X, Y and Z directions.
3 points
This option allows you to create a section that passes through 3 points.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
354
Plane
This option allows you to create a section that passes based on a selected plane object.
Wire
This option allows you to create a section based on a wire.
Solid edge
This option allows you to create a section that is perpendicular to a solid edge or feature
line.
Passing through a defined point and parallel to an edge
This option allows you to create a section that passes through a defined point and is
parallel to a solid edge. This option requires that feature points have been defined. The
plane will pass through the point and remain parallel to the nearest solid edge.
Concentric circles
This enables you to create a set of concentric circular sections.
File
This option allows you to retrieve a section from a file.
Single Section
Selecting the Single Section button will display only one section preview in both the 2D
and 3D preview windows. This is the primary section, highlighted with a blue border and
a shaded gray fill that is different in color from any other previewed section. The primary
section preview is always displayed regardless of its position and regardless of whether or
not it intersects the model.
Parallel Sections
Selecting the Parallel section button will display the primary section preview in the
highlighted color and all feasible section previews in an alternate red-border color without
fill. Only the primary section preview is modifiable. Only the child section previews that
actually intersect the model (thus, can actually create a section result) will be shown.
Rail
This section enables you to choose whether to add sections to a rail or not. A Rail is a
group of sections that are related to a particular part of the object. Rails are useful when
used with the Flush Caliper tool. Information relating to rails is available in the Report
task .
Separate
When this option is selected then each section will be created separately. Sections can be
added to a rail at a later stage.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
355
To Rail
When this option is selected then the sections created will be added to the specified rail.
A default rail is provided, but you can define others in the input field. Sections can be
removed from a rail if required.
[Lasso]
Click the Lasso button to mark select an area in the model that would eventually define
boundary while creating sections. Clicking the Lasso button deactivates the Create
Section button and the component selection will become available to click and drag on
the models to enclose a polygon region. Clicking the Lasso button would display the
feedback saying Press MMB and "Done" to end selection. Use the LMB and click on the
measured model to block the region to create sections. The Shift and Ctrl key can be used
to add and subtract the selection. Once the regions are blocked which are marked in red,
press the Done button to ascertain the selected region to create sections.
[Done]
Pressing the Done button ascertains the selected region to create sections and activates the
Create Section button.
[Create Section]
The Create Section button starts the creation of sections on the selected data.
[Close]
The Close button quits the Create Section tool.
To create sections perpendicular to the X-, Y- or Z-axis
1. Click the X, Y or Z buttons .
By default a single primary section will appear in the scene.
The current position of this section along the axis will be displayed.
2. Position this section either by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre or by
entering the required value in the X, Y or Z value field.
3. To create sections parallel to this one, click on the Parallel Sections button .
4. Enter the required position of the last section in the To field.
5. Enter either the number of section between then in the Times field, or the distance
between each step in the Steps field.
6. Define a width of the section plane if required. By default the width is set to the size of
the solid/point cloud/mesh, so that the section would cover the complete part. By
checking the Width option "on" you can create smaller sections, that do not cover the
entire solid/point cloud/mesh.
7. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
8. Click the [Create] button to create the section.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
356
To create sections using 3 points
1. Click the 3 points button .
2. Pick 3 points in the drawing to define the section plane.
3. Click the Single Section button to create a single section or the Parallel Section
button to create parallel sections.
4. Position the primary section by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre.
5. If parallel sections are created, specify the distance between two successive sections in
the Step field.
6. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
7. Click [Create] button to create the sections.
To create sections using a plane
1. Click the Plane button .
2. Click the Single Section button to create a single section or the Parallel Section
button to create parallel sections.
The primary section preview is displayed.
3. Position the primary section by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre.
4. If parallel sections are created, specify the distance between two successive sections in
the Step field.
5. Pick a planar object in the drawing or from the drop-down list to define the section plane.
6. You can choose whether to use the complete plane to define the section or you can check
the "Bounded" option to reduce the effective area of the plane to the dimensions
specified.
The dimensions specified are measured from the center of the plane.
7. Choose whether to add the sections to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an
existing rail.
8. Click [Create] button to create the sections.
To create a section using a wire
1. Click the sections from wire button .
2. Draw a wire curve with the LMB. Click the MMB to finish.
3. If required add a step interval to create a series of parallel sections separated by the
specified distance.
4. If required define an angle to define a radial set of sections separated by the specified
angle.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
357
5. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
6. Click [Create] button to create the section.
To create sections perpendicular to an edge or feature
1. Click the edge button .
2. Click on an edge in the drawing to position the section plane.
3. Click the Single Section button . Both the 2D and 3D preview windows will display a
section.
4. Adjust the position of the primary section along the wire. This can be done either by
picking a new position, by specifying a coordinate value or using the plane position
arrows. To set the position of the primary section manually, check the Manual Location
check box and select the new position in your drawing. To set the position of the primary
section at a specific X, Y or Z value, check the X, Y or Z button and enter the coordinate
in the edit box. The position of the primary section can be moved by entering a chord
length step in the Step edit box in the Move section and by using its arrows. Pressing the
arrows will move the primary section with steps as specified in the Step edit box, see also
the illustration below. Any change in the data boxes will be reflected in the scene after
hitting the <Enter> key or when the text box looses focus.
5. Specify the width of the section in the Width field.
6. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
7. Click the Create button to create the section.
To create a section parallel to an edge that passes through a point
1. Click the button .
2. Click [Pick] and then click on a defined feature point, or click [Pick all].
The primary section will appear on the nearest edge to the point.
3. To create parallel sections, click Parallel Sections button and entered the required
step between sections in the Step field.
4. Modify the position of the primary section along the edge.
5. Specify the distance between two sections in the Step field.
6. Specify the width of the sections in the Width field.
7. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
8. Click [Create] to create the sections.
To create a set of concentric circular sections
1. Click on the concentric circles button .
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
358
2. Define the centre of the first circle, either by clicking on an object or by entering the X, Y
and Z coordinates.
3. Enter the required radius for the first (inner) circle.
4. To create a set of concentric circles click on the concentric tool .
5. Enter the difference in radius in the Step field.
6. Enter the number of (additional) circles required in the Times field.
7. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
8. Click [Create] to create the sections.
To create sections from file
1. Click the sections from file button .
2. Press the Sections from file… button to select a file with section definition information.
Section files can be created with the Export Sections tool, see the Export Sections tool for
more information. Upon the file selection, all section previews that intersect the data-set
bounding-box are drawn in both the 2D and 3D preview windows. The Create and
Compare Section dialog box will list the name of the file.
3. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
4. Click [Compare] to create and compare the sections.
Compare Section
Creates Sections on Point clouds / Meshes and compares these to (selected) Nominal objects
The Compare Section tool compares nominal to measured models, along one or more
sections that are created on user defined axis planes. This tool is only active when nominal
and measured model(s) are available in the scene.
The Create and Compare Section dialog box
This dialog allows you to create and compare various types of sections through the nominal and
the measured models.
The sections are displayed as bounded rectangles. The parent section preview is a bounded
rectangle drawn with a blue border and gray fill as shown in the image below. This section
preview is always visible regardless of it intersects the data-set bounding-box. Each child section
preview is a bounded rectangle drawn with a red border and no fill.
This dialog contains two tabs.
The Methods tab
This tab is used to define the required sections.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
359
Measured
This field reports the total number of measured models available in the scene.
Nominal
This field reports the total number of nominal models available in the scene.
X, Y , Z
These options allow you to create and compare sections parallel to the X, Y and Z
directions.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
360
3 points
This option allows you to create and compare a section that passes through 3 points.
Plane
This option allows you to create and compare a section that passes based on a selected
plane object.
Wire
This option allows you to create a section based on a wire.
Solid edge
This option allows you to create a section that is perpendicular to a solid edge.
Passing through a defined point and parallel to an edge
This option allows you to create and compare a section that passes through a defined
point and is parallel to a solid edge. This option requires that feature points have been
defined. The plane will pass through the point and remain parallel to the nearest solid
edge.
Concentric circles
This enables you to create and compare a set of concentric circular sections.
File
This option allows you to retrieve a section from a file.
Single Section
Selecting the Single Section button will display only one section preview in both the 2D
and 3D preview windows. This is the primary section, highlighted with a blue border and
a shaded gray fill that is different in color from any other previewed section. The primary
section preview is always displayed regardless of its position and regardless of whether or
not it intersects the model.
Parallel Sections
Selecting the Parallel section button will display the primary section preview in the
highlighted color and all feasible section previews in an alternate red-border color without
fill. Only the primary section preview is modifiable. Only the child section previews that
actually intersect the model (thus, can actually create a section result) will be shown.
Two sided nominal
The topology of the sections are 'detected' and aligned, than the compare is made. Note:
this only works well when the curves have similar topology (shape).
Shape recognition
The measured section is 2D Best Fit to the Nominal section. For each measured point the
closest nominal point is taken, the measured section is re-positioned in the original
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
361
location and the measured points are compared to the nominal points found after align 2D
Best fit.
Rail
This section enables you to choose whether to add sections to a rail or not. A Rail is a
group of sections that are related to a particular part of the object. Rails are useful when
used with the Create Gap/Flush Using Calipers tool. Information relating to rails is
available in the Report task .
Separate
When this option is selected then each section will be created separately. Sections can be
added to a rail at a later stage.
To Rail
When this option is selected then the sections created will be added to the specified rail.
A default rail is provided, you can define others in the input field. Sections can be
removed from a rail if required.
[Lasso]
Click the Lasso button to select the area of the measured data that is used for comparison
with a polygon region. Clicking the Lasso button deactivates the Compare button and the
component selection will become available to click and drag on the models to enclose a
polygon region. Clicking the Lasso button would display the feedback saying Press MMB
and "Done" to end selection. Use the LMB and click on the measured model to block the
region to be compared. The Shift and Ctrl key can be used to add and subtract the
selection. Once the regions are blocked which are marked in red, press the Done button to
ascertain the selected region for comparison.
[Done]
Pressing [Done] ascertains the selected region for comparison and activated the Compare
button.
The Settings tab
Point distribution
Can be : Measured, Uniform, Chordal Deviation
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
362
[Compare]
The Compare button starts the comparison of the selected measured data to the selected
nominal model along the created sections. The Comparison is added under the
Comparisons node in the Inspect tree. The Section Information dialog box displays the
comparison results.
[Close]
This closes the dialog.
To create and compare sections perpendicular to the X-, Y- or Z-axes
1. Click the X, Y or Z buttons .
By default a single primary section will appear in the scene.
The current position of this section along the axis will be displayed.
2. Position this section either by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre or by
entering the required value in the X, Y or Z value field.
3. To create sections parallel to this one, click on the Parallel Sections button .
4. Enter the required position of the last section in the To field.
5. Enter either the number of section between then in the Times field, or the distance
between each step in the Steps field.
6. Define a width of the section plane if required. By default the width is set to the size of
the solid/point cloud/mesh, so that the section would cover the complete part. By
checking the Width option "on" you can create smaller sections, that do not cover the
entire solid/point cloud/mesh.
7. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
8. Click [Compare] to create and compare the sections.
To create and compare sections passing through 3 points
1. Click the 3 points button .
2. Pick 3 points in the drawing to define the section plane.
3. Click the Single Section button to create a single section or the Parallel Section
button to create parallel sections.
4. Position the primary section by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre.
5. If parallel sections are created, specify the distance between two successive sections in
the Step field.
6. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
7. Click [Compare] button to create and compare the sections.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
363
To create and compare sections using a plane
1. Click the Plane button .
2. Pick a planar object in the drawing to define the section plane.
3. Click the Single Section button to create a single section or the Parallel Section
button to create parallel sections.
The primary section preview is displayed.
4. Position the primary section by dragging the small blue rectangle in its centre.
5. If parallel sections are created, specify the distance between two successive sections in
the Step field.
6. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
7. Click [Compare] to create and compare the sections.
To create and compare a section using a wire
1. Click the sections from wire button .
2. Draw a wire curve with the LMB. Click the MMB to finish.
3. If required add a step interval to create a series of parallel sections separated by the
specified distance.
4. If required define an angle to define a radial set of sections separated by the specified
angle.
5. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
6. Click the [Compare] button to create and compare the section.
To create and compare sections perpendicular to a solid edge
1. Click the solid edge button .
2. Click on a solid edge in the drawing to position the section plane.
3. Click the Single Section button . Both the 2D and 3D preview windows will display a
section.
4. Adjust the position of the primary section along the wire. This can be done either by
picking a new position, by specifying a coordinate value or using the plane position
arrows. To set the position of the primary section manually, check the Manual Location
check box and select the new position in your drawing. To set the position of the primary
section at a specific X, Y or Z value, check the X, Y or Z button and enter the coordinate
in the edit box. The position of the primary section can be moved by entering a chord
length step in the Step edit box in the Move section and by using its arrows. Pressing the
arrows will move the primary section with steps as specified in the Step edit box, see also
the illustration below. Any change in the data boxes will be reflected in the scene after
hitting the <Enter> key or when the text box looses focus.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
364
5. Specify the width of the section in the Width field.
6. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
7. Click [Compare] to create and compare the section.
To create and compare a section parallel to a solid edge that passes through a point
1. Click the button .
2. Click [Pick] and then click on a defined feature point, or click [All points].
The primary section will appear on the nearest edge to the point.
3. To create parallel sections, click Parallel Sections button and entered the required
step between sections in the Step field.
4. Modify the position of the primary section along the edge.
5. Specify the distance between two sections in the Step field.
6. Specify the width of the sections in the Width field.
7. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
8. Click [Compare] to create and compare the sections.
To create and compare concentric circle sections
1. Click on the concentric circles button .
2. Define the centre of the first circle, either by clicking on an object or by entering the X, Y
and Z coordinates.
3. Enter the required radius for the first (inner) circle.
4. To create a set of concentric circles click on the concentric tool .
5. Enter the difference in radius in the Step field.
6. Enter the number of (additional) circles required in the Times field.
7. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
8. Click [Compare] to create and compare the sections.
To retrieve sections from a file
1. Click the sections from file button .
2. Press the Sections from file… button to select a file with section definition information.
Section files can be created with the Export Sections tool, see the Export Sections tool for
more information. Upon the file selection, all section previews that intersect the data-set
bounding-box are drawn in both the 2D and 3D preview windows. The Create and
Compare Section dialog box will list the name of the file.
3. Choose whether to add them to a rail. Enter the name of a new rail, or select an existing
rail.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
365
4. Click [Compare] to create and compare the sections.
Add to Rail
Adds selected sections to a specified rail
This operation is sensitive when a section that is in the ‘Sections’ part of the tree is
selected. It allows you to move a section from the ‘Sections’ part of the tree to a designated
rail.
The Add Selected Sections to Rail property sheet
Rail
This list allows you to select the rail to which the sections will be added. You can select
an existing rail or create a new rail by typing in the name. The default rail is always
available.
To move sections from the separate region to a rail.
1. Select the section(s) to be added to a rail
2. Click on the arrow to see the property sheet in which you can specify the destination rail.
3. Click on the icon to add the sections to the selected rail.
Remove from Rail
Removes sections selected from a rail
This tool is sensitive when a section in a rail is selected in the tree. It moves it from the rail
to the ‘Sections’ area of the tree.
To remove a section from a rail
1. Select a section in a rail.
2. Click on the tool.
The section will be removed to the "‘Sections" area of the tree.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
366
Report task
Tools provided for reporting include:
Creation and management of Flyouts to provide annotation.
Creation and management of Reports.
Determination of Dimensions.
Export of various items including features, sections and deviations.
The Report task includes the following Ribbon Groups:
o Flyouts
o Reporting
o Dimensions
o Export
Flyouts
A Flyout is a label that displays information relating to a specific object. The tools in the
Flyouts Ribbon Group enable you to create, modify and manage a number of different
types of Flyouts and other annotation functions.
Compare Flyouts
Creates Flyouts for points with comparison information
The Compare Flyouts tool creates flyouts for points for which comparison information is
available.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
367
A Flyout is a label that displays comparison information relating to a specific point. A
Flyout therefor can only be created if comparison information is available. Comparison
information is listed under the "Comparisons" node in the Inspect section of the Inspection
tree and is generated using the tools in the Compare toolbar in the Compare task.
The Flyout Properties dialog box
The Flyout properties dialog contains four tabs, that define all aspects of flyouts:
The Flyout Create tab
The Flyout Properties tab
The Flyout Colors tab
The Sign Indication tab
Flyout Create tab
The Flyout Create tab defines which points will have flyouts attached to them.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
368
All points outside this range
When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for those points whose values lie
outside the region defined by the defined range.
The ‘and one out of’ field is an additional filter that allows you to select only the
proportion of points defined in the input field. So for example if you enter a value of 10,
then only 1 point out of 10 of those points whose values lies within the range will be
selected for flyouts. This number of points is indicated in the field.
Worst
When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for the defined number of points that
have the maximum deviation in either a positive or negative sense.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
369
Worst positive and negative points
When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for the defined number of points that
have the maximum deviation in both positive and negative direction of the nominal
model.
One out of “N” points:
When this option is selected, flyouts will be created for the proportion of points defined.
So if a value of 10 is entered, 1 out of all 10 points will be randomly picked.
Manually selected points
When this option is selected, you can select points on the comparison object for which a
flyout will be created. This is the default selection mode for this tool, it is used without
opening the dialog.
All points
When this option is selected flyouts will be created for all points in the comparison
object.
Flyout Numbering
This determines how the created flyouts will be numbered.
Continuous
The flyouts are numbered serially. Deleting a flyout will not affect the order of the new
flyouts’ serial number when they are created.
Compact
The flyouts are numbered serially, but if flyouts are deleted, their serial numbers are
reused by the new flyouts starting from the lowest available number.
From points
The serial number is derived from the points order in the comparison object.
The Flyout Properties tab
This tab allows you to define how the flyouts are presented.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
370
Name
This field displays the name of a selected flyout. If it is empty it implies automatic
naming.
If this option is checked you can use the input field to enter a name that will be added to
the top of the flyouts.
Compare flyouts
The options in this panel apply to flyouts created using the Compare Flyouts tool and
which concern flyouts that relate to comparison information.
Measured data If checked, a column with measured data is shown in the flyout. The data coordinates
used are selected from the Coordinates drop-down list.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
371
Nominal data If checked, a column with nominal data is shown in the flyout. The data coordinates used
are selected from the Coordinates drop-down list.
Deviation When checked the deviation between the measured and nominal data will be displayed in
the flyout. The coordinate directions in which the deviations are displayed are selected
from the Coordinates drop-down list.
Tolerance When checked the active tolerance is displayed in the flyout. This corresponds to the
upper (High) and lower (Low) limits shown in the Color tab of the Compare Info dialog.
3D Deviation When checked, the measured point’s 3D deviation from the nominal model will be
displayed in the flyout. The ‘+’ sign in the distance indicates that distance is measured
along the normal side of the nominal model and the ‘–‘ sign indicates the reverse side of
the nominal model.
If the Color bar option is checked, a color bar will appear in the flyout.
If the Go / No Go option is checked then the term indicating whether the value has been
evaluated as being within tolerance will be displayed in the flyout. The text used is set in
the Sign Indication tab.
Number of Points When checked, the total number of compared points will be displayed in the flyout.
Range When checked, the range of distances between the measured data and the nominal model
is displayed in the flyout.
Sigma When checked, the statistical sigma of the measured data to the nominal model is
displayed in the flyout.
Mean When checked, the mean distance between the measured data and the nominal model is
displayed in the flyout.
In Tolerance When checked, the percentage of the area of a mesh or number of points in a point
cloud that is inside tolerance is displayed in the flyout.
The figure below shows the flyout resulting from the a set of compare flyout properties.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
372
Feature flyouts
The options in this panel apply to flyouts created using the Feature Flyouts tool and
which concern flyouts that relate to features.
Measured If checked, a column with measured data is shown in the flyout.
Nominal If checked, a column with nominal data is shown in the flyout.
Tolerance When checked the active tolerance is displayed in the flyout. This corresponds to the
upper (High) and lower (Low) limits shown in the Color tab of the Compare Info dialog.
Type When checked the type of feature is displayed in the flyout.
Range When checked, the range of the feature statistics object is displayed in the flyout.
Sigma When checked, the sigma of the feature statistics object is displayed in the flyout.
Points When checked, the number of points used in the feature statistics object will be displayed
in the flyout.
Radius When checked, the Radius of a circular feature will be displayed in the flyout.
(See the additional options described below)
Diameter When checked, the Diameter of a circular feature will be displayed in the flyout.
(See the additional options described below)
Length / Width When checked, the Length and Width of a length and width of a feature will be displayed
in the flyout. (This only applies to specific features)
(See the additional options described below.)
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
373
Total Length When checked, the total length of the feature will be displayed. (This only applies to
specific features)
(See the additional options described below.)
Position When checked, the position of the feature will be displayed in the flyout. The label
associated with the position will depend on the type of feature (e.g. "Center" for a Circle
feature, "From" and "To" for a Line feature).
The coordinate values displayed can be selected from the drop down list.
(See the additional options described below.)
Orientation When checked, the orientation of the feature will be displayed in the flyout. The label
associated with the orientation will depend on the type of feature (e.g. "Normal" for a
Circle feature, "Direction" for a Line feature).
The format of the orientation can be selected from the drop down list.
Color Bar When checked, a color bar will appear in the flyout.
Go / No Go When checked, the term indicating whether the value has been evaluated as being within
tolerance will be displayed in the flyout. The text used is set in the Sign Indication tab.
Deviation When checked, the associated deviation will be displayed in the flyout.
The figure below shows an example of a feature flyout with the corresponding parameter
settings.
Style
The options in this panel define how the information is presented in the flyout.
Flyout style Flyouts can have following styles:
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
374
Normal
In the normal flyout style, the flyout can be dragged and repositioned. A leader line can
connect the flyouts to the measured point.
In Drawing
In the In Drawing flyout style, a flyout is created right on the point of mouse click with
just an arrowhead pointing the measured point. The flyout cannot be dragged or
repositioned. Only Point number and Total deviation options are available as information.
Dimension
In the Dimension flyout style, similar to In Drawing, the flyout is right on the point of
mouse click with two arrowheads, one pointing the measured and the other the
corresponding projected point on the nominal model. This is useful for sections, as it
allows you to display dimensions between from/to points. The flyout cannot be dragged
or repositioned. Only Point number and Total deviation options are available.
Decimals This option sets the number of decimal places to be displayed for the values shown in the flyout.
Up to six decimal places can be set.
Text height This option sets the size of the text. Though the listed options are from 6 to 26, lower or higher
numbers can be set.
General
Show Units When checked, the units associated with the displayed values will be shown in the flyout.
Locked position When checked, the flyout will remain in its position when the Arrange flyout tool is used.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
375
Fixed Leaderline Length When checked, the length of the leaderline remains fixed. When the object is moved, the flyouts
will move the same amount.
Leaderline When checked, a leaderline connecting the flyout to the object will be displayed.
Arrow
When checked, an arrow will be displayed on the leaderline pointing from the flyout to the
connection point.
Tip Size This sets the size of the arrow head.
Connection Point When checked, the connection point is displayed as a colored box. The color can be defined in
the Flyout Colors tab.
Background When checked, the flyout will be displayed with a white background. When unchecked the flyout
with be displayed with a transparent background.
Bounding box When checked, the flyout will be surrounded by a border.
Dimension
These options relate to the display of Dimension information.
ISO Dimension When checked, the text height is defined in mm, and the dimension text is parallel to
Dimension line.
Prevent Inverted Text This option is used to prevent text being reversed when the model is rotated in the scene.
The effect is illustrated in the figures below.
Dimension flyout created with Prevent Inverted Text
OFF
Appearance of the text when the model is rotated.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
376
Dimension flyout created with Prevent Inverted Text
ON
Appearance of the text when the model is rotated.
Show Prefix This option toggles the display of the pre-fix in the flyout, if a prefix exists.
Hide with object This option refers to dimensions. When checked the dimensions will be removed if the
object to which they are attached is hidden. If unchecked, the dimensions will remain on
screen when the object is hidden.
GD&T
These options are only available when a GD&T flyout has been pre-selected. A GD&T
flyout consists of two parts: the nominal tolerances that were defined, and the results of
the evaluation.
Show Results When this option is checked ON then the results of the evaluation (red or green) will be
displayed. If this option is checked OFF, then just the nominal tolerances are shown.
Hide Nominal When this option is checked ON then the nominal tolerances will be hidden and only the
results shown.
Show Results ON
Hide Nominal OFF
Show Results OFF Show Results ON
Hide Nominal ON
Use Colors When this option is checked, the results of a GD&T evaluation will be shown using a
colored back ground; green for within the tolerance, red for out of tolerance.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
377
Hide Deviation When this option is checked ON then the deviation will be hidden.
Only when within tolerance When this option is checked ON then the deviation will only be hidden if it within the
tolerance.
These options are illustrated below
Hide deviations OFF Hide deviations ON Hide deviations ON
Only when within
tolerance ON
The Flyout Colors tab
The Flyout Colors tab allows you to define the colors used in the flyout.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
378
General
The parameters in this panel refer to .....
Default This allows you to set the default colours to be used for the flyout background, the border
and the text colour.
Color from deviation for compare flyouts When checked, the background color of the flyout will have the same color as the
deviation bar color.
Leader line Sets the color of the leader line.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
379
Connection point Sets the color of the box defining the connection point.
Arrow tip Sets the color of the arrow tip.
Dimensions
The parameters in this panel define which colors are used in the display of dimension
flyouts.
Fixed
When this button is checked the selected colors defined for the flyout background, border
and text will be applied to all types of dimension flyouts.
Variable
When these buttons are checked, different colors can be used for the background, the
border and the text of different dimensions; i.e. whether they are between Measured to
Measured, Measured to Nominal or Nominal to Nominal.
GD&T background and Feature Compare flyouts deviation bands
Out Tolerance positive
The color used when the deviation is out of tolerance in positive direction.
Above X% of tolerance
The color used when the deviation is above the defined % of tolerance.
In Tolerance
The color used when the deviation is in tolerance
Below X% of tolerance
The color used when the deviation is below the defined % of tolerance.
Out Tolerance negative
The color used when the deviation is out of tolerance in a negative direction.
The Sign Indication tab
This tab can be used to enter a description for a deviation in flyout, such as front, back,
left, right depending on the position. Thus the string from the dialog replaces +/- sign in
front of the deviation.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
380
Evaluation
These fields enable you to set the text that will be displayed when a value has been
evaluated as being in or out of tolerance. The default values are Go (In Tolerance) and No
Go (Out of Tolerance). This text will be displayed when the Go / No Go option is set in
the Flyout Properties tab.
To create a flyout
1. Select the comparison object.
2. Click the Compare Flyouts tool.
3. Define which points will have a flyout created in the Flyout Create tab.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
381
4. Set the parameters describing the display of the flyout in each of the remaining tabs
(These can all be edited at a later stage with the Flyout Properties tool.)
5. If manual option is selected, click on the model to select the points.
Note: Without pre-selected model(s) or section(s) in the scene, this tool enables you to create
flyouts directly using the option ‘Manually Selected Points’.
Feature Flyouts
Create flyouts detailing information about features
This tool displays a detailed information box about the feature(s) that have been defined on
the nominal and/or measured models. The picture below shows an example.
Feature Flyouts – property sheet
All Features
Check this feature ON to create feature flyouts are for all existing features without pre-
selection. If the features are not visible, the flyouts will be created and appear in the
Inspect area in the tree, but they will not be visible until the feature itself is made visible.
All VisibleFeatures
When this button is checked ON, feature flyouts will only be created for those features
that are visible in the scene.
Note! If neither of these buttons is checked then you must select the features in the Inspection tree
To create feature flyouts for specific features
1. Select one or more nominal and/or measured features in the Inspection tree.
2. Click on the Feature Flyouts tool.
3. The flyouts will appear and can be dragged to suitable positions on the scene.
They will also appear in the Inspect area of the tree.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
382
To create feature flyouts for all features
1. Click on the arrow next to the Features flyout tool to open the property sheet.
2. Check the All features button ON.
3. Click on the Feature Flyouts tool.
4. The flyouts of visible features will appear and can be dragged to suitable positions on the
scene.
The flyouts of ALL features will appear in the Inspect area of the tree. The flyouts will
appear in the scene when the feature is made visible.
To create flyouts for visible features
1. Click on the arrow next to the Features flyout tool to open the property sheet.
2. Check the All Visible Features button ON.
3. Click on the Feature Flyouts tool.
4. The flyouts of visible features will appear and can be dragged to suitable positions on the
scene.
They will also appear in the Inspect area of the tree.
To delete a feature flyout
1. Select the Mixed Object Selection Tool.
2. Click the feature flyout to delete.
3. Press the <Delete> key on keyboard.
OR
1. Select the flyout in the tree
2. Right click and select Delete.
Flyout Properties
Changes the flyout display style
This tool enables you to edit the display characteristics of an existing flyout.
Flyouts that can be edited using this tool can be created using the following tools from the
Flyouts ribbon group.
The Compare Flyouts tool
The Feature Flyouts tool
The Create Rail Flyout tool
All Flyouts are listed under the "Fyouts"node in the Inspect section of the Inspection Tree,
This option schedules the Flyout Properties dialog. This dialog contains the Flyout
properties tab, the Flyout Colors tab and the Sign indication tab as described for the
Compare Flyouts tool.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
383
Arrange Flyouts
Automatically arranges flyouts and color bar in the current view
The Arrange Flyouts tool is used to automatically arrange all flyouts and color bars along
the sides of the screen.
Create Color Bar
Creates a deviation color bar
A color bar displays the color scale to represent the deviations between the selected
Measured and Nominal part.
Note: The Create Color Bar tool is only active when a comparison data is available in the scene.
To create a color bar
1. Select the comparison data in the Inspection tree.
2. Click on the Create Color bar tool.
A Color bar is placed in the center of the scene based on the color bar settings set in the
Color bar properties.
3. You can click and drag to relocate it to the desired location.
Note: The Arrange Flyouts tool also arranges the color bar in the scene along with other flyouts.
Color Bar Properties
Changes the deviation color bar properties
The Color bar Properties tool allows you to modify the properties of the deviation color
bar. It schedules the Color Bar Properties dialog.
The Color Bar Properties dialog box
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
384
Decimals
The Decimals option sets the number of decimal places for the numbers in the color bar
scale. Up to six decimal places can be set.
Text height
The Text height option sets the font size. Though the listed options are from 6 to 26, other
lower or higher numbers can be set.
Number of levels
This option allows you to set the number of values that are indicated on the color scale.
The minimum and maximum values are always displayed. The number of equally spaced
values shown between these is set by this parameter.
Color bar height / width pixel size
The Color bar height/width pixel size options set the size of the bounding box of the color
bar in screen pixel units.
Background
When this option is checked ON the color bar is displayed with a white background.
When this option is checked OFF, the color bar is displayed with a transparent
background.
Bounding box
When this option is checked ON the color bar is displayed with a border surrounding it.
When this option is checked OFF, no border is displayed.
Fixed spacing
When this option is checked ON the color bar is displayed with equidistant spacing
between the color bar values and equally large color zones. When this option is checked
OFF the values display and the color zones are scaled according to these values.
Create Rail Flyout
Creates a flyout to show information about a rail
This tool creates a flyout providing information about a selected rail.
The information presented is:
the average gap along the rail
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
385
the maximum gap detected and the section on which this was found
the minimum gap detected and the section on which this was found
the gap/flush parallelism which is the range between the maximum and minimum
dimension of the gap or flush respectively
number of sections contained in the rail.
To create a flyout for a rail
1. Select the rail for which the information is required.
2. Click on the Create Rail Flyout tool.
The flyout will appear on the rail
3. Drag the flyout to the required position.
Compare Rail Flyout
Creates a flyout to compare two rails
This tool generates a flyout that provides statistical comparison information about two
rails.
The information provided in the flyout is:
the average difference between the rails
the maximum difference between the rails
the minimum difference between the rails
the gap / flush center which is the maximum difference between the max gap / flush of
one section and the min gap / flush of the other section
To create a compare flyout for two rails
1. Select the pair of rails in the Inspection tree.
2. Click on the 'Compare Rail Flyout' tool.
The flyout will appear.
3. Drag the flyout to the required position.
Annotation
Creates an annotation
The Annotation tool is used to add your own annotation to a measured point, nominal or
measured features.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
386
To create annotation
1. Click the Annotation tool.
2. LMB click on the item to which you wish to add the annotation.
A field showing “Type your text here” with an arrow is created.
3. Drag the pointer to position the annotation and click to fix the position.
The Annotation still is in edit mode.
4. Edit the text with relevant information and press <Enter>.
5. If needed, another point can be clicked to add additional annotations.
The annotation will be listed under the "Fyouts"node in the Inspect section of the Inspection
Tree, and can be removed by deleting it from the tree.
The characteristics (colors) of the annotation flyout can be adjusted using the Flyout Properties
tool in the Compare Ribbon Group.
Scene Annotation
Enables you to add annotation to the display scene
This tool allows you to add textual annotation to a displayed scene. This annotation is un-
related to features and models and allows you to add additional text to the scene.
To add your own annotation to a scene
1. Click on the 'Scene Annotation' tool.
2. Click in the scene where you want to add the annotation.
3. When the input field appears, click on the field.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
387
4. The editing mode will be available and you can type in the text that you want to display.
5. Press <Enter> on the keyboard to accept the text.
To edit screen annotation
1. Click on the 'Scene Annotation' tool.
2. Click with MMB on the screen annotation text that you want to edit.
3. The editing mode will be available and you can type in the text that you want to display.
4. Press <Enter> on the keyboard to accept the text.
Compare Info
Provides information on compared point cloud (s)/mesh(es)
This option schedules the Comparison Information dialog.
Reporting
The Reporting Ribbon Group contains a set of tools related to reporting.
Create Report
Creates a report using templates
The Create Report tool creates excel reports of comparison results. Depending on the
selected template, the report can contain a title block, a global view, one or more section
views, a table and statistical information.
Reports appear in the Reports section of the Inspection tree. There are a number of
operations that can be performed on generated reports accessible from the pop up menu
obtained by clicking with the RMB.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
388
The Select Report Style dialog box
Template no table
This creates a report with a title block and a global view.
Template with table
This creates a report with a title block, a global view and a table.
Statistic template
This creates a report with a title block, a global view and statistical information.
Section template
This creates a report with a title block, a global view and one section view per sheet.
Template no table A3
This creates A3 size report with a title block and a global view.
Template with table A3
This creates A3 size report with a title block, a global view and a table.
Section template with view A3
This creates A3 size report with a title block, a global view and three section views per
sheet.
Section template A3
This creates A3 size report with a title block and four section views per sheet.
TBI template 1 view:
This creates TBI report with 1 section, TBI data and title block per sheet.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
389
TBI template 2 view
This creates TBI report with 2 sections - respective TBI data and title block per sheet.
TBI template 3 views A3
This creates TBI report with 3 sections- respective TBI data and title block per sheet of
A3 size.
TBI template with refA3
This creates TBI report with 3 sections and a TBI section selected as reference per sheet
of A3 size.
Template with Features
This creates a report on available features.
Template with Dimensions
This creates a report on available dimensions.
Template for Rails
This creates a report on available rails.
Template for GD&T
This creates a report which contains GD&T information. It schedules the Fill Report
Settings dialog on the GD&T Information tab described below.
Report name
This field specifies the name for the report.
[OK]
The OK button starts the creation of the report. The Fill Report Settings dialog box
appears to define the report settings.
[Cancel]
This button stops the creation of the report.
The Fill Report Settings dialog box
This dialog appears when the report template has been selected. It enables you to define
the information that is to be included in the report.
It contains three tabs. The Title tab always appears. The Table tab and the TBI tab only
appear when the template contains these items.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
390
The Title tab
The Title tab allows you to set the content of the title block in the report.
Drawing title
The Drawing title parameter represents the name of the report that appears as the heading
in the excel spreadsheet.
File name
The File name is derived from the mfi session file name. The user is not allowed to edit
this field.
Report name
The Report name is derived from the Report name field in the Select Report Style dialog
box.
Author name
The Author name represents name of the person responsible for the report.
Client name
The Client name represents the part’s owner name.
Article No
The Article No parameter represents the identification number of the part.
Reference
Any additional information related to the process.
Date meas
The date of measurement, to be entered by the user.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
391
Date rep
The date of report. This date is derived from the pc-clock automatically. The user is not
allowed to edit this field.
Use a custom logo
The Custom logo check box is used to confirm the use of the logo set in the Logo location
field.
Logo location
The Logo location field shows the location of the logo that is currently being used. A new
logo can be set by clicking the Browse… button and use the directory search.
The Table tab
The Table tab allows you to set the content of the table in the report.
Note: The Table tab only appears when a report template with table has been selected.
Column
Select the information you wish to view in each of the columns from the drop down list.
The Pass / Fail column provides an indication whether a condition passed or failed.
The TBI tab
The TBI tab allows setting the display style for Turbine Blade Inspection report.
Note: The TBI tab is only shown when a TBI view has been selected in the Select Report Style
dialog box.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
392
Chordal Length
Maximum reading on a vernier caliper obtained by rotating the section about the stacking
axis (center cross) in the jaws of the caliper.
The stacking axis is normal to the section plane and goes through the origin.
Maximum Thickness
Maximum diameter circle that can be fitted internally to the section.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
393
Leading Edge Thickness
This is the thickness of the section at a point predefined at a fixed distance from the LE
along the camber line.
Trailing Edge Thickness
This is the thickness of the section at a point predefined as a fixed distance from the TE
along the camber line.
Bow, Displacement
Bow and Displacement are the shifts in the vertical/horizontal axis of the center cross
after best fitting.
Twist
The angle of rotation of the section about the stacking axis after best fitting to nominal
axis.
DZ angle
Angle between a line drawn between the two points p1 and p2 (shown in above image)
and the X or Y-axis.
Displacement Factor
User defined Factor relating to bow, displacement and twist of 3 selected sections.
Select Reference
Select the reference section for the ‘Difference in Bow’ and ‘Difference in Displacement’
computation.
Select Measured
Select the measured section for the ‘Difference in Bow’ and ‘Difference in Displacement’
computation. The difference should indicate the difference from the Measured to the
Reference.
The GD&T Information tab
This tab appears when the GD&T template has been selected.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
394
Column
Select the information you wish to view in each of the columns from the drop down list.
High Resolution Pictures
When this option is checked ON, the report will contain high resolution pictures. This
allows using you to use font size 4 in the application which means that the flyouts are too
small to read on screen but in the report they will be readable. This option is especially
useful to include a large amount of information on A3-size reports.
1:1 Pictures
When this option is checked, the screen shot in the report will be in scale 1 to 1, resulting
in printouts that allow distances to be measured with a ruler.
Show this dialog box during Automation playback
When this option is checked, this dialog will appear when automation is about to make a
report, allowing the user to edit the report table and general information.
[OK]
The OK button starts the creation of the report using the settings in this dialog box. Excel
will start, showing the report. The report and its contained objects will be added to the
Reports node in the Inspect tree.
Note: that a default Excel macro (autorun_metris_macro) is run each time that a report is created.
This default macro can be adapted by users to run their own macro name
[Cancel]
This button stops the creation of the report.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
395
To create a report
1. Click the Create Report tool.
The Save as dialog appears in which you can specify where the report will be saved.
2. The Select Report Style dialog box appears.
3. Enter a name for the report in the Report name text box.
4. Select the Template required.
5. Click [OK] .
The Fill Report Settings dialog box appears.
The number of tabs in this dialog will depend on the type of template selected.
6. Fill in the required information for the Title tab.
7. If the Table or the TBI tabs appear fill in the appropriate information.
8. Click [OK].
Excel will open showing the report. For all subsequent reports, the newly created report is
added as a new work sheet in the Excel report file. The report and its contained objects
will be added to the Reports node in the Inspect tree.
Note that there are a number of options to manage the reports in the Inspection tree using
the RMB.
9. The report can be printed using the functions provided in Excel.
Note : There are a number of operations that can be performed on reports using the RMB on the
reports in the Inspection tree. This includes an option "Restore Report State" which restores a
report to its original state when modifications have been made.
Restore Report State
Restores the scene to correspond to the state in a report
This tool enables you to restore the scene to a state that corresponds to that of a selected
report. It is available when a report has been created. Reports appear in the Reports
section of the Inspection tree. There are a number of operations that can be performed on
generated reports accessible from the pop up menu obtained by clicking with the RMB.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
396
The Select Report dialog box
List of reports
Select the report that you want to restore the scene to correspond with, from the current
list of reports available.
To restore the scene to correspond to a report
Reports must have created and be available in the Reports node of the Inspection tree.
1. Click on the Restore Report State tool.
2. Select the report that you wish to see the corresponding state.
3. Click [OK].
The scene will be restored to the state that corresponds to the selected report.
Update Report
Updates a report with new items in view and table
The Update Report View and Table tool updates an existing report using the status of the
current session. It can also be used to re-create lost Excel reports.
Reports appear in the Reports section of the Inspection tree. There are a number of
operations that can be performed on generated reports accessible from the pop up menu
obtained by clicking with the RMB. The option "Restore Report State" which restores a
report to its original state when modifications have been made.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
397
The Select Report dialog box
To update a report
1. Select the reports to be updated or recreated.
2. Click [OK].
The report will be updated with the status of the current session, and will be presented in Excel.
Edit or recreate report
Edits an existing report’s Title and Table settings, or recreates a lost report
This tool allows you to edit a report.
Reports appear in the Reports section of the Inspection tree. There are a number of
operations that can be performed on generated reports accessible from the pop up menu
obtained by clicking with the RMB. The option "Restore Report State" which restores a
report to its original state when modifications have been made.
To edit a report
1. Click on the Edit or recreate tool.
2. The Select report dialog appears in which you can select the report to be edited.
3. Click [OK] to select the report.
4. The Select Report Style dialog appears in which you can define all the parameters relating
to the report.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
398
Object Information
Allows you to fill out the information required in a selected object information template.
This tool enables you to complete the information set out in an object information template.
It schedules the Object Information dialog.
See also : Defining object templates
The Object Information dialog
Template
By default this shows the currently selected template from those that have been defined.
[Other]
Clicking this button enables you to select another template. If password protection has
been set then you will need to enter the password in order to access a different template.
If the correct password is entered then a dialog appears in which defined templates can be
selected.
When the [OK] button is clicked a new template is selected, all existing fields are
replaced by those in the new template.
Object information
This contains a list of fields defined in the selected template. The value for each of the fields can
be filled in by the user.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
399
[OK]
Saves the written information in the current mfi, ready to be used by Report Features tool
(now still called ‘Spec Inspection 8.3 - Reporting - Features in DMIS out.doc’)
[Close]
Closes the dialog.
See also: Defining object templates
To fill in template information
1. Select the required template if necessary by clicking on [Other].
2. Enter the password if necessary.
3. Select the template from the drop down list then click [OK].
4. Fill in the description for each of the fields.
5. Click [OK] when the information is complete.
Report Features
Generates a report output file with compared features defined in a template
This tool generates a dmo (DMIS Out) or a DFQ-QSTAT or a TXT file (depending on the
selected file format), with a header as defined in Object information template and the
descriptions as filled out using the Object Information tool. This tool requires that you have
feature comparison objects available.
Report Features property sheet
Export using dmi file
The dmi file contains a list of features to be reported. When this option is on, these
features will be reported, regardless of the user selection. When this option is off, only
user selected features will be exported.
Export Object Information
When this option is checked the Object Information is exported in the header. When
unchecked, only the feature content is reported.
[Report features]
This writes a file containing the information. It schedules a "Save As" dialog, allowing
you specify a file name and format. The supported file formats are :
DMIS Out
DFQ-QSTAT file
TXT Object Info File
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
400
To create a feature output file
1. Feature comparison objects need to have been created and be available in the Inspect
section of the data tree.
2. Select the required feature comparison objects in the Inspection tree.
3. Click on the Report Features tool and open the property sheet.
4. Select the required options
5. Click [Report Features].
6. In the "Report Features as" enter the name of the file.
7. Select the file format from the drop down list.
8. Click [Save].
Dimensions
The Dimensions Ribbon Group contains commands to add dimensions to the drawing.
Linear Perpendicular
Determines the true linear dimension between two points or between a point and defined direction
This tool determines and displays the true 3D (linear) distance between two points or
between the point and a line/axis or the origin of the axis system. The distance can be
determined between any two points on the measured model or two points on nominal
features.
Options are provided to allow you to select a point on that section that lies within a radius
of a user-selected point.
The Linear Perpendicular property sheet
Towards
The options provided here allow you to choose how the second point will be defined. The
options provided are:
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
401
Second click
in this case the dimension will be determined between any two points defined by mouse
clicks. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled "Dim2pt".
Origin
in this case the linear dimension between a selected point and the origin of the coordinate
system will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled
"Dim2pt".
X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis,
in this case the perpendicular dimension between the selected point and the selected axis
will be determined. The dimension will appear in the Inspection tree labelled
"DimPerpendicular".
List of features
in this case the dimension will be determined between the selected point and the
perpendicular direction towards the selected feature. The dimension will appear in the
Inspection tree labelled "DimPerpendicular".
Find Extreme
Check this option ON to determine the dimension of a point that lies within a defined
radius around the selected point.
Note that this option is only effective if you are measuring the dimension on a section.
Search Radius
This value determines the radius of the circle around the user-selected point used to
define the dimension.
Target
This can be Closest Distance or Furthest Distance. This determines which point on the
search circle will be used to define the dimension. These options are illustrated in the
figure below.
To determine the true 3D distance between two points
1. Click on the Linear/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.
2. Select the option "Second Click" from the Towards menu.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
402
3. If you are measuring a section, you can use the Find Extreme option described above.
4. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB select a point in the measured model or
on nominal/measured feature
A small yellow square appears.
5. Move the pointer and click with LMB to select a second location.
A second yellow square is created with a bi-directional arrow connecting the two yellow
squares with the labeled distance.
6. Drag the pointer to position the displayed dimension as required.
7. Click with LMB to fix the measurement labels.
The dimension remains on the scene and appears in the Inspection tree.
8. Click on a new point to create another dimension measurement.
To determine the true 3D distance between a point and a line
1. Click on the Linear/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.
2. Select the required option from the Towards menu. This can be one of the coordinate axes
or a feature.
3. If you are measuring a section, you can use the Find Extreme option described above.
4. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB select a point in the measured model or
on nominal/measured feature
A small yellow square appears.
5. Drag the pointer to position the displayed dimension as required.
6. Click with LMB to fix the measurement labels.
The dimension remains on the scene and appears in the Inspection tree.
7. Click on a new point to create another dimension measurement.
Note: The Bi-directional arrow labeling the measurement would relocate and stick to their axes
when the scene view is tumbled.
Aligned Parallel
Creates dimensions that are aligned with an axis or a feature
This tool determines the distance between two points in a specified direction. The points
can be any two selected point in the measured model, or selected points on features in the
nominal model. The direction in which the dimension is measured can be selected and
includes the model and the screen axes as well as parallel to defined features.
Specific options are available for measuring the dimension of a section that allow you to
select a point that lies within a radius of the user-selected point.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
403
The Aligned Parallel property sheet
Parallel To
The options in this drop down list allow to select the direction in which the dimension
will be measured. The following options are provided:
Automatic XYZ
this option enables you to interactively select the direction for the dimension to match the
screen axes.
X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis,
the dimension will be aligned with the X, Y or Z axis and the name of the axis will be
indicated on the flyout.
List of defined features
in these cases, the dimension will be determined in a direction that is parallel to the
selected feature.
Find Extreme
Check this option on to determine the dimension of a point that lies within a defined
radius around the selected point.
Note that this option is only effective if you are measuring the dimension on a section.
Search Radius
This value determines the radius of the circle around the user-selected point used to
define the dimension.
Target
This can be Closest Distance or Furthest Distance. This determines which point on the
search circle will be used to define the dimension. These options are illustrated in the
figure below.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
404
To measure the distance between two points
1. Click on the Aligned/Parallel Dimension tool to open the property sheet.
2. Select the direction in which the dimension will be measured from the list available in the
Parallel To drop down list.
3. When the cursor appears as a cross, use the LMB select a point in the measured model or
on nominal/measured feature
A small yellow square appears.
4. Move the pointer and click with LMB to select a second location.
A second yellow square is created with a bi-directional arrow connecting the two yellow
squares with the labeled distance.
5. Drag the pointer to position the distance measurement along the required axis.
If you have selected the option Automatic XYZ, you can adjust the dimension presented
as you drag.
6. Click with LMB to fix the measurement labels.
The dimension remains on the scene and appears in the Inspection tree.
7. Click on a new point to create another dimension.
Gap-Step Dimension
Creates a gap-step dimension by indicating 3 points
In any given process there will be an ideal separation (gap) and ideal relative depth (step)
that was specified at design time. The manufactured product however will deviate from this
ideal by a varying amount. The figure below gives a cross section through two flat panels,
showing the definition of gap and step.
The Gap-Step Dimension tool provides a manual way of measuring the relative position of
two panels in an assembled product. This tool works best on sections across the panels.
The Gap – Step Dimension property sheet
Use LSQ Fit
This option works on sections. Instead of using the line connecting the first 2 points, a
least square fit line over all points in between these 2 points is used.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
405
To measure the gap between two panels
1. Select a good view on the section or measurement (for example using the View section
tool).
2. Indicate the line to represent one side of the gap. This is done by clicking with the LMB
on two positions along this line. The gap dimension is displayed as a bi-directional arrow
connecting the two yellow squares with the distance labeled.
3. Move the pointer to the other side of the gap and click the LMB on the location where the
gap needs to be measured to fix the gap dimension.
A second yellow square is created with a bi-directional arrow connecting the two yellow
squares with the distance labeled.
4. Optionally drag the mouse pointer to relocate the measurement labels and click to fix the
label.
The dimension appears on the data tree.
Gap Flush Caliper
Use of predefined calipers to determine Gap and Step dimensions in a repeatable manner along a rail
Gap - Step measurements are common practice in applications such as Sheet metal and
Aeronautics. They are used to describe the relation of adjacent parts.
In almost all most cases, this is still a manual operation, where people use plastic
‘calipers’ to check the gap, while a hand-sweep checks for the step. Each measurement is
made on multiple sections along a rail. A rail consists of multiple sections and contains the
statistics of these Gap – Step measurements. This tool allows the use of predefined calipers
to determine Gap and Step dimensions in a repeatable manner along a rail.
It schedules the Gap-Flush Dimension dialog that contains three tabs.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
406
Gap-Flush Dimension dialog
Dimension tab
Nominal
The number of nominal sections selected.
Measured
The number of measured sections selected.
Manual
This option allows the user to manually indicate the Gap – Step dimension points.
Least Square Fit
When this option is checked all points between the first two points are used to fit a line
Caliper
This allows the user to select a caliper from the list of available calipers
Use on Rail
When checked, the caliper will be used on all sections in a rail.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
407
Section healing tolerance
This tolerance value allows you to ignore small gaps in the sections when positioning the
caliper.
Gap Caliper Definition tab
Caliper
[Save]
This opens a Save As dialog and saved the current caliper to disc and renames the
‘current’ caliper with the file name (without extension).
[Load]
This opens a File Import dialog and allows you to select an existing caliper file. The
selected caliper file and the caliper is added to the drop down list.
Dimension
Each distance represents a dimension of the caliper as shown in the picture.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
408
Angles
Each angle represents an angle of the caliper as shown in the picture.
Flush Caliper Definition
Caliper
[Save]
This opens a Save As dialog and saves the current caliper to disc and renames the
‘current’ caliper with the file name (without extension).
[Load]
This opens a File Import dialog and allows you to select an existing caliper file. The
selected caliper file and the caliper is added to the drop down list.
Dimension
Each distance represents a dimension of the caliper as shown in the picture.
Angles
Each angle represents an angle of the caliper as shown in the picture.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
409
Reverse dimension sign
When this option is checked, it reverses the sign of the flush dimensions used during the
detection of the dimension.
To create a gap / flush using a caliper
1. Use the Create Section tool, in the FeatureFitting or the Compare toolbars to create
sections and add them to a rail.
2. Click on the Create Gap / Flush using Calipers tool.
3. Define the Caliper required by clicking on the Gap Caliper Definition tab or the Gap
Caliper Definition tab, or click [Load] to load a previously saved caliper.
4. Click [Save] to save the defined caliper.
5. Click on the Dimensions tab.
6. Click Calipers.
7. Check the 'Use on Rail' then select the rail that the rail on which the caliper will be
placed.
8. Click [Dimension].
The caliper is automatically positioned on the rail/section(s) and computes the distances defined
by the caliper.
When used on Gap or Step dimensions, the caliper information is stored and visible in the
Information dialog.
Radius
Creates radial dimensions for circles and arcs
This tool measures the radius of the circle and arc features that were created in the
Nominal or Measured task.
The method whereby the dimension is determined depends in the method used to select the
feature in the scene. When the lasso tool is used to select the feature then a Least Squares
Fit is used to fit a circle over all the points.
To determine the radius of a circular feature
1. Click on the Radius tool.
2. Click on the center point of a circle. A line arrow passing through the center of the circle
with a single arrow on the circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.
3. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the line and click on the label to fix it.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
410
To determine a radius using the Least Squares Fit
1. Click on the Radius tool.
2. In the Selection dialog click on the Lasso Select option.
3. Use the LMB to trace a lasso around the required points.
4. Click with the MMB to define the lasso.
5. Click again with the MMB to determine the circle that passes through the points.
A line arrow passing through the center of the circle with a single arrow on the
circumference is created. A label shows the value of the radius.
6. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the line and click on the label to fix it.
To measure the radius between two points
1. Click on the Radius tool.
2. In the Selection dialog click on the Pick Select option.
3. Use the LMB to click on the first point.
4. Use the LMB to select the second point.
A circle will appear that passes through the two points.
5. Adjust the position as required and click again with the LMB to define it.
6. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the line and click on the label to fix it.
Diameter
Creates diameter dimensions for circles and arcs
The Diameter tool measures the diameter of the circle and arc features that were created
on the Nominal or Measured models.
The method whereby the dimension is determined depends in the method used to select the
feature in the scene. When the lasso tool is used to select the feature then a Least Squares
Fit is used to fit a circle over all the points. When the Pick tool is used, the circle will be
created through the picked points.
To determine the diameter of a circular feature
1. Click on the Diameter tool.
2. Click on the center point of a circle. A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and
connecting the circumference of the circle is created with a label showing the distance of
the diameter.
3. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the bi-directional arrow and click on
the label to fix it.
To determine a diameter using the Least Squares Fit
1. Click on the Diameter tool.
2. In the Selection dialog click on the Lasso Select option.
3. Use the LMB to trace a lasso around the required points.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
411
4. Click with the MMB to define the lasso.
5. Click again with the MMB to determine the circle that passes through the points.
A bi-directional arrow passing through the center and connecting the circumference of the
circle is created with a label showing the distance of the diameter.
6. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the bi-directional arrow and click on
the label to fix it.
To measure the diameter between two points
1. Click on the Diameter tool.
2. In the Selection dialog click on the Pick Select option.
3. Use the LMB to click on the first point.
4. Use the LMB to select the second point.
A circle will appear that passes through the two points.
5. Adjust the position as required and click again with the LMB to define it.
6. Drag the pointer around to relocate the location of the bi-directional arrow and click on
the label to fix it.
Angle
Creates an angular dimension
This interactive tool is used to compute the angle between two lines created on the
measured object. The angle shown is always less than 90 deg. Lines are made longer if
necessary. Use this tool on planer points (intersecting lines/sections), otherwise end points
of the angle will not necessarily be on the line.
The Angle property sheet
Use LSQ Fit
This option works on sections. Instead of using the line connecting the first 2 points, a
least square fit line over all points in between these 2 points is used.
To create an Angular Dimension
1. Click on the Angular tool.
If you are measuring a section, you can click on the arrow to open the property sheet and
use the Use LSQ Fit option described above.
2. Pick a point on the measured object.
A dynamic preview of the line used for dimension will appear with one end anchored at
the selected point and the other end at the current cursor location. Any movement of the
cursor will immediately update the line preview.
3. Pick second point, which will define the first line.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
412
4. Pick a third point. This will generate a new line starting at the second point and reveal the
angle between the two lines.
5. Move the cursor at this position to update the dimension.
6. Click on a fourth point to define the angle between 2 objects (lines).
7. Click on the label to fix the position of text.
View Section
Shows and modifies the Section view for the Section report, allowing for fast dimensioning
The 2D Section View command is used for dimensioning and reporting of a section created
in the Compare task . It schedules the View Section dialog box to set appropriate views.
The View Section dialog box
Rotate through angle
This button applies a rotation that is entered in the input field.
Note: Positive values rotate the view in 90 degrees clockwise and negative values rotate the section
view in counter clockwise.
Rotate through 90 degrees counterclockwise
Rotate the section view 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Rotate through 90 degree clockwise
Rotate the section view 90 degrees clockwise.
Flip vertically.
Flip the Section view vertically.
Flip horizontally.
Flip the Section view horizontally.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
413
[X] [Y] [Z]
These buttons set the selected axis vertically in the scene.
Scale
Adapts the magnification of the section in the scene.
[Default Scale]
This restores the magnification scale to the default magnification so that it fits in the
scene.
[Pick] / [Restore]
The [Pick] button provides the view of the selected section. The [Restore] button returns
the view to the complete models.
[Apply to All]
Assigns the current settings to all sections.
To view sections
1. Select a section in the Inspection tree if required.
2. Click on the View Section tool
3. Select a different section if required and click [Pick]
4. Set the parameters defining the View.
The view will be updated.
Export
This Ribbon Group contains a set of tools that enable you to export a variety of objects to
file.
Features
Exports features to a file
This tool enables you to export features to MFF (Metris Feature Files) or TXT (Delimited
ASCII Files) or IGS, IGES (Interop) files. Features that have been exported to an MFF file
can then be imported using the Import Features tool.
It schedules the "Export features as" dialog in which you can specify the file in which the
features will be exported.
If you select to export the features to a Delimited ASCII file, you will be presented with
the Export Features dialog in which you can select the specific feature data to be exported
and the Delimiter (Tab or Comma) to be used.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
414
Note that Failed features can be exported using the specific Failed Features tool in the Export
ribbon group in the Report tab.
To export features
1. Select the Features to be exported (in the tree).
2. Click on the tool.
3. In the "Export features as" dialog enter a name for the file in which the features are to
stored.
4. If the output format you have chosen is ASCII delimited, select the feature information to
be exported and the delimiter to be used.
5. Click [Save].
Section Planes
Exports selected section planes to a file
The Section Planes tool exports selected compared sections to a text file (txt). The Save
Sections as dialog box will prompt for a file name.
The exported sections can later be used on similar parts for comparing sections.
Section/Mesh borders
Exports sections or mesh borders
This tool allows you to export sections or mesh borders in various formats.
The formats supported are:
Igs Files (*.igs)
Iges Files (*.iges)
The IGES sections should inherit the color of the sections and mesh borders in Inspection.
-For created sections, this is the color of the created section.
-For compare sections this is the color of the measured section of the compare section.
Delimited ASCII files (*.asc)
the section/border is exported in the ascii format, listing the xyz coordinates of each point.
It schedules the "Export Sections / Mesh Borders as" dialog in which you can specify the location
and the name of the file containing the selected items.
Deviations
Export tabulated deviations to file
This tool allows you to export calculated deviations from a compare information object
into a text file for further treatment. All pre-selected compare objects can be exported.
It schedules the Select output file dialog box which will prompt for a file name. It then
schedules the Export Deviations dialog.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
415
Export Deviations dialog box
Selected
These fields display the number of selected compare objects according to the item
selected from the Selection field, as well as the total number of available.
Selection
The following items can be used for selection.
Existing Flyouts the points to which a flyout is connected.
All points all point of the compare object.
Worst the defined number of points with the worst deviation.
Worst x positive and negative points the defined number of points with the worst deviation in both senses.
Points outside a defined proportion of points whose value lies outside the range.
Information
The following parameters can set:
Statistics This exports a header-type of information with all the numerical values as displayed in
the Compare Information dialog on the first page ‘Numbers’.
Point number Each line with information of a point starts with the point number.
Measured point The X, Y and Z coordinate of the measured point.
Nominal point The X, Y and Z coordinate of the projected point.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
416
XYZ deviations The X, Y and Z deviation of the point.
3D deviation The 3D deviation of the point.
Tolerances The tolerances imported and used in Directional compare.
To export a deviation
1. Select a compare object in the data tree.
2. Click on the Export Deviation tool.
3. Select a file name and location where the exported data is to be located.
4. Click [Save].
5. In the Export Deviations dialog, select the data to be exported.
6. Select the information to be included.
7. Click [OK].
The file will be generated. The file name will be {the given name}-dev.txt.
Feature Compare Info
Exports Feature Compare Info to as user defined file
This tool enables you to export feature compare information object to a specific customer
defined file format. It schedules a file selection dialog in which you can define the location
and the file type.
To export feature compare info to a file
1. Select the features you wish to export. If no specific features are selected, then all features
will be exported.
2. Click on the tool.
3. In the "Export Feature Deviations as" dialog enter the name for the file and the file type.
4. Click [Save].
Failed Features
Exports failed feature information to a user defined file
This tool enables you to export failed feature information to a specific customer defined file
format. It schedules a file selection dialog in which you can define the location and the file
type. Failed features are those that failed to be detected using the Auto Dimension tool in
the Feature Fitting toolbar in the Measured task .
To export failed feature information
1. Click on the tool.
2. In the Export Failed Features dialog select the input file and specify the output file type.
3. Click [Export].
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (Solid) workflow
417
All Nominal features that did not produce a measured feature will be exported.
418
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (STL Based) workflow
The STL based workflow deals with meshes as primary Nominal models. It consists of the
following tasks.
Nominal task
The Nominal task consists of the following ribbon groups:
Import Nominal
The tools in this group are described below.
Feature Fitting
Detect / Fit Feature is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.
Export Features is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.
Create Section is described in Solid Based Workflow - Compare Task - Compare.
Intersection is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.
Project Object is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.
Detect Edge is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.
Mesh Border is described in Solid Based Workflow - Measured Task - Feature Fitting.
Flip feature is described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Feature Fitting.
GD&T Dimensions
All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - GD&T
Dimensions.
Cut / Merge
All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Measured Task - Cut /
Merge.
Filter / Mesh
All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Measured Task - Filter /
Mesh.
Modify Nominal
All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Measured Task - Modify
Measured.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (STL Based) workflow
419
Handheld Measurements task
All of the ribbon groups and tools contained in this task are described in the
Solid Based Workflow - Handheld Measurements task
Measured task
All of the ribbon groups and tools contained in this task are described in the
Solid Based Workflow - Measured task
Align task
All of the ribbon groups and tools contained in this task are described in the
Solid Based Workflow - Align task
Compare task
All of the ribbon groups and tools contained in this task are described in the
Solid Based Workflow - Compare task
Report task
All of the ribbon groups and tools contained in this task are described in the
Solid Based Workflow - Report task.
Import Nominal Ribbon Group
The Import Nominal toolbar contains commands to import the nominal point cloud /mesh
models.
It consists of the following tools :
Import - described below.
Import Features - described below.
Solid to Mesh - described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Import Nominal.
Add to Nominal - described in Solid Based Workflow - Nominal Task - Import Nominal.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
420
Import
Imports a point cloud / mesh
This tool imports a new point cloud or a mesh from a variety of file types and places the
object in the nominal section of the Inspection data tree.
The Import dialog
Files of type
You can import files of the following types:
Delimited ASCII: any ASCII file where the X, Y and Z values are separated by a
delimiting character ISO: a file with ISO codes (such as G00, G01, ...)
STL: an ASCII or binary STL (stereo lithography) file
IGES: points in an IGES file
RIS: a Range Image Standard file.
Hyscan: a Hyscan measurement file.
Metris Base file (mbf-format).
Kube files (sab2 format)
Metris Focus files (*.mfi)
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (STL Based) workflow
421
The options available depend on the type of file being imported.
Import as a single point cloud
You can import several files at the same time. All files you select must be of the same
type. If you check the Import as a single point cloud checkbox, a single point cloud will
be created from the selected files. If you leave this checkbox unchecked, each file will be
imported as a separate point cloud.
Import as Feature points
This option allows you to import cloud points directly as features.
Use prefilter 1 out of
During import you can filter the point cloud by checking the Use prefilter 1 out of
checkbox. Enter the Prefilter step in the Prefilter’s edit box. Only one out of Prefilter step
points of the point cloud(s) in the file will be visible in static display.
Note: If you use a prefilter when importing a STL file, the mesh will be discarded.
Merge all point clouds
If the Merge all point clouds option is checked ON, all the selected point clouds are
merged into one point cloud and only one object is added into the Measured tree. If
Merge all point clouds option is checked OFF, all the point clouds are imported one by
one, and a separate object is created for each point cloud in the Measured tree.
When the importation is started, ISO, STL, IGES, RIS Hyscan, Metris Base and Kube files are
directly imported. For Delimited ASCII files, the Import Delimited ASCII dialog appears. This
dialog has three tabs that must be stepped through in order to complete the importation.
The General tab
The General tab shows a preview of your file. Each line in the preview is preceded between
brackets by its line number in the file. By default the preview only shows you the beginning
and end of the file. If you press the Show full preview button, the preview will expand to
show the whole file.
Note that it may take some time to view a large file.
You can also set the following options in the General tab:
Skip first lines
Inspection will not read the first lines in the file (for example the file header)
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
422
Skip last lines
Skip last lines: Inspection will not read the last lines in the file (for example the file
footer)
The Delimiters tab
The columns for the X, Y and Z values in a delimited ASCII file are separated by one or
more delimiting characters.
Delimiters
Selection of delimiters indicating the columns in the file.
The Treat consecutive delimiters as one
This checkbox, allows you to collapse consecutive delimiters into one.
Data preview
View if the contents of the file, with columns separated by ‘|’ characters.
The Columns tab
The Columns tab allows you to set what columns in your file will be used for the X, Y and Z
coordinates. For each coordinate you can choose to read it from a column in the file, or to
keep it fixed at a certain value.
To import a point cloud / mesh
1. Click the Import Point cloud/ Mesh tool to open the Import dialog box.
2. Select the File Type in the drop down box at the bottom of the dialog.
3. Select one or more files and click the [Open] button.
Handheld Measurement - Inspection (STL Based) workflow
423
4. If the Import delimited ASCII dialog box pops up, modify the parameters under General,
Delimiters or Columns tabs if needed and click the OK button when done.
The point cloud(s) / meshes are imported and automatically placed under the data node of the
Inspection tree located in the Nominal window.
Import Features
Imports features that have been exported using the Export features tool.
This tool enables you to import features that have been exported using the Export Features
tool. It schedules the Import Metris Focus Files dialog in which you can browse for the file
that contains the exported features.
The file types supported are:
- .TXT (client feature files)
- .MFF (Metris feature files)
- CSV (CSV feature files - Audiplan)
- INS (INS feature files - Audiplan)
The imported features appear in the nominal tree list and can be seen on the structure.
To import nominal features
1. Click on the Import Nominal Features tool.
2. In the "Import Metris Focus files" dialog browse for the file in which features have been
exported using the Export Features tool.
3. Click [Import].
424
Handheld Measurements - Inspection Turbine Blades workflow
This workflow deals with solids as primary Nominal models and contains specific functions for
turbine blade inspection.
Nominal task
All of the ribbon groups and tools contained in this task are described in the
Solid Based Workflow - Nominal task
Handheld Measurements task
All of the ribbon groups and tools contained in this task are described in the
Solid Based Workflow - Handheld Measurements task
Measured task
All of the ribbon groups and tools contained in this task are described in the
Solid Based Workflow - Measured task
Align task
All of the ribbon groups and tools contained in this task are described in the
Solid Based Workflow - Align task
Turbine Blade task
The Nominal task consists of the following ribbon groups:
Compare
All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Compare Task - Compare.
Sections
All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Compare Task - Sections.
Construct
All of the tools in this group are described in Solid Based Workflow - Compare Task - Construct.
TBI
The tools in this group are described below.
Handheld Measurements - Inspection Turbine Blades workflow
425
Report task
All of the ribbon groups and tools contained in this task are described in the
Solid Based Workflow - Report task.
TBI Ribbon Group
The TBI Ribbon Group contains commands for turbine blade inspection and flyouts.
Turbine Inspect
The Turbine Inspect tool calculates specific turbine blade parameters from sections
and a specific section alignment. The specific section alignment is possible for measured
sections and their corresponding solid, and for section compare objects (in which case no
solid required).
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
426
Turbine Inspect dialog box
Handheld Measurements - Inspection Turbine Blades workflow
427
Selection
When the dialog is opened, the first available section or section compare object is
automatically selected.
You can use the arrow buttons at the bottom of the dialog to select the
next and previous section or section compare object in the Inspection tree.
If no pre-selection of sections or section compare objects was made before the dialog was
open, then these arrows will enable you to step through all the available objects. If a
number of sections or section compare objects were pre-selected then these arrows will
step through just the pre-selected objects.
Dimensions
Dimensions associated with the current section are displayed in the Dimension Results
area.
Fields are provided to allow you to adapt the parameters that will be used for computing
dimensions associated with the current section. When the Turbine Inspect tool is selected,
the selected object is orientated so that it aligns with axes as shown below.
Turbine Blade dimensions
The parameters that can be set are:
Trailing Edge position
Left or Right - these buttons are used to indicate which on side of the section the
distance is to be taken. The orientation of the section is always as indicated in the
figure above when the Turbine Inspect tool is selected.
Distance from L/E
Distance from the leading edge: required for computing the Leading Edge
Thickness.
Distance from T/E
Distance from trailing edge: required for computing the Trailing Edge Thickness.
Chord length at:
DZ angle - chord length at the current DZ angle.
A specified DZ angle. When this option is selected, the chord length is computed
based on this value.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
428
Results (Dimensions)
The dimensions described below are computed when ever a selection is made.
Chord: Maximum reading on a vernier caliper obtained by rotating the section about the
stacking axis (indicated by the circle with a cross) in the jaws of the caliper.
Max Thick: diameter of the largest inscribed circle to the section.
L/E thick: the leading edge thickness is the thickness of the section at a point predefined
as a fixed distance from the LE along the camber line (line joining centers of adjoining
circles fitted internally to the section). The trailing edge must be indicated as being on the
left or the right.
T/E thick: the trailing edge thickness is the thickness of the section at a point predefined
as a fixed distance from the TE along the camber line.
DZ angle: Angle between the chord line and the X axis.
[Compute]
This calculates the dimensions listed above using the defined parameters. For a compare
section, it calculates the dimensions of measured section; for a measured section it
calculates the dimensions of the available section.
Alignment
Name
The name with which the alignment will be saved.
Keep True Position Data
When this option is checked a copy of the section is made. It is the copy that is aligned,
the original will be unchanged.
2D Best Fit
Performs a best fit of the section to the solid or the compare measured section to the
nominal section in case of a section compare object.
Minimal Improvement
The external stop criteria for Best Fit command.
[Apply]
This button starts the Best Fit alignment. The results are displayed in the Results area.
Manual
This area provides tools to manually align the section to the solid, or the compare
measured section to the nominal section inside the compared section.
Handheld Measurements - Inspection Turbine Blades workflow
429
Displacement and Bow dimensions
These up and down buttons, as well as the keyboard arrow keys, can be used to
adjust the Bow.
The left and right buttons, as well as the keyboard arrow keys, can be
used to adjust the Displacement.
The + and - buttons, as well as the keyboard + and - keys, can be used to adjust the
Twist by rotating the section in the plane, around the stacking axis of the current section.
[Set]
Click on this button to define the adjustments that will be made with the buttons in terms
of Bow/Displacement (shift) and Twist (rotation).
Results
The results area shows the results of the alignment, expressed in terms of the
Displacement, Bow and Twist.
Bow and Displacement are the shifts perpendicular/parallel to the chord length.
Twist is the angle of rotation of the section about the stacking axis.
[Restore]
Restores the section to its original location before the dialog box was opened.
These buttons are used to select the previous or next section or compare section. If no
pre-selection of sections or section compare objects was made before the dialog was
open, then these arrows will enable you to step through all the available objects. If a
number of sections or section compare objects were pre-selected then these arrows will
step through just the pre-selected objects.
[Close]
Closes the dialog.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
430
To align a turbine blade section
1. If you wish to work with just a selection of sections, pre-select them in the tree first.
2. Click on the Turbine Inspect tool.
The Turbine Inspect dialog will appear. The first section in the list, or the first pre-
selected section will appear in the Selection field.
3. Enter a name for the alignment if you want a name other than the default name.
4. If you wish to make a copy of the section that is to be aligned, check the "Keep True
Position Data" button. The original section will be unchanged.
5. You can perform an alignment in two ways:
2D Best fit
Enter the required Minimal Improvement and click [Apply].
Manually
Use the buttons to manually shift the section along the Displacement and the Bow
directions and rotate it around the stacking axis.
6. The results of the alignment will be displayed in the Results field.
7. Click on [Restore] if the alignment is not as expected.
8. Click on the Previous and Next buttons at the bottom of the dialog to
view the other available sections. The selected item is highlighted in the tree.
To calculate turbine blade dimensions
1. The dimensions associated with that section will be displayed in the Dimensions- Results
fields.
2. Change the parameters used to determine the dimensions if necessary.
- You can adjust the distance from the left or right leading edge at which you wish to
compute the blade thickness.
- You can define a specific DZ angle at which the chord length will be calculated.
3. Click [Compute] to compute the new dimensions for the current selection.
4. Click on the Previous and Next buttons at the bottom of the dialog to
view the other available sections. The selected item is highlighted in the tree.
Turbine Blade Flyout
The Turbine Blade Flyout tool creates flyouts on sections with TBI information. The
following parameters are shown in the flyout:
Handheld Measurements - Inspection Turbine Blades workflow
431
Bow & Displacement
Bow and Displacement are the shifts in the vertical/horizontal axis of the center cross
after best fitting.
Twist
The angle of rotation of the section about the stacking axis after best fitting to nominal
axis.
Chordal Length
Maximum reading on a vernier caliper obtained by rotating the section about the stacking
axis (center cross) in the jaws of the caliper.
The stacking axis is normal to the section plane and goes through the origin.
Maximum Thickness
Maximum diameter circle that can be fitted internally to the section.
Trailing Edge Thickness
TE Thickness is the thickness of the section at a point predefined as a fixed distance from
the TE along the camber line (line joining centers of adjoining circles fitted internally to
the section).
DZ angle
Angle between a line drawn between the two points p1 and p2 (shown in above image)
and the X or Y-axis.
To create flyouts
1. Compute the dimension of compare section or measured section using ‘Compute’ button
from ‘Turbine Inspect’ tool.
2. Activate Turbine Blade Flyout and click on computed section.
3. A flyout mentioning TBI details is shown.
4. If TBI data for section is not computed then a flyout as ‘No tbi info found’ is shown.
432
The Information dialog
This document describes the fields that appears in a number of informational dialogs.
These dialogs are:
The Attributes dialog
The Global Comparison dialog
The Section Information dialog box
The Directional Compare Information dialog
The Feature Statistics Information dialog
The Golden Template statistics dialog
The Curvature Radius dialog
The Wall thickness dialog
There are five tabs in these dialogs. The tabs that are available will depend on the dialog and
whether a single or multiple comparisons are selected.
The Numbers tab
The Numbers tab shows statistical information about the comparison. This parameters on the
Numbers tab are listed below for the following dialog boxes:
The Global Comparison Information dialog box
The Section Information dialog box
The Directional Compare Information dialog box
The Compare Edges dialog box
The Feature Statistics Information dialog box
that also displays additional information.
See also:
The Curvature Radius dialog
The Wall thickness dialog
The Information dialog
433
Number of valid Points represents the number of points actually used for compare.
Maximum Deviation
represents the largest positive distance between a compared point and the nominal model.
Minimum Deviation represents the smallest distance or the largest negative distance between a compared point
and the nominal model.
Range represents the range of distances of the measured data to the nominal model.
Mean Deviation represents the average of the distances of the measured data to the nominal model.
Sigma represents the statistical sigma of the distances of the measured data to the nominal
model.
Root Mean Square represents the statistical root mean square of the distances of the measured data to the
nominal model.
The Curvature Radius Information dialog - Numbers tab
This dialog contains the addition parameters listed below:
Number of Valid Points represents the number of points actually used for compare.
Maximum Radius represents the maximum local radius of a point cloud or mesh.
Minimum Radius represents the minimum local radius of a point cloud or mesh.
Range represents the difference of Maximum Radius and the Minimum radius.
The Wall Thickness Information dialog – Numbers tab
This dialog contains the following additional parameters:
Maximum Thickness represents the global maximum distance to the opposite wall.
Minimum Thickness represents the global minimum distance to the opposite wall.
Range represents the difference between the Maximum and the Minimum Thickness.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
434
The Colors tab
The Colors tab shows the colors and tolerances used in the display of the comparison result.
This tab appears in the following dialog boxes:
The Section Information dialog box
The Directional Compare Information dialog box
The Compare Edges dialog box
The Curvature Radius Information dialog box
The Wall Thickness Information dialog box
The Feature Statistics Information dialog box
[Save]
This saves the current color scale.
[Open]
Click on the Open button to restore the already saved color scale.
The Information dialog
435
Default colors
Check this button to use or switch back to the default colors.
Note : the values set for the limits of the color range correspond to the upper and lower Compare
Tolerance values set as an attribute of the object.
Reverse colors
This button will reverse the order of the colors with the scale values.
Manual colors
If the colors are changed using the dropdown lists, the manual colors check box will be
checked on.
Discrete
Check the discrete button to use discrete colors. For discrete option, there are 16 colors
available.
Smooth
Check the Smooth button to use smooth colors. For smooth option, there are 15 colors
available.
[Fill]
If the slider is used to select more colors, the color boundaries are not automatically
filled. The color boundaries can be specified manually or automatically using the Fill
button. The Fill button will not modify the color boundaries whose check box is checked
on.
[Apply]
This button updates the comparison information object in your drawing.
To adjust the colors used to display information
1. To adjust the number of colors being used, use the slider on the left.
2. To define specific values to colors, click the check box in front of the color.
3. To change the color, select a new color from the drop down list.
4. Click [Fill] to adjust the colors.
5. Click [Apply] to update the scale in the drawing.
6. Click [Save] to save the defined color scale.
The Interrogate tab
The Interrogate tab shows the number of points with values in specific ranges.
This tab appears in the following dialog boxes:
The Section Information dialog box
The Directional Compare Information dialog box
The Compare Edges dialog box
The Curvature Radius Information dialog box
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
436
The Wall Thickness Information dialog box
The Feature Statistics Information dialog box
Points
The Points section lists how many points lie inside or outside the specified bounds, both
in absolute number as in percentage. The bounds can be modified in the edit boxes.
[Recalculate]
The Recalculate button recalculates the number of points that lie inside or outside the
specified bounds. Press this button after modification of these bounds.
Color groups
The Color groups section contains a pie chart and a bar displaying how many points lie
between the color boundaries set on the Color page.
Apply
Press the [Apply] button to update the comparison information object in your drawing.
The Drawstyle tab
The Drawstyle tab shows the drawstyle options for the selected object display.
This information applies to the:
The Information dialog
437
The Comparison Information dialog box
The Directional Compare Information dialog box
The Wall Thickness Information dialog box
The Feature Statistics Information dialog box
See also :
The Section information dialog
The Edge information dialog
The Attributes dialog
General drawstyle panel
Points Check the Points check box to display the comparison information as colored points.
Lines Check the Lines check box to display the comparison information as colored lines.
Deviation scale factor
The scale factor of the deviation lines can be set and modified using the Deviation scale
factor edit box and slider. The scale factor gives the amplification of the deviation lines
on the screen with respect to their real length. Initially, the range of the slider bar is
limited to 100. A larger scale factor can be typed in the edit box, followed by pressing the
Apply button. The range of the slider bar will automatically expand.
Note: the Deviation scale factor edit box and slider is only enabled if the Lines drawstyle is chosen
The Section Information dialog – Drawstyle tab
This dialog contains an additional Section drawstyle panel which is only visible for
section comparison information. The General drawstyle panel is the same as described
above.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
438
Measured section
Check the Measured section check box on to show the measured section. In the
corresponding drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the
measured section, check this check box off.
Nominal section
Check the Nominal section check box to show the nominal section. In the corresponding
drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the nominal section,
check this check box off.
Tolerance bands
Check the Tolerance bands check box to show the section tolerance bands as offsets from
the nominal section. To hide the tolerance bands, check this check box off.
Bounding rectangle
Check the Bounding rectangle check box to show the bounding rectangle of the section.
In the corresponding drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the
bounding rectangle, check this check box off.
The Edge Information dialog – Drawstyle tab
Arrows
Check the Arrows check box to display the comparison information as colored arrows.
The arrow size can be edited using the text boxes as shown above.
Measured border
Check the Measured border check box on to show the measured border. In the
corresponding drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the
measured border, check this check box off.
Projected border
Check the Projected border check box to show the Projected border. In the corresponding
drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the projected border,
check this check box off.
The Information dialog
439
Nominal border
Check the Nominal border check box to show the nominal border. In the corresponding
drop down box, you can select the color for its display. To hide the nominal border, check
this check box off.
The Attributes dialog – Drawstyle tab
The Attributes dialog appears when the Colors tool is selected in the general toolbar. It allows
you to define the display color of individual objects.
Color
The required color for the selected object can be selected from the drop down list
Randomize
When this option is checked then each of the selected objects will be assigned a different
(random) color. This function is useful when you have a number of point clouds selected
and you wish to easily distinguish between them without having to assign individual
different colors.
Separate solid faces
This option assigns a random color to each of the faces in the selected object. It thus
enables you to easily distinguish all the different faces on a single object.
Default
This removes the randomly assigned colors and returns the color to the default color for
the type of object.
Transparency
This makes the colors transparent to the alpha level indicated.
Lights
This option shows a light source thus creating shading on the object.
The Attributes tab
The Attributes tab displays attribute values for selected objects.
The objects that can be selected are:
Nominal solids / meshes / point clouds or features
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
440
Nominal features
The values for attributes in this tab are used for all alignment and comparison operation, and no
longer need to be defined specifically for these operations.
The attribute values that can be edited in this tab depend on the selected items.
Attributes for Nominal solids/ meshes /point clouds
Material thickness
This parameter defines the sheet metal thickness associated with the part. This does not
apply to point clouds. It is used in comparison info.
The value must entered in the current unit of length, visible in the bottom right corner of
the scene.
Compare tolerance
This is the tolerance used for alignment and comparison. Upper and lower values can be
defined. Sheet metal parts often have different tolerances depending on whether their
faces and edges have to mate with other parts. Parts that have no connection with other
parts can have larger tolerance values.
The values that are defined here relate to the object selected. When performing a
comparison the number of created compare objects depends on the number of ranges that
are defined here.
To define attributes
1. Click on the Attribute info tool in the Info toolbar.
2. Select the object in the tree.
3. Enter the required values.
4. Click [Apply].
441
Automation
Automation allows you to record a series of actions that form a script that can be saved, loaded
and played back.
The Automation window is opened by selecting View-Automation from the main menu bar.
It contains a number of functions for creating and playing the automation scripts.
The Function buttons
New
This creates a new script. If the current script has been modified since it was last saved
you will prompted to save the current script. The automation tree will be cleared and the
single "end" entry will be visible.
Load
This will load an existing script in the Automation window. If the current script has been
modified since it was last saved you will prompted to save the current script. The newly
commands contained in the newly loaded script will appear in the Automation tree.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
442
Save As
This saves the current script. The "Save Metris Focus Automation Document" dialog
appears in which you can enter the file name and the location where the file will be
stored. Automation scripts are saved with the file extension .mfa
Record
When this button is pressed, all the following user actions performed will be recorded in
the current script.
Pressing this button again ends the recording.
Play
This starts the playback of the current script. A small arrow ( ) shows the command that
is currently being executed. Play will continue until the Stop button is pressed.
Step
This allows you to step through the automation script, command by command. The
current command is indicated by the presence of the small arrow ( ).
Stop
This stops the playback or the recording of the current script. .
Insert
This button allows you to insert an action into the current script.
When the button has an colored background (as shown above) then the command will be
inserted above the currently selected command.
If the button has a clear background, then the command will be inserted at the end of the
script.
Repeat
This button will schedule the Focus Automation software if it is installed, from which you
can run a number of automated batch jobs. If Focus Automation is not installed then this
button will cause the automation script to be replayed repeatedly until the Stop button is
clicked.
Eventing
This enables you to insert a condition where the script will wait for a specific event to
take place. It schedules the "Wait for an Event" dialog.
Automation
443
Wait for file
When this option is checked, the automation script will wait for a certain file to appear at
a given location. When the file is there, automation continues.
User message
When this option is checked, you can enter text in the dialog, that will appear in a
message box that will be displayed when this line is executed in the script. If the "Display
image" option is checked, the picture specified here will be also appear.
During play back, a dialog will pop up with the text and screen shot showing. The dialog
has 2 buttons:
[Continue] which will cause the automation script to continue with the next statement.
[Stop]: which causes the automation script to stop.
The user can access the scene while this dialog is open.
Timeout
When this option is checked, automation will continue after the timeout time has elapsed,
regardless of whether the condition was fulfilled or not.
Toggle Breakpoint
This inserts a breakpoint into the automation script that causes the script to halt. The
actions in the script can be continued either by clicking the Play or the Step buttons.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
444
Delete breakpoint
The Delete breakpoint deletes all the breakpoints inserted in the script.
The Script Tree
Each of the commands contained in the automation script are listed in Script Tree. Items
can be selected in the Script Tree and operations carried out on them.
Multiple items can be selected using the <Shift> and the <Ctrl> keys.
command node
Each command is a node in the tree and each of the parameters associated with the
command can be seen by clicking on the + sign next to it.
Double clicking on any of the parameters allows you to edit them as shown above. This
thus allows you to easily adapt a script to use a different file or model for example.
current command
The arrow indicates the current command.
If the script has halted at this command because there is problem, then this command is
shown in red.
break
A command at which the script will halt is indicated by a hand.
The Contextual menu
This can be obtained by clicking on selected command(s) with the RMB. Multiple commands
can be selected using the <Shift> and the <Ctrl> keys, thus providing extensive editing facilities.
Automation
445
Undo
This will undo the last action performed on items in the Script tree. It does not undo the
action performed by the script. Only one level of undo is possible.
Redo
This will redo the last action that was undone.
Cut
This will cut the selected item(s) from the Script Tree. They can then be Inserted to
another position.
Copy
This will copy the selected item(s) from the Script Tree. They can then be Inserted to
another position.
Insert
This will insert items that have been cut or copied from the tree into the tree. They will be
inserted above a selected item.
Delete
This will remove the selected item(s) from the ScriptTree
Set Execution Pointer
This Moves the execution pointer to the current command as indicated by the arrow ( ).
The script will then be executed from this command.
To create an automation script
1. Click on the New button if necessary to start a new script file.
2. Click on the Record button to start the recording mode.
3. Insert actions by executing commands which will then be recorded in the script.
4. When the required actions have been recorded, stop the recording either by clicking on
the Stop button or by clicking on the record button again.
5. Click the Save As button to save the script.
Note: Automation is not supported for all the commands. Though most of the commands have
automation support, there may be some that can not be recorded into a script.
To load and playback a script
1. Click on the Load button.
2. In the dialog that appears browse to the location where the require file is to be found.
3. Click [Open].
4. Click on the Play button to playback the script.
To insert a command into a existing script
1. Click on the Load button and select the required script file.
2. Click on the Insert button until it is in the required mode. If you wish to insert a command
at a specific point in the script, then the Insert button needs to have a colored background.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
446
If you wish to insert the command at the end of the script then the button should have a
clear background.
3. Click on the Record toggle button to start the recording mode.
4. To insert the command at a specific point, click on the script line above which new
command should be inserted.
5. Execute the required commands. They will be inserted into the script at the required
location.
Note: that items that are already in the automation tree can be copied and pasted
To edit a script
1. Click on the Load button and select the required script file.
2. Click on the button in front of a command to open up the tree and show all the
parameters associated with that command.
3. Double click on the parameter line.
4. The value of the editable parameter will appear in the input field.
5. Enter a new value then click outside of the input field. The new value will be displayed in
the command parameter list.
To add a break point to a script
1. Click on the Load button and select the required script file.
2. Click on a script line to select it.
3. Click on the Toggle Breakpoint button to insert a breakpoint at that script line.
When the script is played back it will halt at this line. The script can be continued by clicking on
the Step or the Play button.
A break point can be removed using the Delete Breakpoint button.
447
Glossary
A
Attribute: additional information attached to an object. This information can be visible or
invisible in the scene.
C
CMM: Coordinate Measuring Machine
CNC: Computer Numerically Controlled
Comparison information: Information object that contains comparison information of a global,
section, directional compare, edge and wall thickness comparison.
D
Deviation: The dimensional difference between a Measured and Nominal object.
Dimension: A distance/angle between 2 points/lines.
Drawstyle: Scene representation of objects.
E
Edge: The border of a mesh or solid.
F
Face: The smallest part of a mesh or solid.
Feature: Functional element in an object, such as a hole or a slot.
Flush: The distance between 2 points perpendicular to a line.
Flyout: Label that contains the information on the object it is attached to.
G
Gap: The distance between 2 point parallel to a line.
GD&T: Geometric Dimensioning &Tolerancing based on the ASME Y14.5M Standard
I
IGES: Initial Graphics Exchange Specification; a neutral exchange format for 2D or 3D CAD
product models, drawings, or graphics. Only 3D surface/solid information is imported in
Focus Inspection.
L
Laser line: Projection of the laser light emitted by the scanner on the physical object to be
measured.
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
448
Laser plane: Plane of the laser light emitted by the scanner
LMB: Left mouse button
M
Mesh: Representation of a physical object as a collection of connected triangular faces. It can be
created from a point cloud.
MFI: Metris Focus Inspection, the native file format of Focus Inspection
MMB: Middle mouse button
N
Nominal model: Model to compare the measured model against, such as a surface/solid model
or a STL model
O
Object: All things represented in the scene
P
Point cloud: Central object that represents a physical object as a set of points in space
Q
Qualification: A scanner orientation. A qualification can be red = orientation not computed,
orange = orientation is computed but less accurate than the threshold, green = orientation
is computed a more accurate than the threshold
R
Rail: Series of sections defined in parallel for which information can be viewed for the group
Reference sphere: The Metris sphere that is used for qualifications, calibration update and
alignments.
Report: Output of the comparison results in a specific layout
RMB: Right mouse button
Rotary table: a rotating table mounted on the CMM table. A rotary table allows to scan a part
automatically on all sides by rotating the part. This is mainly used on horizontal arm
CMMs
RPS: Reference Position System, a tool to align objects and features by subsequently fixing the
known degrees of freedom to a reference position and matching the remaining degrees of
freedom while maintaining the fixed ones
S
Scan line: Path between two positions, representing one linear movement of the scanner.
Scene: The graphical display of the application.
Glossary
449
Section: A 2D object representing a cut through a point cloud/mesh or solid.
Solid: Closed geometric model
Statistics information object: Information object that contains statistics information on a feature
detected from a point cloud
STL: Stereolithography Interface file format that has become the Rapid Prototyping industry's
defacto standard data transmission format. This format approximates the surfaces of a
solid model with triangles and lacks engineering data. The STL format was designed to
give just the amount of data in the form of meshes. STL files may be ASCII or binary in
form.
Stripe: Set of scanned points that result from a single shot.
Subtract: Automatic cutting of point cloud/meshes based on inter-distance and point cloud/mesh
density.
T
Task: A part of a workflow. Each task represents a separate part of a workflow.
TBI: Turbine Blade Inspection
U
UCS: User Coordinate System, a coordinate system created by the user.
W
Wall thickness: The thickness of a double sided mesh/solid
Workflow: A list of tasks that describe all steps to follow between start and end.
451
Index
2
2D Best Fit ............................................... 315
A
Add to Measured ...................................... 209
Add to Nominal.......................................... 74
Add to Rail ............................................... 365
Align 3-2-1 ............................................... 318
Align 6 Points .......................................... 305
Align N Points.......................................... 300
Align Normals .......................................... 132
Aligned Parallel ............................... 124, 402
Alignment Manager ................................. 329
Angle ................................................ 127, 411
Annotation................................................ 385
Arrange Flyouts ....................................... 383
Assembly Match ...................................... 285
Auto Dimension ....................................... 279
Auto Rename ........................................... 281
B
BestFit ...................................................... 311
C
Color Bar Properties ................................ 383
Compare Edges ........................................ 345
Compare Features .................................... 350
Compare Flyouts ...................................... 366
Compare Info ........................... 284, 351, 387
Compare Rail Flyout ................................ 385
Compare Section ...................................... 358
Connection ............................................... 202
Coordinate System ................................... 201
Create Color Bar ...................................... 383
Create GD&T ........................................... 114
Create Rail Flyout .................................... 384
Create Report ........................................... 387
Create Section .......................................... 352
Curvature ................................................. 346
D
Delete Selected ........................................ 217
Detect Edge .............................................. 275
Detect/Fit Feature .................................... 224
Create Measured Feature Point ............. 226
Create Measured Point cloud/Mesh-Area
.......................................................... 257
Detect / Fit Measured Circle ................. 231
Detect / Fit Measured Cone ................... 254
Detect / Fit Measured Line .................... 228
Detect / Fit Measured Plane .................. 246
Detect / Fit Measured Sphere ................ 252
Detect Measured Christmas Tree .......... 268
Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin .......... 258
Detect Measured Cylindrical Pin with
Cone Guiding.................................... 260
Detect Measured Diamond Pin ............. 262
Detect Measured Hexagon Slot ............. 243
Detect Measured Key Slot ..................... 240
Detect Measured Rectangular Slot ........ 237
Detect Measured Round Slot ................. 235
Detect Measured T-stud ........................ 264
Detect Measured Welded Bolt .............. 266
Detect Measured Welded Nut ............... 270
Detect/Fit Measured Cylinder ............... 249
Deviations ................................................ 414
Diameter .......................................... 126, 410
Digital Readout ........................................ 141
Directional Compare ................................ 338
Focus 10.1 Inspection Handheld Reference Manual
452
Duplicate .................................................. 293
E
Edit/Recreate Report ................................ 397
Evaluate GDT .......................................... 349
Export Features ........................................ 113
F
Failed Features ......................................... 416
Feature Compare Info .............................. 416
Feature Flyouts......................................... 381
Features .................................................... 413
Filter ......................................................... 220
Fit Feature .................................................. 75
Flip Feature .............................................. 284
Flip Normal .............................................. 134
Flyout Properties .............................. 351, 382
Fuse .......................................................... 219
G
Gap Flush Caliper ............................ 128, 405
Gap-Step Dimension ................................ 404
Global Compare ....................................... 337
Golden template ....................................... 297
H
Handheld scan .......................................... 143
Hardware Configuration .......................... 202
Hide Faces ................................................ 136
I
Import ......................................................... 69
Import Features ................................ 104, 423
Interactive Alignment .............................. 334
Iterative N Points Alignment ................... 307
K
Keep Selected........................................... 214
L
Linear Perpendicular ........................ 121, 400
M
Merge ....................................................... 209
Merge Solids ............................................ 138
Mesh ........................................................ 223
Mesh border ............................................. 283
Mesh Volume........................................... 297
Mirror Objects ......................................... 294
O
Object Information................................... 398
Offset Mesh ............................................. 289
Optimize .................................................. 223
P
Prescan ..................................................... 142
Processing Settings .................................. 203
Q
Quick Shading ......................................... 295
R
Radius .............................................. 125, 409
Refine Mesh ............................................. 296
Remove Duplicate Faces ......................... 135
Remove Faces .......................................... 136
Remove from Rail.................................... 365
Remove mesh........................................... 224
Remove Shading ...................................... 296
Report Features ........................................ 399
Restore Report State ................................ 395
Reverse Mesh Normals ............................ 293
RPS alignment ......................................... 324
S
Scale ......................................................... 290
Scanner Image ......................................... 141
Index
453
Scene Annotation ..................................... 386
Section Planes .......................................... 414
Section/Mesh borders............................... 414
Select Single Side .................................... 288
Separate .................................................... 212
Smooth ..................................................... 291
Solid Display Accuracy ............................. 73
Solid to Mesh ............................................. 71
Subtract .................................................... 209
Surface Point from Flyout ........................ 343
Surface Point from Point .................. 104, 342
T
Tactile Measurement ............................... 143
Translate-Rotate ....................................... 331
U
Update Report .......................................... 396
V
View Section ............................................ 412
W
Wall Thickness ........................................ 347
Recommended